Files Flexshafts Gauges Gravers Hammers Lamps & Loupes Plating Pliers & Shears Polishing Ring Tools Safety Saw Frames & Blades

Transcription

1 IKOHE a trusted name in Jewelry Crafting Techniques offers you an innovative line of Tools, Supplies and Equipment to transform your visions into contemporary or traditional art forms. We are delighted to present our comprehensive catalog with dedicated sections that feature a concise listing of pictorially illustrated products. With years of experience, we have become a primary supplier to the needs of metalsmiths in the industry. To meet the challenges of modern day techniques our range of selected professional tools covers all aspects of jewelry making, wax carving, casting, raising, forming, sculpting, setting, finishing and more... Over the years, we ve built a reputation for on-time delivery, competitive pricing and quality tested products to satisfy the demanding needs of distributors and professional jewelers. Today, we re better prepared than ever to meet the growing needs of global markets that have changed over the years. When you think of quality with value - Think IKOHE. Polishing Abrasives Bench Accessories Brushes Buffs Burs Casting Cleaners Dapping Diamond Tools & Supplies Drawplates & Rolling Mills Drills Engraving Finishing Files Flexshafts Gauges Gravers Hammers Lamps & Loupes Plating Pliers & Shears Polishing Ring Tools Safety Saw Frames & Blades &More... Scales Screwdrivers Setting Tools Soldering Stamping Surface Finishing Tags Testing Torches Tweezers Vises Watch Tools Waxes Books Ikohe Inc. 19 Industiral Ave Mahwah NJ 07430

2 ABRASIVES 1. India Combination Stone Made from aluminum oxide, these stones provide a keen cutting edge on gravers and other tools. Lubrication with a light oil is essential. Available as a combination-one side coarse and the other fine. Color-Orange/Brown. SIZE GRADE AT X 2 X 1 COARSE/FINE AT X 2 X 1 COARSE/FINE 2. India Oil Stone Made from superior grade aluminum oxide. Enhances cutting edges on knives, chisels, gravers and other precision tools. Lubrication with a light oil smear eliminates swarf build up during use. SIZE GRADE AT X 1 X 1 /2 FINE AT X 2 X 1 FINE AT X 2 X 1 FINE AT-033 WOOD BOX FOR -AT-028/AT-031 SIZE GRADE AT X 1 X 1 /2 MEDIUM AT X 2 X 1 MEDIUM AT X 2 X 1 MEDIUM 3. Ruby Bench Stone Made of pure synthetic ruby crystals, these stones have outstanding wear resistance and are therefore specially suited for sharpening carbide gravers and tools. Use with or without light oil lubrication. SIZE GRADE AT X 1 X 3 /8 FINE TWO SIDES AT X 1 X 3 /8 MED.TWO SIDES AT X 1 X 3 /8 FINE ONE SIDE AT X 1 X 3 /8 MED. ONE SIDE SIZE GRADE AT /4 X 2 X 3 /8 FINE ONE SIDE AT /4 X 2 X 3 /8 MED. ONE SIDE 4. 3M Diamond Whetstone A superb flat surface coated with graded diamond particles. Achieve a mirror like finish on carbide gravers for free cutting. Lubricate lightly with water. SIZE MICRON GRIT AT X AT X AT X AT X SIZE MICRON GRIT AT X AT X AT X AT X Graver Sharpening Stone Diamond sharpening stones are designed to fine finish the edges of gravers, screwdrivers and tools. A sharper stronger tool edge allows you to achieve cleaner lines and brighter cuts. Lubricate with water. Size 6 X 2 X 1 /4. GRIT GRADE AT FINE AT X-FINE 2

3 6. Original Arkansas Stones Natural Arkansas stones are excellent for sharpening and final honing of gravers. Available in hard and ultra hard grades. Hard grades are dense-grained and ideal for pre-sharpening. Ultra hard are close-grained for final honing. Lubricate with a light oil for rapid cutting. SIZE GRADE AT X 2 X 1 /2 HARD AT X 2 X 1 /2 HARD AT X 2 X 1 /2 HARD SIZE GRADE AT X 2 X 1 /2 EX-HARD AT X 2 X 1 /2 EX-HARD AT X 2 X 1 /2 EX-HARD ABRASIVES Imported Arkansas SIZE GRADE AT X 40 X 12mm HARD AT X 50 X 12mm HARD AT X 50 X 18mm HARD AT X 40 X 18mm HARD SIZE GRADE AT X 50 X 18mm HARD AT X 50 X 18mm HARD AT X 50 X 18mm HARD 7. Oil Specially formulated for use as a lubricant on sharpening stones. Avoids swarf build up and speeds up the sharpening process. CONTENTS AT /2 oz AT oz 8. 3M Sanding Bands-Silicon Carbide(Sic) & Aluminum Oxide(Alo) Ideal for deburring, smoothing, and finishing flat or contoured surfaces. These bands are ready to use, slip-on type and easily mounted on drum arbors. Available in silicon carbide or aluminum oxide in grits from coarse to fine. Suitable for pre-polish of gold, silver and alloys. Speed- max 30,000 rpm. For arbors- page 9. SiC ALo DIA. X L GRIT AT-147 AT /4 X 1 /2 80 AT AT /4 X 1 /2 120 AT AT /4 X 1 /2 180 AT AT /4 X 1 /2 240 SiC ALo DIA. X L GRIT AT AT /2 X 1 /2 80 AT AT /2 X 1 /2 120 AT AT /2 X 1 /2 180 AT AT /2 X 1 / M Ceramic Bands New ceramic wear resistant abrasive lasts three to four times longer than normal aluminum oxide. Provides a fast cutting rate that will increase productivity and lower band cost. Lubricate with water. Speed -15,000- max 25,000 rpm. Use with expandable drum arbors- page 9. DIA. X L GRIT AT /2 X AT /2 X DIA. X L GRIT AT /2 X 1 60 AT /2 X M Flex Diamond Bands Coated with graded diamond abrasive in micron sizes, these bands are unsurpassed for inside ring mirror finishing. Interspaced diamond nodes effectively smooth all surfaces withstanding any debris buildup. Speed- 15,000- max 20,000 rpm. Use with expanding drum arbors- page 9. DIA. X L MICRON AT /2 X 1 /2 250 AT /2 X 1 /2 125 AT /2 X 1 /2 74 AT /2 X 1 /2 40 AT /2 X 1 /2 20 DIA. X L MICRON AT /2 X AT /2 X AT /2 X 1 74 AT /2 X 1 40 AT /2 X

4 ABRASIVES 11. 3M Trizact Sanding Bands Sanding bands of coated aluminum oxide with cutting points evenly spaced over the entire area. Abrasion is gentle and smooth, reducing buffing or tumbling time. Bands may be used in lapidary and metal work. Speed- max 10,000 rpm. Use with expanding drum arbors - page 9. DIA. X L GRIT GRADE AT /2 X 1 /2 200 A100 AT /2 X 1 /2 220 A80 AT /2 X 1 /2 280 A65 AT /2 X 1 /2 400 A45 AT /2 X 1 /2 600 A30 AT /2 X 1 / A16 AT /2 X 1 / A6 DIA. X L GRIT GRADE AT /2 X A100 AT /2 X A80 AT /2 X A65 AT /2 X A45 AT /2 X A30 AT /2 X A16 AT /2 X A M Tri-mite Wet or Dry Coated Abrasive Sheets These silicon carbide paper sheets may be used wet or dry to achieve a fine uniform surface finish. Available in 9 x 11 sheets. GRIT AT AT AT AT AT AT M Imperial Micro-Finishing Film Sheets GRIT AT AT AT AT AT Micron graded aluminum oxide, bonded to a flexible backing, gives predictable surface finishes on all materials. Film sheet backing is durable. Moisten with water as a lubricant. Satin-like finishes are possible. Color coded for identification. Available in 8 1 /2 x 11 sheets. MICRON GRIT COLOR AT BROWN AT BLACK AT BLUE AT GREEN MICRON GRIT COLOR AT RED AT ORANGE AT LT. BLUE 14. 3M Wet or Dry Polishing Paper A more pliable, non-woven, lint free backing allows overall finishing of interiors, exteriors, and contours. Soft particles of micron sized abrasive eliminate mars on the work surface. Color coded for easy identification. May be used moist or dry. Available in 8 1 /2 x 11 sheets. MICRON GRIT COLOR AT GREEN AT GRAY AT BLUE MICRON GRIT COLOR AT PINK AT MINT AT GREEN 15. 3M Platinum Fre-Cut Abrasive Sheet Tri-m-ite, Fre-cut is silicon carbide abrasive paper for pre-surfacing platinum. This new abrasive is well suited for use on platinum. Use dry only. Sheet size 9 x 11. GRIT GRADE AT COARSE AT MEDIUM AT FINE 4

5 16. 3M PSA Diamond Lapping Discs Consistently graded diamond particles on a pressure sensitive disc, yields superior surface quality on precious metals and platinum. Always use discs with water to reduce heat build up and increase cutting capability. Discs are all 6 in diameter. Use with a flat flange of 6 diameter. Speed- max 3,000 rpm. MICRON GRIT AT AT AT ABRASIVES 17. 3M PSA Sanding Discs Pressure sensitive backed, these silicon carbide discs are suitable for pre-finishing lapidary and metal. Use wet or dry. Must be used with a flat flange of 6 diameter. Speed- max 3,000 rpm. DIA. GRIT AT AT AT M Micro-Finishing PSA Discs Superior graded aluminum oxide. Pressure sensitive discs have applications in jewelry and lapidary work. Consistent results are ensured by graded microns. May be used wet or dry. Speed- max 3,000 rpm. Discs are all 6 diameter. MICRON GRADE AT AT M PSA-Flex Diamond Strips Pressure sensitive adhesive backed flexible diamond strips are for custom tooling. These may be attached to hand files or sanding sticks to sand, smooth and file any material. Available as strips of 1 width X 8 long with uniform diamond surfaces in different grits. MICRON GRIT AT AT AT AT M Cartridge Rolls-Full Regular MICRON GRADE AT AT A practical method for finishing insides and blind holes. A distinctive feature of the rolls is that no sooner than the upper layer wears away, the layer beneath gets exposed, to continue the smoothing process. Speed 15,000 -max 20,000 rpm. Use with cartridge mandrels - page 16 DIA. X L SHANK GRIT AT /2 X 3 /4 1 /8 60 AT /2 X 3 /4 1 /8 80 AT /2 X 3 /4 1 /8 100 AT /2 X 3 /4 1 /8 120 AT /2 X 3 /4 1 /8 180 AT /2 X 3 /4 1 /8 240 AT /2 X 3 /4 1 / M Cartridge Rolls-Full Tapered DIA. X L SHANK GRIT AT /2 X 1 1 /8 60 AT /2 X 1 1 /8 120 AT /2 X 1 1 /2 1 /8 60 DIA. X L SHANK GRIT AT /2 X 1 1 /8 60 AT /2 X 1 1 /8 80 AT /2 X 1 1 /8 100 AT /2 X 1 1 /8 120 AT /2 X 1 1 /8 180 AT /2 X 1 1 /8 240 AT /2 X 1 1 /8 320 DIA. X L SHANK GRIT AT /2 X 1 1 /2 1 /8 80 AT /2 X 1 1 /2 1 /8 120 AT /2 X 1 1 /2 1 /

6 ABRASIVES #53 #54 # Small Rubber Bonded Wheels All CRATEX products are made with the highest grades of raw materials. The perfect blend of soft but durable chemical rubber and silicon carbide abrasive grains contribute to the assurance of receiving reliable high quality products, time after time. Each Cratex product is color coded for easy selection. Coarse(Green), Medium(Brown), Fine(Red) and Ex-Fine(Gray/Green). Depending on which color grit used, Cratex can debur, smooth, clean, blend or polish without chance of gouging the work surface (Precious Metals, Glass, Stone and plastic). All wheels have a 1 /16 center and can be used with either a 3 /32 or 1 /8 shank. Maximum speed 25,000 rpm. Use with 1 /16 mandrel- page 16. #80 #2 SHAPE DIA. X THICK STYLE COARSE MEDIUM FINE EX-FINE WHEEL 5 /8 X 3 /32 53 AC-001 AC-002 AC-003 AC-004 WHEEL 5 /8 X 1 /8 54 AC-005 AC-006 AC-007 AC-008 WHEEL 7 /8 X 1 /8 74 AC-009 AC-010 AC-011 AC-012 WHEEL 1 X 1 /8 80 AC-013 AC-014 AC-015 AC-016 K/EDGE 5 /8 X 3 /32 2 AC-017 AC-018 AC-019 AC-020 K/EDGE 1 X 1 /8 5 AC-021 AC-022 AC-023 AC-024 #5 23. Cylinders & Points For use with light pressure. Maximum safe speed 25,000 rpm. Use with 1 /16 mandrel- page 16. SHAPE DIA. X THICK STYLE COARSE MEDIUM FINE EX-FINE CYLINDER 7 /8 X 1 /4 6 AC-025 AC-026 AC-027 AC-028 BULLET 1 X 9 /32 8 AC-029 AC-030 AC-031 AC Large Wheel For best performance operate below the maximum 5,250 rpm. Sold individually. SHAPE DIA. X T X H STYLE COARSE MEDIUM FINE EX-FINE WHEEL 4 X 1 /2 X 1 /2 408 AC-033 AC-034 AC-035 AC Assortment Kits STYLE #777 Assortment contains 80 small wheels and points in popular sizes and grits. Comes with four mandrels and 5 /8 to 1 sizes of wheels and points in clear divided box. STYLE #778 Assortment contains 64 points and cylinders, 2 each of all eight shapes in each of the 4 grits and 4 each 1 /8 shank mandrel. AC-037 AC PCS ASSORTMENT-# PCS ASSORTMENT-#778 6

7 26. 3M Shop Rolls A premium quality abrasive glue bonded to cloth and available in two widths and different grades. Useful for in-house fabrication of flap wheels, sanding sticks and other shapes. Generates a smooth, clean surface on all materials. SIZE GRIT AT X 50yds 80 AT X 50yds 120 AT X 50yds 180 AT X 50yds 320 SIZE GRIT AT /2 X 50yds 80 AT /2 X 50yds 120 AT /2 X 50yds 180 AT /2 X 50yds 320 ABRASIVES 27. 3M Blue Grit Shop Rolls Tough aluminum oxide bonded to cloth with 3M's Resinite. This technique extends the life four to five times of conventional shop rolls. May be used for flap wheels or sanding sticks. SIZE GRIT AT X 50yds 80 AT X 50yds 120 AT X 50yds 180 AT X 50yds 240 SIZE GRIT AT /2 X 50yds 80 AT /2 X 50yds 120 AT /2 X 50yds 180 AT /2 X 50yds M Silicon Carbide Stikit Rolls-Platinum Tri-M-ite Fre-cut, 414N paper open coat. Provides exceptional finishes and excellent conformability for contour sanding. SIZE GRIT AT /2 X 50yds 80 AT /2 X 50yds Shop Rolls SIZE GRIT AT /2 X 50yds 120 AT /2 X 50yds 150 Aluminum oxide, glue bonded to a cloth backing. Available in rolls of convenient widths. This makes it suitable for use in numerous applications: making flaps, regular or tapered cones and split mandrels. May be used for pre-finishing all materials. SIZE GRIT AT /2 X 50yds 60 AT /2 X 50yds 80 AT /2 X 50yds 100 AT /2 X 50yds 120 AT /2 X 50yds 150 AT /2 X 50yds 180 AT /2 X 50yds 220 AT /2 X 50yds 240 SIZE GRIT AT X 50yds 80 AT X 50yds 120 AT X 50yds 150 AT X 50yds 180 AT X 50yds Emery Cloth Sheets Commercial emery, glue bonded to durable cloth backing in three grades. Tougher than paper, these cloths are used for pre-finishing any type of material. Sheet size 9 x Emery Discs-PSA Soft, adhesive backed emery discs, directly affix on felt wheel faces. Economical to use either wet or dry. AT-266 AT-267 AT-268 GRADE FINE MEDIUM COARSE SIZE GRIT AT AT AT

8 ABRASIVES 32. Emery Polishing Paper Corundum grains are glue bonded to a paper back. Finely graded, these papers smooth surfaces to a high degree of finish. Efficient for dry, satin smooth polishing. Sheet size 8 1 /2 X 14. GRIT GRADE AT-167 4/0 FINE AT-168 3/0 FINE AT-169 2/0 FINE 33. No Fil Durite Paper GRIT GRADE AT MEDIUM AT-171 #1 MEDIUM AT-172 #2 COARSE AT-173 #3 COARSE 37. Ring Shell Mandrels 34. No-Lap Bands Made of seasoned wood, these mandrels provide a snug fit for emery ring shells, either paper or cloth. A pre-drilled center enables direct fitment to the arbor of the bench polisher. Sharp silicon carbide abrasive bonded onto light weight paper backing. These papers are flexible yet durable. Excellent for finishing hard materials like platinum. Sheet size 9 X 11. GRIT GRIT AT AT AT Spiral construction avoids shadow marks and provides smooth, fast cutting action on all hard metals. Achieve close tolerances when finishing curved, contoured and hard-to-reach areas. For arbors page 9. DIA. X L GRIT GRADE AT /8 X 1 /2 120 FINE AT /8 X 1 /2 80 MEDIUM AT /8 X 1 /2 60 COARSE 35. Cartridge Rolls 38. Emery Ring Shells DIA. X L GRIT GRADE AT /2 X 1 /2 120 FINE AT /2 X 1 /2 80 MEDIUM AT /2 X 1 /2 60 COARSE Most effective for flash removal, polishing or removing machine tool marks and edge breaking. Reaches into corners where larger diameter tools cannot work. Available in Aluminum Oxide resin bond. Use with cartridge roll mandrels- page 16 DIA. X L GRIT GRADE AT /2 X FINE AT /2 X MEDIUM AT /2 X 1 80 COARSE 36. Flap Wheels AT AT DIA. X L GRIT GRADE AT /2 X 1 1 /2 180 FINE AT /2 X 1 1 /2 120 MEDIUM AT /2 X 1 1 /2 80 COARSE Use on flex shafts for blending flat or contoured surfaces. Maximum speed 15,000 rpm. Shank size 3 /32. SIZE GRIT AT X 10mm 100 AT X 10mm 150 AT X 10mm 240 AT X 10mm 320 SIZE GRIT AT X 5mm 100 AT X 5mm 150 AT X 5mm 240 AT X 5mm 320 Ring shells of emery, on paper or cloth backing fit closely on wooden mandrels. These tapered cones are a great way to polish the inside of rings of all sizes. Available in a set of grades from coarse to fine. LENGTH AT AT AT-270 PAPER SHELLS PKG. OF 12 AT-271 PAPER SHELLS PKG. OF 6 & MANDREL AT-272 CLOTH SHELLS PKG. OF 12 AT-273 CLOTH SHELLS PKG. OF 6 & MANDREL 8

9 39. Emery Sticks Various grades of emery paper, glued to flat wood handles 3 /4 X 9, provide a solution for sanding and polishing all materials during manual finishing. Select from various grades. ABRASIVES GRIT GRADE AT-260 4/0 FINE AT-261 3/0 FINE AT-262 2/0 FINE GRIT GRADE AT-263 #1 MEDIUM AT-264 #2 COARSE AT-265 #3 COARSE 40. Cone-Loc Drum Sander for Shop Rolls Precision machined aluminum rubber lined drum used for metal finishing applications, such as contour sanding and sprue removal. Unique split drum accepts a length of abrasive cloth strip, which when worn away is easily replaceable. May be used on bench polishers with 1 /2 arbor. DIA. X T DC X 1 1 /2 DC X Aluminum Back Plate for Split Lap Aluminum flat back plate similar to a split lap, easy to use with various grades of 6 and 8 PSA abrasive discs. These plates are used on split lap machine. DIA. X HOLE AT X 5 /8 AT X 5 /8 42. Expandable Drum Arbors Steel arbors with a solid synthetic rubber drum expand evenly when tightened with a screw. Secures sanding bands firmly and provides a cushioned support for uniform finishing. Dia L SHANK SIZE DIA. X L AT /32 1 /4 X 1 /2 AT /32 1 /2 X 1 /2 AT /32 1 /2 X 1 SHANK SIZE DIA. X L AT /8 1 /4 X 1 /2 AT /8 1 /2 X 1 /2 AT /8 1 /2 X High Speed Cut-off Wheels Regular thickness aluminum oxide wheels in a rubber bond. Useful for free hand cutting or carving. Arbor hole is 1 /16. Speed-max 20,000 rpm. Use with a mandrel.-page 16. DIA. X T AT /2 X AT /2 X Separating Discs Small discs of silicon carbide and aluminum oxide in a flexible bond for cutting and grooving. These discs are cut on both sides and easily part sprues in any material. Speed max 20,000 rpm. Use with 1 /16 mandrel.-page AT-191 AT-193 DIA. X T TYPE AT /8 X SUPER FLEX AT /8 X SUPER THIN AT /8 X EXTRA THIN DIA. X T TYPE AT /8 X REGULAR AT /16 X HIGH SPEED

10 ABRASIVES 45. Zirconia Pin Hole Sanding Discs Zirconia sanding discs are superior to other conventional abrasives. Aggressively cuts and grinds metals with uniform file-like finish. Prolong life by using water as a lubricant. Speed max- 30,000 rpm. Packed 100 per box. Use with 1 /16 mandrel- page 16. DIA. GRADE AT /4 COARSE AT /4 MEDIUM AT /4 FINE 46. Adalox Pin Hole Sanding Discs DIA. GRADE AT /8 COARSE AT /8 MEDIUM AT /8 FINE These are thin paper backed discs with aluminum oxide glue bonded on one side. Specially for use in sanding and smoothing gold jewelry. Speed max- 30,000 rpm. Use with screw mandrels.- page 16. Packed 100 per box. 47. Snap-on Discs- Brass Center & Pinhole DIA. GRADE AT /2 80 AT /2 100 AT /2 120 AT /2 220 AT /2 320 These paper and plastic backed flexible discs come with a square arbor hole for use with a snap-on/off mandrel. Moore s discs are available in Adalox, Emery, Waterproof and Plastic. Fine- Polishing smoothest surface. Medium- Less reduction, smoother finish Coarse- Gross reduction and shaping. Speed max.-30,000 rpm. Use brass center with snap-on mandrel and pin hole with screw type mandrel.- page 16 Brass Center: Packed 50 pcs per box. Pin Hole: Packed 100 pcs per box. Adalox Paper: Aluminum oxide of premium quality is glue bonded to a paper backing. TYPE DIA. FINE MEDIUM COARSE 7 BRASS AT-225 AT-226 AT-227 /8 ADALOX PIN HOLE AT-221 AT-222 AT-223 PAPER 3 BRASS AT-228 AT-229 AT-230 /4 PIN HOLE AT-215 AT-216 AT-217 Emery Paper: Silicon Carbide fast cutting, premium quality is glue bonded to a paper backing. TYPE DIA. FINE MEDIUM COARSE 7 BRASS AT-231 AT-232 AT-233 /8 EMERY PIN HOLE AT-218 AT-219 AT-220 PAPER 3 BRASS AT-657 AT-658 AT-659 /4 PIN HOLE AT-666 AT-667 AT-668 Waterproof: Silicon carbide of premium quality is glue bonded to a paper backing. TYPE DIA. FINE MEDIUM COARSE 7 BRASS AT-675 AT-676 AT-677 /8 PIN HOLE AT-669 AT-670 AT-671 WATERPROOF 3 BRASS AT-678 AT-679 AT-680 /4 PIN HOLE AT-672 AT-673 AT-674 Magnum & SandPlastic: Aluminum oxide electrostatically bonded to a reinforced plastic backing increases cutting performance. TYPE DIA. FINE MEDIUM COARSE MAGNUM 7 /8 BRASS AT-235 AT-236 AT-237 PIN HOLE /4 BRASS AT-238 AT-239 AT-240 PIN HOLE SANDPLASTIC 7 /8 BRASS AT-681 AT-682 AT-683 PIN HOLE AT-687 AT-688 AT /4 BRASS AT-684 AT-685 AT-686 PIN HOLE AT-690 AT-691 AT

11 48. Silicone Mounted Points Flexible open pore polishers, in a rubber bond, specially suited for extra fine mirror finishing. Impregnated with microgrit polishing compounds for direct application. Lubricate with water. Speed-5,000 max 10,000 rpm. ABRASIVES Shank Shank COLOR K/EDGE POINT SQ/EDGE CYLINDER Ø 11 X 2.5mm Ø 5.5 X 15mm Ø 11 X 2.5mm Ø 14 X 12mm BLUE AT-080 AT-084 AT-088 AT-092 BLACK AT-081 AT-085 AT-089 AT-093 WHITE AT-082 AT-086 AT-090 AT-094 PINK AT-083 AT-087 AT-091 AT Silicone Polishers for Precious Alloys Silicone polishing wheels and points are flexible, work fast and efficient. Specially suited for blending and contouring precious alloys. Impregnated with microgrit polishing compounds for direct applications. Lubricate with water. Speed 5,000-12,000 rpm. Black-Soft and flexible. White- Universal polisher. Pink- Super high luster. Blue- High luster finish. Dark Blue- High luster. Use screw mandrels- page 16. Mandrel COLOR SQ/EDGE K/EDGE CYLINDER CYLINDER CYLINDER PT. CYL SQ/EDGE K/EDGE Ø 22 X 3mm Ø 22 X 4mm Ø 7 X 20mm Ø 9 X 20mm Ø 12 X 20mm Ø 6 X 24mm Ø 17 X 2.5mm Ø 18 X 3.5mm BLACK AT-101 AT-102 AT-103 AT AT-060 AT-104 AT-105 AT-106 WHITE AT-107 AT-108 AT-111 AT AT-061 AT-112 AT-109 AT-110 PINK AT-114 AT-115 AT-116 AT AT-063 AT-117 AT-118 AT-119 BLUE AT-121 AT-122 AT-125 AT AT-062 AT-126 AT-123 AT-124 DK-BLUE AT-132 AT-133 AT-136 AT AT-059 AT-137 AT-134 AT Silicone Unmounted Polishers These polishing wheels are wider and are used to blend exterior surfaces. Lubricate with water. Speed 5,000- max 10,000 rpm. Use screw mandrels- page 16. Ø 51. Silicone Inside Ring Polishers Ring polishers fit and polish the inside of rings to a high degree of shine. Lubricate with water. Cylinder Shape. Speed 1,000- max 8,000 rpm. Use screw mandrels- page 16. 5mm T 25mm COLOR Ø 17 X 6 Tmm Ø 22 X 6 Tmm DK-BLUE AT AT-071 BLACK AT-065 AT-072 WHITE AT-066 AT-073 BLUE AT-067 AT-074 PINK AT-068 AT-075 COLOR DK-BLUE BLACK WHITE BLUE PINK Ø 14 X 25 X 5mm AT AT-077 AT-078 AT-076 AT mm 52. Synthetic Rubber Polishing Pins These small diameter polishing pins are useful in hard to reach areas. Lubricate with water. Speed max. 15,000 rpm. Polishing pins must be held in pin chuck mandrels- page 16 COLOR BLUE D.BROWN GREY RED-BROWN GREEN DIA. X L GRADE COARSE MEDIUM MEDIUM FINE X-FINE AT AT AT AT AT X 20mm AT AT-129 AT AT-130 AT X 23mm 11

12 ABRASIVES 53. Dedeco Rubberized Mounted Points Microfine silicon and aluminum oxide, bonded with rubber in shapes to suit different profiles. Imparts excellent surface finish in the most difficult work areas, in gold, silver and alloys. Impregnated abrasive eliminates the need for use of polishing compounds. Lubricate with water. Shank size 3 /32. Speed max. 20,000. COLOR GRADE POINT BULLET WHEEL K/EDGE CYLINDER GREEN MEDIUM AT-305 AT-306 AT-307 AT-308 AT-309 BLUE FINE AT-303 AT-304 AT AT AT WHITE X-FINE AT-310 AT-311 AT-312 AT-313 AT Dedeco Rubber Flexie Polishers High purity abrasives in a flexible bond, that need to be run at high speeds for contour polishing of gold and silver. Lubricate with water. Speed max 20,000 rpm. Use with screw mandrels.- page 16 COLOR GRADE SQ/EDGE K/EDGE K/EDGE CLASP Ø 7 /8 X 1 /8 Ø 7 /8 Ø 5 /8 Ø 1 /4 X 15 /16 RED FINE AT-316 AT-317 AT-318 AT-319 GREEN COARSE AT-320 AT-321 AT-322 AT-323 WHITE FLEXIES AT-333 AT-334 AT-335 AT Airflex Polishing Wheels These wheels have an advantage in that they have fine air pockets for cooling during the polishing of platinum and precious alloys. Speed max 10,000 rpm. Lubricate with water. Use with screw mandrels- page 16 DIA. X THICKNESS LT. BLUE / COARSE GREEN / MEDIUM LT. BROWN / FINE 22 X 3mm AT AT AT X 4mm AT AT AT Airflex Polishing -Large Wheels These polishing wheels have a distinct advantage in that they have fine air pockets for cooling during the polishing of platinum and precious alloys. Speed max 3,000 rpm. Dia.100 X Width 15 X Hole 12.7mm. Safety Tip: Polishing wheels must always be flanged. AT-070 AT AT COLOR / GRADE BLUE / COARSE GRAY / MEDIUM BROWN / FINE Silicone Polishing- Large Wheels These are abrasive impregnated wheels for polishing precious alloys, without additional polishing compounds. Lubricate with water. Speed max 3,000 rpm. Dia 100 X Width 15 X Hole 12.7mm. Safety Tip: Polishing wheels must always be flanged. AT-526 AT-527 AT-528 AT-529 COLOR / GRADE WHITE / COARSE BLACK / MEDIUM LT. BLUE / FINE PINK / X-FINE

13 58. Brightboy Abrasives COARSE: Suggested for scratch removal on harder metal surfaces. MEDIUM: Perfect for fast removal and polishing of hard surfaces. FINE: Excellent for super finishing of precious metals. EX-FINE: Ultimate finishing and polishing on precious metals. FLEX: Denotes extra flexible bond perfect for delicate work. ABRASIVE TYPE: A-Aluminum Oxide S-Silicon Carbide SQ/EDGE WHITE FLEX WHEELS Aluminum Oxide grain impregnated into our soft and flexible rubber binder. Ideal for super finishing on gold. Arbor hole 1 /16. Use screw mandrels- page 16. DIA. X T GRIT STYLE AC /8 X 1 /16 EX-FINE -A #721 AC /8 X 1 /8 EX-FINE -A #722 K/EDGE WHEELS Flexible and durable fine polishing on precious metals. Arbor hole 1 /16. DIA. X T COLOR GRIT STYLE AC /8 X 3 /32 RED FLEX FINE -S #732 AC /8 X 1 /8 GREEN MEDIUM -S #752 SQ/EDGE WHEELS 7 /8 X 1 /8 - Arbor hole 1 /16. Use screw mandrels- page 16. COLOR GRIT STYLE AC-041 RED FLEX FINE -S #723 AC-042 GREEN MEDIUM -S #724 AC-043 BLACK COARSE -S #725 AC-044 BLUE FINE S #726 MOUNTED BULLET POINTS- Shank size 3 /32 COLOR GRIT STYLE AC-047 WHITE FINE -A #761 AC-048 RED EX-FINE -A #762 AC-049 BLUE FINE -S #763 AC-050 GREEN MEDIUM -S #764 AC-051 BLACK COARSE -S # Brightboy Pumice Wheels Brightboy Pumice wheels are specially designed for fine finishing and polishing on all precious metals. Very popular for prong polishing after stone setting. The white color designates fine grit pumice and blue color extra fine grit pumice. Arbor hole 1 /16. Use screw mandrels- page 16. STYLE SHAPE DIA. X T AC-052 WR822-BLUE SQ/EDGE 5 /8 X 5 /32 AC-053 WR888-BLUE SQ/EDGE 7 /8 X 1 /8 AC-054 WR999-WHITE K/EDGE 5 /8 X 5 /32 AC-055 WR999-BLUE K/EDGE 7 /8 X 1 /8 60. Diamond Polishers for Platinum Special shapes for reducing, profiling, and contouring platinum for a super high luster. Lubricate with water. Shank size 3 /32. Speed max 10,000 rpm. AS-110 SET OF 9 PCS. 61. Ceraton- Ceramic Glass Fiber Polishers A unique, superb polishing innovation. It combines ceramic and glass fibers in a thermosetting resin. Available in rods, color-coded for identification of grits from coarse to micro-fine. Use for platinum, gold, silver, copper, and aluminum alloys. May be used on gems. Size Dia. X L (2.35 X 50mm). Speed 10,000- max 20,000 rpm. Use pin chuck mandrels- Page 16. COLOR GRIT AS-150 RED 1200 AS-151 PINK 1000 AS-152 YELLOW 700 AS-153 GREEN 500 AS-154 LT. BLUE 400 COLOR GRIT AS-155 DK. BLUE 360 AS-156 BLACK 280 AS-157 ORANGE 250 AS-158 BROWN 180 AS PCS. SET-ONE EACH ABRASIVES 13

14 ABRASIVES 62. Shofu Mounted Stones These mounted stones are of high purity aluminum oxide free from carbon contamination. White stones are designed for finishing semi-precious stones. Coral stones will finish chrome cobalt and nickel alloys. Pink stones are for pre-polishing of precious metals. Green stones are for super polishing gold, silver and alloys. Speed- max 10,000 rpm. Mounted points have 3 /32 shanks and unmounted wheel needs 1 /16 screw mandrels- page 16. COLOR TAPERED WHEEL BARREL CONE WHEEL UNMTD. CORAL AT-040 AT-041 AT-042 AT-043 AT-044 PINK AT-045 AT AT AT WHITE AT-047 AT-048 AT-049 AT-050 AT-051 GREEN AT-052 AT AT AT Shofu Polishing Points & Wheels High quality polishing abrasive in a silicone bond. Excellent to use for brilliant finishes in precious metals, gold, silver and alloys. Available in three grades, brownie for pre-polish, greenie for polish and super greenie for super polish. Speed- max 20,000 rpm. Mounted points have 3 /32 shanks and unmounted wheels and cylinders need 1 /16 screw mandrels- page 16 COLOR BULLET K/EDGE SQ/EDGE FLOPPY WHEEL UNMTD. CYL. UNMTD. BROWNIE AS-125 AS-126 AS-127 AS-128 AS-129 AS-121 GREENIE AS-130 AS-131 AS-132 AS-133 AS-134 AS-122 SUP-GREENIE AS-136 AS-137 AS-138 AS-139 AS-140 AS Shofu Gold Polishing Kit Ultra fine abrasive in a rubber bond will give a high quality surface in super finishing. Brownie-will generate a satin smoothness. Greenie- will impart a mirror bright finish. Super greenie- will finish to a high luster. Items are also sold individually. Shank size 3 /32. AT-069 POLISHING KIT (12PCS.- BROWNIE-2 EA, GREENIE 1 EA. SUPER GREENIE 1 EA.) COLOR SQ/EDGE K/EDGE BULLET BROWNIE AS-127 AS-126 AS-125 GREENIE AS-132 AS-131 AS-130 SUP-GREENIE AS-138 AS-137 AS Pumice Wheels These special wheels combine pumice fines in a silicone binder that will generate a mirror finish on bezels and other set stones. Lubricate with water. Speed 5,000- max 10,000 rpm. Use with screw mandrels- page 16 SHAPE K/EDGE SQ/EDGE SQ/EDGE K/EDGE SIZE Ø 22 X 3.5mm Ø 22 X 3mm Ø 22 X 3.5mm Ø 22 X 3.5mm COLOR LT.GREY LT.GREY YEL.GREEN YEL.GREEN GRADE FINE FINE MEDIUM MEDIUM AT-097 AT-098 AT-099 AT Mizzy Heatless Wheels Silicon carbide resin bonded hard, coarse wheels can be shaped with a file or dresser. Achieves cutting without heat generation. Lubricate with water. Speed max 20,000 rpm. Use with screw mandrels- page 16. Packed 50 per box. DIA. X T HOLE AT /4 X 3 /16 1 /16 AT /4 X 1 /8 1 /16 AT /8 X 3 /16 1 /16 AT /8 X 1 /8 1 /16 AT /8 X 3 /32 1 /16 14

15 67. TopStar Brown: for pre-polishing of gold, composite and semi-precious alloys. Speed 20,000 rpm. Green: for high-gloss polishing of all precious and semi-precious alloys as well as composite. Speed 10,000 rpm. Shank size 3 / Goldino 70. Unmounted IKFlex Polishers Premium quality polishers in a flexible bond that is better than silicone rubber. Recommended for enhancing the surface quality of gold, silver and platinum to a very high shine. Available in different shapes to suit all applications. Speed 5,000- max 12,000 rpm. Arbor hole is 1 /16. Use with screw mandrels-page 16. COLOR Ø 5 X 16mm Ø 15 X 2.5mm Ø 14.5 X 2mm Ø 5.5 X 15.5mm Ø 22 X 3mm 64 BROWN AT-064 AT AT AT AT GREEN AT AT AT AT AT The ultimate polisher for all precious alloys in a 3-step system. Green: for finishing. Speed 20,000 rpm. Yellow: for pre-polish. Speed 15,000 rpm. Pink: for high-gloss polish. Speed 10,000 rpm. Arbor hole is 1 /16. Screw mandrels-page 16. COLOR Ø 22 X 3mm Ø 6 X 22mm Ø 22 X 3mm Ø 5.5 X 15.5mm GREEN AT AT AT AT YELLOW AT AT AT AT PINK AT AT AT AT Ocean Blue line universal silicone rubber polishers are for initial polishing of semi-precious alloys, crome cobolt and titanium. Speed 20,000 rpm. Arbor hole is 1 /16. Screw mandrels-page Mounted IKFlex Polishers Unique flexible bonded polishing points that are advantageous for mirror finishing complex designs on all precious metal. Points are mounted on 3 /32 shanks. Speed 5,000- max 10,000 rpm. ABRASIVES COLOR Ø 22 X 3mm Ø 17 X 3mm Ø 22 X 3mm Ø 17 X 3mm Ø 5.5 X 16.3mm Ø 5 X 16mm Ø15 X 2.5mm BLUE AT AT AT AT AT AT AT COLOR GRIT WHEEL K/EDGE CYLINDER Ø 22 X 3mm Ø 22 X 4mm Ø 7 X 20mm BLUE COARSE AT-138 AT-139 AT-140 BLACK MEDIUM AT AT AT BROWN FINE AT AT AT GREEN X-FINE AT AT AT COLOR GRIT POINT K/EDGE FLOPPY CYLINDER Ø 5 X 16mm Ø 15 X 2mm Ø 19 X 1mm Ø 14 X 12mm BLUE COARSE AT-141 AT-142 AT-143 AT-144 BLACK MEDIUM AT AT AT AT BROWN FINE AT AT AT AT GREEN X-FINE AT AT AT AT

16 MANDRELS REINFORCED FLANGED STRAIGHT 72. Mandrels-Screw These mandrels are for holding felt wheels, bristle brushes, cutting discs and items having a maximum thickness of 3 /16. Thread ends are right handed. For use in hand pieces and grinders. 73. Mandrels-Split SHANK HOLE TYPE AT /32 1 /16 REINFORCED AT /32 1 /16 FLANGED AT /8 1 /8 FLANGED AT /8 1 /4 FLANGED AT /32 1 /16 STRAIGHT The slot in the mandrel is to grip abrasive paper strips in order to build up a suitable diameter for inside finishing. 9 /64 11 /64 SHANK DIA. TYPE AT /32 9 /64 STRAIGHT AT /32 11 /64 STRAIGHT AT /32 3 /16-3 /32 TAPERED 74. Mandrels-Screw Taper For felt buffs, wheels, cylinders and points that are resilient enough to allow the tapered screw to form its threads into the material. Available in right hand threads only. SHANK TAPER AT /32 1 /16-3 /16 AT /8 1 /16-3 /16 AT /32 1 /16-3 /8 AT /8 1 /16-3 /8 75. Mandrels-Pin Chuck Chuck mandrel suitable for holding outer diameter of silicone pins. Pins can be held at various protrusions depending on the type of work. Thread ends are right handed. 76. Mandrels-Thread with Nut Use only when there are through holes; mostly for wheels and cylinders. Thread ends are right handed. SHANK THD. AT /32 3 /32 AT /8 3 / Mandrel-Snap on SHANK HOLE AT /32 2mm AT /32 3mm One piece construction with a snap-on end, has a square drive that is positive and avoids slippage. SHANK TYPE AT /32 SQ/DRIVE 78. Mandrels-Cartridge Roll Hardened steel mandrels for abrasive cartridge rolls. Pilot guides roll for absolute true running. SHANK PILOT/D X L AT /32 1 /8 X 3 /4 AT /8 1 /8 X 1 16

17 BENCH ACCESSORIES 1. Utility Anvils Engineered especially for the professional. Quick change over from steel to nylon face for all bench tasks. Simply press out from base and reverse. Hard neoprene non-slip base provides secure positioning and absorbs light to heavy hammer action. Available in two sizes. 2. Steel Bench Block SIZE AN AN /2 Flat back up steel base, for marking and lay out of designs. Case hardened, ground and polished. Includes a hole for riveting. 3. Bench Horn Anvil-Standard SIZE AN X 6 X 1 (NO GROOVE) AN /4 X 2 1 /4 X 1 AN X 4 X 1 One piece solid steel. Includes both round and flat horns, with a hole on top for riveting. Useful for flattening, shaping and forming. Size 4 1 /2 L X 1 5 /8 Ht. 4. Bench Horn Anvil AN-406 BENCH HORN ANVIL Made in steel, with round and flat horns. Working surfaces are polish finished. One horn includes a hole for riveting. AN-407 BENCH HORN ANVIL 5. Combination Bench Pin with Anvil Easily clamps to the workbench. Has a flat polished anvil for layout work, together with a replaceable hardwood bench pin for various other jobs. AN-405 AN-415 BENCH PIN WITH ANVIL REPLACEMENT PIN 18 AN Bench Pin with Metal Holder Fix with screws to a workbench. This convenient hardwood bench pin supports work securely while sawing, filing and polishing. 7. Wood Bench Pins AN-409 AN-412 COMPLETE 5 1 /4 X 2 1 /4 (BENCH PIN ONLY) Assorted sizes made from quality, seasoned hardwood. Smooth finished all over. The tongue fits all standard metal holders. AN-416 AN-412 AN-413 AN-414 AN-416 AN /4 X 2 1 /4 - SMALL 6 1 /4 X 2 1 /2 - MEDIUM 7 X 2 3 /4 - LARGE BENCH PIN -RIGHT BENCH PIN -LEFT

18 8. Kirkland Ring Clamps Precision aluminum construction with quick acting thumb screw grip. This hand fixture is very practical for working on rings. Indispensable for stone setting and polishing. BENCH ACCESSORIES RI-106 RI-107 COMBINATION CLAMP RING CLAMP-EXTERNAL 9. Ring Clamps Seasoned hardwood with leather lined jaws, adjustable to fit most rings. This useful tool enables a positive grip on rings during filing, polishing and general work. RI-101 RI-101 RI-102 RI-103 WOOD-RUSSIAN TYPE HARDWOOD DELUXE PLASTIC RING CLAMP RI-102 RI Inside Ring Holder Holds large and small rings on the inside, with a strong grip. Enables free working on the outside of the rings without leaving any scratch marks. RI-108 RING HOLDER WITH WING NUT 11. Setter s Ring Clamp This ring clamp has an extended lip of a unique design that provides extra support on a workbench. Ideal for polishing and other detail work. RI-104 PLASTIC DELUXE- USA 12. Ring Gripper Thumb screw clamp gives a firm grip on large or small rings. May be used while buffing and polishing the outside of the rings. RI-160 RING GRIPPER 13. Outside Ring Holder Holds large and small rings on the outside, in either of the two grooves. Enables easy and free working on the inside of rings. RI-165 OUTSIDE RING HOLDER 19

19 BENCH ACCESSORIES 14. V-Slot Bench Pin with Clamp A portable bench pin for a quick set up. It clamps to almost all workbenches. Ideal for sawing, filing and finishing. SIZE AN /4 X 2 1 /4 15. Tools for Filing -Hinges A high quality steel holder with an adjustable grip for various sizes of hinges. Its unique design eliminates wobble while filing. 16. Burnisher-Tungsten Carbide HO-021 HOLDER FOR HINGE Micro-grained, super hard tungsten carbide will smooth and finish all metals including platinum. Silver or gold will not adhere to this burnisher. Excellent for closing and smoothing. 17. Double-Ended Steel Tracer An economical steel scribe, with precise sharpened points at both ends. Highly accurate for marking layout work when designing. 18. Agate Burnishers BS-405 EN /8 TIP 7 /8 TIP Made of natural stone, straight or knife edged, this super polished surface smoothes all marks or other imperfections on jewelry. BR-725 BR-726 STRAIGHT KNIFE EDGE 19. Third Hand Round Base Heavy base with double joint positioning, makes for hands free working while soldering. Includes straight cross locking tweezers to hold the component. 20. Bracelet Mandrels These mandrels are adaptable for shaping, stretching, and forming bracelets. Exterior surface is smoothly polished. Available in round and oval shapes /8 X 1 7 /8 3 X 3 1 / /4 3 1 /2 HO-010 HO-011 TW-477 THIRD HAND W/TWEEZERS BASE ONLY TWEEZERS MD-025 MD-030 MD-031 SHAPE OVAL ROUND ROUND WOODEN 20

20 21. Jump Ringer System- Round/Oval Make jump rings fast, using this hand winder. Complete set includes mandrel, blade with arbor, and holder to cut rings. Needs the use of Foredom #30 handpiece (not provided) for cutting. Oval system has special mandrels and a two sided oval coil holder. A complete set includes five oval mandrels with a coil holder. Mandrels are 3 long. BENCH ACCESSORIES HO-410 JUMP RING COMPLETE HO-411 BLADE ONLY HO-412 MANDREL SET- 16 PCS. ( ) 22. Bracelet Holder All metal clamp, secures bracelet easily, eliminating the use of shellac. A relief on the diameter provides a space to nest the clasp. 25. Pearl Holding Vise Center drill pearls accurately without any mar on the surface. Quick clamp and release system. Thirteen cavities accommodate pearls or beads size #2-10mm HO-007 DRILLING VISE 26. Centerline Pearl Drill Holder A quality engineered drill jig, combines precision with accuracy for making fine holes in pearls. Cushioned support eliminates any misalignment. DIAMETER HO /2 23. Miter Cutter Jig- France Alloy tool steel, hardened for wear resistance and long life.vise holds thin sheet, round, square bar and tubing securely, for angle cuts at 45 or 90. Additional adjustable stop for precise cuts to length. May be hand held or fixed in a bench vise. HO-006 DRILL HOLDER 27. Peg Clamp Holder Hand held holder with moveable pins to hold any odd shaped parts. Remove handle to fit in a vise. Useful when engraving and setting. SIZE HO X 2 1 /2 X 3 /8 24. Swiss Victorinox Knife The one and only all purpose stainless steel knife that finds use in almost all applications. Select from two models that have different features which include cutting blades, scissors, file, tweezers etc. HO-008 PEG CLAMP SH-742 SH-743 SWISS ARMY KNIFE SWISS ARMY KNIFE WITH 17 BLADES 21

21 BENCH ACCESSORIES SP-071 SP Screwplates with Taps Three different ranges to form internal or external fine pitch threads for nuts or screws. May also be used to rectify and repair damaged threads. SP-074 SP-073 SP-071 SP-072 SP-073 SP mm-Swiss mm-German mm-Japan mm-Deluxe 29. Wood Handle Scribers Economical steel scriber, has a sharpened point for layout work. Triangular shaped hollow or solid form permits removal of burrs or other detail work. 31. Margin Rollers Individually sized burnishing tool that effectively removes porosity, pits or scratch marks on the inside of rings and bracelets. BS-401 BS Hand Drill HOLLOW SOLID Smooth operating drill with adjustable chuck capacity 1 /32-1 /4. Sturdy tool for general purpose use. DI DI-111 DI Magnetic Tool Holder DIAMETER 12mm 10mm 8mm An efficient organizer that instantly holds, yet releases quickly, all your small tools and implements. Mounts conveniently near your work bench. PV-400 HAND DRILL 33. Panavise LENGTH HO HO The universal vise is a perfect unit where all movements are controlled by a single knob. Convenient positioning in all three planes make it perfect for filing, sawing, carving and setting. Jaws are of nylon, 2 1 /2 wide and will not mar or scratch delicate surfaces. A vacuum base model of the vise operates by suction system and has additional adaptability to be mounted on any smooth surface. Replacement jaws are available. PV-416 PV-417 PV-418 STANDARD VISE VACUUM BASE VISE REPLACEABLE JAW 22

22 34. GRS BenchMate A versatile work holding system, loaded with features that instill confidence while stone setting and doing all kinds of jewelry repair. All steel construction with smooth teflon bearings contribute to a sturdy, rugged, rotating device that quick locks in any required position. Select from two kits. BE-020 BENCH ACCESSORIES BE-026 BE-027 BE-028 BE-029 BE-032 BE-035 BE-036 BE-019 BE-020 BENCH MATE- DELUXE BENCH MATE -BASIC BE-023 BE-030 BE-031 BE-022 BE-034 BE-024 BE-025 BenchMate Basic Kit: Includes basic BenchMate holder, shellac pad, fixed mounting plate and hardware. BE-033 (Vise not included) Special Attachments: Convert your BenchMate to do various other jobs like prong tipping, shank repair, ring sizing, soldering and jewelry fabrication. Attachments need only a few seconds to change without any extra tools. BenchMate Deluxe Kit: Includes basic BenchMate holder, shellac pad, narrow and wide solder fingers, third hand attachment, bench pin kit, fixed mounting plate and hardware. 35. Millgrain Wheels-Individual BE-021 BE-022 BE-023 BE-024 BE-025 BE-026 BE-027 BE-028 Precision concave, equally shaped cavities may be formed with a hardened wheel. Create decorative settings and edge beading on jewelry. Use tools with a Millgrain wheel holder Note : Patterns shown are not the actual size of the wheel structure. EXTRA MOUNTING PLATE BENCH PIN KIT OPTIONAL MOUNTING PLATE FIXED MOUNTING PLATE ADJUSTABLE HT. BRACKET NARROW SOLDER FINGER WIDE SOLDER FINGER SHELLAC PAD 36. Millgrain Holder BE-029 PITCH CUP BE-030 INSULATED SOLDER CLAMP BE-031 EXTRA PLASTIC JAWS BE-032 THIRD HAND ATTACHMENT BE-033 ENGRAVING VISE SHELF BE-034 SOLDER STATION- 4 BE-035 SAWING PLATE RIGHT HAND BE-036 SAWING PLATE LEFT HAND A hand tool having a hardwood palm grip, with a metal screw chuck to secure the shank of Millgrain wheels. 37. Millgrain Tool Set HO-202 MUSHROOM HANDLE Two select sizes of Millgrain tools with a threaded chuck. Supplied in a polished wooden box. SIZE MG-401 #1 MG-402 #2 MG-403 #3 MG-404 #4 MG-405 #5 MG-406 #6 MG-407 #7 MG-408 #8 SIZE MG-409 #9 MG-410 #10 MG-411 #11 MG-412 #12 MG-413 #13 MG-414 #14 MG-415 #15 MG-426 MG-426 SET OF 6 (#10-15) MG-428 SET OF 12 (#1-12) MG-427 BOX ONLY MG

23 WORKBENCHES BE-012 Single BN-60 BE-013 Double BN--60L Sturdy woodbenches in a steel frame construction. Features include two pull-out drawers. Lower drawer has a metal pan for bench sweeps. Available in single or double styles. Single /2 W X 16 1 /4 D X 36 Ht. Double- 65 W X 16 1 /4 D X 36 Ht. BE-010 MC-OLYMPIC Hardwood constructed workbench, with a recessed metal plate. Three storage drawers and two aluminum catch trays. Includes a slide out work platter. Predrilled for mounting mandrels and a slot for bench pin /2 W X 24 1 /4 D X 38 Ht. BE-016 MO-60 Standard work bench of seasoned hardwood with skirted legs. Three drawers for storage of tools, one bottom drawer with metal pan and a pull-out tray for mandrels. Left and right arm supports, with a replaceable bench pin slot /2 W X 18 1 /2 D X 36 Ht. BE-005 WM A top quality work bench of seasoned hardwood with full skirted sides and rear. Ample storage space with 15 spacious drawers and a catch tray /2 W X 20 D X 38 Ht. BE-004 PW Sturdy hardwood workbench with a recessed metal anvil and railing on three sides. Three storage drawers and two large slide out catch trays. Predrilled holes for mandrels. Left and right arm supports, with a replaceable bench pin slot /2 W X 21 1 /2 D X 36 Ht. BE-002 PN-100 Well crafted bench built to last. Seven side drawers, two top drawers and two sliding trays. Comfortable foot rest. Right and left arm rest with slot for bench pin. One layout shelf. 48 W X 22 D X 38 Ht. 24 BE-003 BN-260 Hardwood work bench full skirted for rigidity. Consists of three drawers and a pull out utility tray with two shelves. Predrilled holes for mandrels. Left and right arm supports, with a replaceable bench pin slot /4 W X 19 1 /2 D X 38 Ht. For MoreWorkBenches Page 80 Note: For work benches some assembly is required. All Benches will be shipped via Master Craft.

24 BRUSHES 1. Bench Duster Brush Very handy for cleaning your work area. Soft bristles, convenient wooden handle. Easy to use in everyday work as a general purpose brush. LENGTH BU BU-031 BU Washout Brushes Durable nylon bristles, set in rows, mounted in wood or bone, for common cleansing of work parts. BU-031 BU-032 BONE HANDLE WOODEN HANDLE BU Scratch Brushes BU-030 Firmly anchored bristles of either brass or steel. Useful when cleaning work with or without solutions. BU-029 BU-030 STEEL 4 ROWS BRASS 4 ROWS 4. End Knot Bristle Brushes A small diameter brush, with hard bristles. For use with tapered spindles. Frequently used to clean and polish with polishing compounds. 5. Crimped Brass Wire Brushes BU-034 BU-035 BU KNOT 7 KNOT 10 KNOT Soft brass bristles, different row types, all with hardwood hubs that can be suitably mounted on tapered spindles. Very gentle for scouring of metal. Leaves a matt finish. Wire size 0.10mm. DIA. ROWS BU BU BU DIA. ROWS BU BU BU Crimped Steel Wire Brushes Stiff steel bristles, all with hardwood hubs, provide firm scouring action on hard to clean areas in all materials. Vigorous cleaning that leaves a slightly coarse finish. For use with tapered spindles. Wire size 0.10mm. DIA. ROWS BU BU BU DIA. ROWS BU BU BU /4 7. Unmounted Wheel Bristle Brushes These have different grades of bristle hardness. Select according to individual application. All with arbor hole 1 /8. 8. Mounted Bristle Brushes These brushes are end mounted on 3 /32 mandrels, to fit hand pieces. Four textures for different finishes are available. DIA. 3 /4 DIA. 1 GRADE BU-115 BU-111 EX-SOFT BU-114 BU-117 SOFT BU-113 BU-118 MEDIUM BU-112 BU-116 STIFF DIA. 3 /4 DIA.1 GRADE BU-110 BU-125 EX-SOFT BU-120 BU-123 SOFT BU-121 BU-124 MEDIUM BU-119 BU-122 STIFF 26

25 BRUSHES 9. Unmounted Wire Brushes Small wire brushes for working fine detail areas in jewelry. Choice of two materials, steel or brass. Wheels may be used for gentle or vigorous working. Both types with arbor hole 1 / Unmounted Plastic Brushes Small tightly packed bristle brush, has a plastic center for extra support. A feature that contributes to considerable stiffness for consistent finishes on all surfaces. 11. End Bristle Brushes Use these brushes to clean grooves, curves and in between cleaves. End mounted on 3 /32 shanks, makes it easy to quick change on hand pieces. Apply only light pressure at high speeds. 12. End Wire Mounted Brushes Ideal for use to clean confined work areas. Made of soft brass or hard steel and mounted on 3 /32 shanks. Size 3 /16 X 1 /4 13. Bristle Cup Brushes An inverted cone type brush for working over large areas. Mounted on 3 /32 shanks. 14. Metal Cup Brushes on Mandrel Inverted cone type, choice of brass or steel straight wire bristles, provides delicate or firm scouring on work pieces. Mounted on 3 /32 shanks. BRASS TYPE DIA. 1 DIA. 3 /4 CRIMPED BU-128 BU-129 STRAIGHT BU BU STEEL TYPE DIA. 1 DIA. 3 /4 STRAIGHT BU-130 BU-131 CRIMPED BU BU DIA. X TRIM. L GRADE BU X 5 /8 STIFF BU X 5 /8 MEDIUM BU X 5 /8 SOFT BU X 5 /8 BRASS BU X 5 /8 STEEL DIA. X TRIM. L GRADE BU /16 X 1 /4 SOFT BU /16 X 1 /4 STIFF BU /16 X 3 /8 SOFT BU /16 X 3 /8 STIFF TYPE BU-144 STRAIGHT BRASS BU CRIMPED BRASS BU STRAIGHT STEEL BU CRIMPED STEEL DIA. GRADE BU /2 STIFF BU /2 SOFT DIA. TYPE BU /2 BRASS BU /2 STEEL 15. Mounted Brass Brushes Small diameter soft brass brushes, swaged and evenly distributed on the periphery. Ideal for that soft feel on external curves and shallow valleys. Mounted on 3 /32 shanks. 16. Mounted Steel Brushes Small diameter firm steel brushes fixed in a steel hub. Suitable for tough scouring. Works efficiently for initial removal of high spots and blending surfaces. Mounted on 3 /32 shanks. DIA. TYPE BU CRIMPED BU /4 CRIMPED BU /4 STRAIGHT BU STRAIGHT DIA. TYPE BU CRIMPED BU /4 CRIMPED BU /4 STRAIGHT BU STRAIGHT 27

26 BRUSHES 17. Unmounted Texturing Brushes Calibrated wire diameters of these brushes impart satin, matt or cross cut finish, depending on the ingenuity of the craftsman. Use on tapered spindles. Size 100 X 25mm. THREAD Ø GRADE AS mm EX-FINE AS mm FINE AS mm MEDIUM AS mm COARSE 18. Minimat Texturing Brushes Achieve a finish like sand blasting with different diameter. These brushes have the convenience of being used with standard flex shaft handpieces. Steel wires of different diameters are attached on a plastic hub. All are mounted on 3 /32 shanks. Maximum speed 8,000 rpm. MiniMat -Mounted THREAD Ø TYPE AS mm MOUNTED AS mm MOUNTED AS mm MOUNTED MiniMat Pro -Unmounted THREAD Ø COLOR AS mm BLUE AS mm RED AS mm YELLOW AS mm GREEN 19. 3M Deburring Wheels The #1 choice of jewelers, these wheels give excellent performance for blending sprues, removal of oxidation and fire scale from castings M Cut & Polish Wheels 3M D X T X H GRADE BF-038 2SFIN 6 X 1 X 1 X-FINE BF-039 7SFIN 6 X 1 X 1 FINE BF-040 9SFIN 6 X 1 X 1 MEDIUM BF-041 8AMED 6 X 1 X 1 COARSE A subsequent operation wheel, improves the blending and polishing after the initial deburring. Imparts a relative fineness to the smoothing, has a less aggressive action and does not clog. 3M D X T X H GRADE BF-050 5AFIN 1 X 1 X 3 /16 MEDIUM BF-051 5AFIN 3 X 3 /4 X 1 /4 MEDIUM BF-052 5AFIN 6 X 1 X 1 MEDIUM 21. 3M General Purpose Wheels An all purpose wheel, economical to use for light deburring, blending and smoothing operations. 3M D X T X H GRADE BF-060 5AFIN 6 X 1 X 1 MEDIUM BF-061 5AFIN 3 X 3 /4 X 1 /4 MEDIUM BF-064 7AVFIN 4 X 1 /4 X 1 /8 FINE BF-067 7AVFIN 4 X 1 /2 X 1 /8 FINE BF-068 3AVFIN 3 /4 X 1 /4 X 1 /16 V-FINE BF-069 7AFIN 3 /4 X 1 /4 X 1 /16 MEDIUM 28

27 22. 3M Radial Bristle Brushes BRUSHES A new concept for pre-polishing, texturing, and fine finishing with the added feature of complete flexibility. Numerous vanes of independent impeller like discs, glide through fine detail grooves to give a consistent finish. Disc can be used individually or in multiples. Embedded fine abrasive eliminates the use of messy compounds. Lubricate with water. Speed 10,000-max 15,000 rpm. DIA./HOLE GRIT COLOR BF /16 X 1 / WHITE BF /16 X 1 / RED BF /16 X 1 / BLUE BF /16 X 1 /16 PUMICE PINK BF /16 X 1 /16 POLISH1 LT. GREEN BF /16 X 1 /16 POLISH11 PEACH BF /4 X 1 /16 80 YELLOW BF /4 X 1 / RED BF /4 X 1 / BLUE BF /4 X 1 /16 PUMICE PINK BF X 1 /8 36 BROWN BF X 1 /8 50 GREEN BF X 1 /8 80 YELLOW BF X 1 /8 120 WHITE BF X 3 /8 80 YELLOW BF X 3 /8 120 WHITE BF X 3 /8 220 RED BF X 3 /8 400 BLUE BF X 3 /8 PUMICE PINK BF X 3 /8 6 MICRON PEACH BF X 3 /8 1 MICRON LT. GREEN BF X 3 /8 80 YELLOW BF X 3 /8 120 WHITE BF X 3 /8 220 RED BF X 3 /8 400 BLUE BF X 3 /8 PUMICE PINK BF X 3 /8 6 MICRON PEACH BF X 3 /8 1 MICRON LT. GREEN 23. Adapter Mounts Bristle brushes up to 1 diameter are to be used with mandrels designed for 1 /16 or 1 /8. Bristle brushes of 2 & 3 diameters are to be used with an adapter mount. BF-148 BF-149 ADAPTER MOUNT-PLASTIC ADAPTER MOUNT-ALUMINUM 24. 3M Unitized Wheels A special type of unitized wheel for deburring and polishing titanium, special alloys, composites and plastics. Wheels feature an open web construction which allows sufficient flexibility during use and resist loading. 3M 3 X 1 /2 X 1 /4 2 X 1 /2 X 1 /4 1 1 /2 X 1 /4 X 1 /8 1 X 1 /4 X 1 /8 GRADE 2SFIN BF-010 BF-015 BF-019 BF-025 X-FINE 4SFIN BF-011 BF-016 BF-020 BF-026 FINE 6AMED BF-012 BF-017 BF-021 BF-027 MEDIUM 8ACRS BF-013 BF-018 BF-022 BF-028 COARSE 3M 3 /4 X 1 /8 X 1 /16 1 /2 X 1 /4 X 1 /16 1 /2 X 1 /2 X 1 / /2 X 1 /2 X 1 /4 GRADE 2SFIN BF-032 BF-030 BF-031 BF-023 X-FINE 4SFIN - BF BF FINE 6AMED BF BF BF MEDIUM 8ACRS BF BF BF COARSE 29

28 BRUSHES 25. Bristle Brushes in Hardwood Superior bristles set in seasoned hardwood hubs. Available in various rows for numerous applications. Two types U-upright C-converging. All with arbor hole 1 /4. a b STYLE HUB(a) TRIM(b) ROWS BU-011 1A 1 7 /8 5 /8 1U BU-012 1B 1 7 /8 1 /2 1U BU-013 1C 1 7 /8 3 /8 1U BU-014 2A 1 7 /8 5 /8 2C BU-015 2B 1 7 /8 1 /2 2C BU-016 2C 1 7 /8 3 /8 2C 26. Red Sable Brushes STYLE HUB(a) TRIM(b) ROWS BU-017 4A 1 7 /8 5 /8 4C BU-018 4B 1 7 /8 1 /2 4C BU-019 4C 1 7 /8 3 /8 4C BU-023 6A 1 1 /4 5 /8 2C BU-024 6C 1 1 /4 3 /8 2C BU A 1 1 /2 5 /8 3C BU C 1 1 /2 3 /8 3C Choicest sable hair bristles, crimped in ferrules, mounted on convenient sized pencil grips. Extremely fine points, in assorted sizes for art and design work. Size 3/0 is smallest and #7 is the largest. SIZE BU-150 3/0 BU-151 2/0 BU BU BU SIZE BU BU BU BU BU Norton Beartex Satin Wheels Made of nylon fiber, impregnated with fine abrasives, these wheels find extensive use for imparting background finishes of satin matt on work pieces. Coarse grades are used for removal of fire scale. 28. Tapered Chuck for Brushes DIA. X T X H GRADE BF X 3 /4 X 1 /4 FINE BF X 3 /4 X 1 /4 MEDIUM BF X 3 /4 X 1 /4 COARSE BF X 1 X 1 /2 FINE BF X 1 X 1 /2 MEDIUM BF X 1 X 1 /2 COARSE Unmounted brushes with 1 /8 hole can be directly fitted to shaft ends of bench polishers. Right and left handed screw ends are offered to suit double end bench polishers. MA-100 MA-102 MA-103 WOODEN-RIGHT HAND PLASTIC-RIGHT HAND PLASTIC-LEFT HAND H Ø 29. Wheel Flanges These are for fitment of wheels with larger holes to standard arbors. Select flanges according to wheel hole and respective arbor diameter. H ARBOR Ø BF /2 BF /8 BF /4 BF BF /2 BF /8 BF /4 30

29 BUFFS 1. Midget Felt Wheels Miniature sizes of select quality compressed wool for general purpose polishing. Easy to shape for different curvatures and profiles. All with pin hole centers. 2. Square Edge Felt Wheels DIA. X T GRADE BF /2 X 1 /8 SOFT BF /2 X 1 /8 HARD BF /4 X 1 /8 SOFT BF /4 X 1 /8 HARD BF X 1 /4 SOFT BF X 1 /4 HARD BF X 1 /8 SOFT BF X 1 /8 HARD Pure felt. Designed for finishing a variety of materials including metal and glass. Guaranteed uniform density. Use with tapered spindle polishers. All with pin hole centers. 3. Knife Edge Felt Wheels MEDIUM HARD DIA. X T BF-155 BF /2 X 1 /2 BF-156 BF X 1 /2 BF-157 BF /2 X 1 /2 BF-158 BF X 1 /2 BF-159 BF X 1 /4 BF-160 BF X 1 /2 BF-161 BF X 1 /2 Knife edge felt wheels, perfectly formed and trued, for polishing joints and grooves. All with pin hole. Use sizes up to 1 with screw taper mandrels, and sizes up to 6 on tapered spindle polishers. MEDIUM ROCK FLINT DIAMOND HARD HARD HARD HARD DIA. BF-163 BF BF BF /2 BF-164 BF BF BF /8 BF-165 BF BF BF /4 BF-166 BF BF BF BF-167 BF /4 BF-168 BF BF BF /2 BF-169 BF /4 BF-170 BF BF BF BF-172 BF BF BF BF-173 BF BF BF BF-174 BF BF BF Satin Finish Wheels Satin finish wheels produce different textures on all types of precious metals. These wheels are dense and may be used to blend casting lines and sprue nibs. GRADE DIA. X T BF-216 X-FINE 4 X 1 BF-217 FINE 4 X 1 BF-218 MEDIUM 4 X 1 32

30 5. Paramount Yellow Treated Muslin Buffs 86/80 Specially treated to enable fast cutting, these buffs have an inherent stiffness to withstand rugged use. Additional stitching gives the added advantage of maintaining trueness. Available in leather or shellac centers. Screws directly on taper of spindle polishers. BUFFS LEATHER SHELLAC DIA. PLY STITCH BF-175 BF ROWS BF-176 BF ROWS BF-177 BF ROWS BF-178 BF ROWS BF-179 BF ROWS BF-180 BF ROWS BF-181 BF ROWS BF-182 BF ROWS 6. Paramount Muslin Buffs-Regular 60/60 The perfect companion to Paramount felt buffs, these state of the art buffs provide hours of excellent performance. Available in leather or shellac centers and all popular styles. LEATHER SHELLAC DIA. PLY STITCH BF-183 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-184 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-185 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-186 BF ROWS BF-187 BF ROWS BF-188 BF ROWS BF-189 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-190 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-191 BF ROWS BF-192 BF ROWS BF-193 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-194 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-195 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-196 BF ROWS BF-197 BF ROWS BF-198 BF ROWS 7. Paramount Finest Muslin Buffs 80/80 These buffs have a denser weave that eliminates stringing. Far superior than the regular type, these buffs give a more delicate sheen to the surface. A wide choice of styles, in leather or shellac centers. LEATHER SHELLAC DIA. PLY STITCH BF-200 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-201 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-202 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-203 BF ROWS BF-204 BF ROWS BF-205 BF ROWS BF-206 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-207 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-208 BF ROWS BF-209 BF ROWS BF-210 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-211 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-212 BF ROW (LOOSE) BF-213 BF ROWS BF-214 BF ROWS BF-215 BF ROWS 33

31 BUFFS 8. Paramount -Split & Beveled Felt Laps Made of high quality felt, four slots provide clear visibility while polishing almost all items. Accurately balanced and provided with pin hole centers. DIA. X T GRADE BF X 1 /2 MEDIUM BF X 1 /2 HARD BF X 1 /2 ROCK HARD BF X 1 /2 FLINT HARD BF X 1 /2 MEDIUM BF X 1 /2 HARD BF X 1 /2 ROCK HARD BF X 1 /2 FLINT HARD BF X 1 /2 MEDIUM BF X 1 /2 HARD BF X 1 /2 ROCK HARD BF X 1 /2 FLINT HARD 9. Paramount Felt Ply Buffs Precision quality control guarantees the durability and superior polishing of these buffs. Steamed and hammered to compactness, there is absolutely no porosity. Experience the brilliance when polishing platinum, gold and other precious metals. DIA. PLY STITCH GRADE BF ROWS SOFT BF ROWS MED BF ROWS HARD BF ROWS SOFT BF ROWS MED BF ROWS HARD BF ROW (LOOSE) SOFT BF ROW (LOOSE) MED BF ROWS SOFT BF ROWS MED BF ROWS HARD 10. Satin Finish Buffs Graded abrasive finely dispersed into the fiber webs, these buffs generate a satin finish of different intensities depending on individual choice of textures. Reinforced leather centers allow direct mounting on tapered spindles. DIA. PLY GRADE COLOR AS FINE PLUM AS FINE PLUM AS MEDIUM BROWN AS MEDIUM BROWN AS COARSE TAN AS COARSE TAN 11. Loose Buffs- Lead Center Unsewn fine weave muslin buffs with combed edges are a suitable way for finishing with rouge. These buffs have lead centers that screw on to the threads of tapered spindle polishers. DIA. PLY BF BF BF BF BF BF

32 12. Finex Muslin Buffs-Loose & Combed Finest muslin loose buffs are soft with combed faces. They may be used with all polishing compounds for finishing metals. Leather centers supplied to fit on tapered spindle polishers. BUFFS DIA. PLY BF BF BF BF BF BF Finex Muslin Knife Edge Buffs Leather centers and a firm point edge that is slightly softer, these buffs have the added advantage of conforming to shapes that are impossible to polish with traditional buffs. DIA. PLY BF BF BF BF Finex Muslin Buffs-Stitched & Combed Made of the finest material available to the jewelry industry. Stitched buffs are firm with combed faces and are used with compounds such as Tripoli, 4 x White Diamond, Grey Star, etc. Available in leather or shellac centers. Fit on tapered spindles. LEATHER SHELLAC DIA. PLY STITCH - BF ROWS BF-413 BF ROWS BF-414 BF ROWS BF BF ROWS BF BF ROWS BF-415 BF ROWS BF BF ROWS BF BF ROWS BF-416 BF ROWS - BF ROWS BF BF ROWS BF BF ROWS 15. Red Treated Muslin Buffs for Platinum An IKOHE product made in a fine weave of specially treated muslin. Ideal for finishing all materials. Very effective with rouge and most other polishing compounds. Available in leather or shellac centers. Mount on tapered spindle polishers. LEATHER SHELLAC DIA. PLY STITCH BF-431 BF ROWS BF-432 BF ROWS BF-433 BF ROWS BF-434 BF ROWS BF-435 BF ROWS BF-436 BF ROWS BF-437 BF ROWS BF-438 BF ROWS BF-439 BF ROWS BF-440 BF ROWS 35

33 BUFFS 16. Yellow Treated Knife Edge Buffs Differently shaped edges with leather centers, these buffs have been chemically treated to maintain stiffness and retain polishing compounds. The profile allows the polishing of narrow valleys and grooves. Mount on tapered spindle polishers. DIA. PLY BF BF BF BF Yellow Treated Muslin Buffs IKOHE muslin buffs specially treated for extra stiffness. This factor reduces polishing time and produces a better surface abrasion. Use with Tripoli or other compounds. Available in leather or shellac centers. Mount on tapered spindle polishers. LEATHER SHELLAC DIA. PLY STITCH BF-453 BF ROWS BF-454 BF ROWS BF-455 BF ROWS BF-456 BF ROWS BF ROWS - BF ROWS 18. Midget Muslin Buffs-Unmounted Small diameter fine muslin buffs, stitched to ensure firmness at high speeds. Convenient to use on handpieces. Use with tapered mandrels -page 16. DIA. PLY STITCH COLOR BF / ROW WHITE BF / ROW YELLOW BF ROW WHITE BF ROW YELLOW BF ROWS WHITE BF ROWS YELLOW BF / ROWS WHITE BF / ROWS WHITE BF / ROWS WHITE 19. Midget Buff-Mounted Small diameter buffs in different types of materials all mounted on 3 /32 mandrels. A flexible way to achieve polishing with various polishing media. High speeds are recommended for a fine finish. DIA. THICKNESS TYPE BF /16 CHAMOIS BF /8 MUSLIN BF /4 3 /8 COTTON STRING AS /4 SATIN FINE AS /4 SATIN MEDIUM 36

34 20. Mounted Felt Bobs BUFFS Felt in various styles, mounted on 3 /32 shanks, are a necessity for finishing and polishing intricate designs. Easily interchangeable, they are very practical to use with handpieces or flexible shafts. STYLE FLAME ROUND CONE BULLET CYLINDER INV.CONE K/EDGE SQ/EDGE SIZE 3 /8 X 3 /4 5 /16 X 3 /8 1 /4 X 3 /4 5 /16 X 5 /8 3 /8 X 5 /8 1 1 /16 X 3 /16 3 /4 1 1 /16 X 1 /4 BF-520 BF-521 BF-522 BF-523 BF-524 BF-525 BF-527 BF-529 SIZE /8 X 3 /16 7 /8 7 /8 X 1 / BF-526 BF-528 BF-530 SIZE /8 X 7 / BF Unmounted Felt Cones These hard density felt cones polish the inner surfaces of work pieces and other hard to reach areas. All with pin holes, ready to mount on tapered mandrels. -page 16 DIA. X T BF /4 X 3 /8 BF /4 X 1 /2 BF /2 X 1 BF /4 X 1 1 /2 22. Tapered Muslin Buffs Small diameter cone shaped buffs, very adaptable for finishing the insides of work pieces. Performs well with all polishing compounds. Will fit on tapered spindle polishers. 23. Cylinder Buffs Tube shaped, in different diameters, these buffs make the ideal method for polishing the insides of parts. Works efficiently with all types of finishing compounds. Will fit on tapered spindle polishers. 24. Goblet Buffs Fine muslin stitched and spherically shaped, a most convenient method for polishing the insides of goblets and other similar objects. Will fit on tapered spindle polishers. 25. Cotton String Buffs Extremely soft with individual strings, firmly crimped to a central hub. This product provides an ultra fine finish to gold and other precious metals. 26. Chamois Buffs Durable, long lasting, soft leather, these buffs are the obvious choice for finishing and polishing platinum. They may also be used for all other metals. Will fit on tapered spindle polishers. DIA. BF BF BF /2 DIA. X T BF X 2 BF X 3 BF /2 X 3 1 /2 DIA. BF BF BF DIA. X T BF X 2 BF X 2 DIA. PLY BF BF

35 BUFFS 27. Solid Felt Ring Buffs Unmounted high quality felt shaped to a shallow taper to use with different inside diameters of rings. One end pin drilled to screw on the end of tapered spindle polishers. TAPER LENGTH GRADE BF /4-9 /16 3 REGULAR BF /4-9 /16 3 HARD BF /8-5 /8 4 REGULAR BF /8-5 /8 4 HARD 28. Inside Felt Ring Buffs A compressed layer of felt, pre-formed to a taper is fitted snugly on a hardwood core. This gives the buff additional stiffness. Pin drilled to fit on tapered spindle polishers. REGULAR HARD TAPER LENGTH BF BF /16-5 /16 3 BF-503 BF /4-9 /16 3 BF-504 BF /8-5 /8 4 BF BF / BF BF /16-3 / Uniflex Inside Ring-Cone Buffs A unique type of abrasive, shaped to a reduced diameter over its length, on a wooden core. Ideal for pre-finishing the inside of rings. Pin drilled to mount on tapered spindle polishers. TAPER LENGTH BF /8-5 /8 2 1 /2 30. Felt Combination Buffs Combined wheel and inside ring buff of felt in medium density. One piece construction. A real time saver when polishing the outside and inside of rings. Fits directly on tapered spindle polishers. TAPER LENGTH DIA. X T BF /4-9 / X 1 /2 BF /8-5 / X 9 / Artifex Inside Ring Polishers Unmatched in quality, these ring polishers outlast regular conventional polishers. Polishing can be controlled to the finest degree. Size 65mm long and diameter tapered from 22-15mm. GRIT GRADE BF FINE BF MEDIUM 32. Rubberized Abrasive Inside Ring Buffs Fine abrasives, different grades in a rubber bond, used for the initial cutting of inside of rings. The mounted type is on a wooden mandrel. Both have center pin holes for easy mounting. Size 2 7 /8 long and diameter tapered from 3 /4-5 /8. UNMOUNTED COLOR GRADE BF-532 LT-GREEN X-FINE BF-533 RED FINE BF-534 BROWN MEDIUM BF-535 DK-GREEN COARSE MOUNTED COLOR GRADE BF-536 LT-GREEN X-FINE BF-537 RED FINE BF-538 BROWN MEDIUM BF-539 DK-GREEN COARSE 38

36 33. Felt Bangle Buffs High grade, pure solid felt, these medium density buffs are mounted on a hardwood core. Shaped to fit the larger diameters of bangles and bracelets. Use on tapered spindle polishers. BUFFS TAPER LENGTH GRADE BF /8 2 REGULAR 34. Artifex Elastic Bond Wheels Silicon carbide abrasive bonded on a non-clogging spongy base resists snagging during fine de-burring. The extra flexibility can create different decorative surface effects on precious metals. DIA. X T X H GRIT GRADE BF X 20 X 6MM 150 MEDIUM BF X 20 X 6MM 250 FINE BF X 20 X 6MM 80 COARSE BF X 20 X 6MM 150 MEDIUM BF X 20 X 6MM 250 FINE 35. 3M XK Wheels These new 3M XK wheels are fast cutting and provide long life on the job. Ideal for heavy duty or large part de-burring and cleaning where non-woven wheels do not perform satisfactorily. DIA. X T X H GRADE BF X 1 /2 X 1 1 / HA BF X 1 /2 X 1 1 / HA BF X 1 X 1 1 / HA BF X 1 X 1 1 / HA 36. 3M Sanding Sponges These sponges may be shaped or trimmed to fit any type of surface or contour. Ideal for finishing and polishing engravings and filigree. SIZE GRADE BF /2 X 5 1 /2 MEDIUM BF /2 X 5 1 /2 FINE BF /2 X 5 1 /2 X-FINE BF /2 X 5 1 /2 ULTRA FINE BF /2 X 5 1 /2 MICRO FINE 37. 3M Scotchbrite Pads Uniform fast cutting action, excellent for satin and matte finishes. Create your own flap wheels to get an even finish on rings, bracelets and other articles of jewelry. Size 6 X 9. 3M GRADE BF FINE BF MEDIUM BF COARSE 39

37 BUFFS 38. Leather Wheel Constructed of high quality birch plywood cores, these wheels are covered with rich leather. Wheels have cone shaped centers to fit both right and left side of double ended bench polishers. Performs well for final polishing on metal or stone. May be used wet or dry. Speed max 4,000 rpm. 39. Leather Strap Genuine cowhide leather strap is used for holding jewelry and rings while polishing, buffing or grinding. Protects fingers from heat. Sold by foot length. Available in 50 yards rolls. DIA. X T X H BF X 1 X 1 /4 BF-301 LEATHER STRAP Polishing Compounds Page To achieve a high luster on articles of jewelry, select the correct type of buff for the application. Buffing compounds are available in different grades it is necessary to use separate buffs with each grade. Always protect your finger tips with finger guards. THIS ICON IS INTENDED TO DRAW YOUR ATTENTION TO SPECIFIC SAFETY PRACTICES WHEN WORKING WITH TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT LISTED IN THE CATALOG. Type of Operations Use the proper gloves for the work application. Select the correct safety goggles for the type of work. Check input voltage and wiring before start up. Do not exceed safe operating speeds. Protect yourself against toxic fumes and flames. Avoid breathing airborne dust particles. For Proper use of equipment read instructions manual. Bench Work Dapping Flex Shaft Engraving Drilling Grinding Buffing Carving Finishing Melting Cleaning Surface Finishing Polishing Plating Soldering Brazing 40

38 BURS 1. Jewelers Burs- Hardened Tool Steel- Swiss Burs made from the finest tool steel and hardened to exacting standards. All burs have 3 /32 shanks. Available in packs of six. FIG-1 / 23 ROUND ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR FIG-156C / HD HART 90 ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-123 FIG-21 / 34 CYL SQU. C.C ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-172 FIG-77B / S CUP ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-094 FIG-15 / 29 CYL. TWIST ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR

39 Jewelers Burs- Hardened Tool Steel- Swiss FIG-3 / 24 INV. CONE ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-134 FIG-23/38 CONE SQ. CC ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-156 FIG-2 / 25 WHEEL ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-193 FIG-5 / 5NN(r) CONE ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR CONE SQ. ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-375 KRAUSE FIG-256 / 194 ISO MM BR BR-176 BURS FIG-413 / Q(F) SETTING ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-216 FIG-231S/ 45 MTD. SAW ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR

40 BURS Jewelers Burs- Hardened Tool Steel- Swiss ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR FIG-17 / 31 CONE TWIST 28 CYL. ROUND ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR CYL. ROUND C.C ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR FIG-234 / 161KE K/EDGE CUTTER ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR CYL. SQUARE ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-361 BUD FIG-6 / 33 ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR HART 70 FIG-446 / HB ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR

41 Jumbo Bur Kits- Swiss If you're focused on a full range of burs in different shapes, make these your choice. Made from graded tool steel, manufactured to close tolerances and precisely tempered, these burs have a keen cutting edge. Experience a fast smooth chip flow leading to superior surface finishes. 5. Bur Kit - Hart Set of hart burs. Shank size 3 /32. Organized on a plastic stand with a clear cover. BURS 2. Bur Kit - Round Set of round burs. Shank size 3 /32. Organized on a plastic stand with a clear cover. BR-513 HART-19 PCS ( MM) BR-510 ROUND- 20 PCS ( MM) 6. Bur Kit Assorted Set of bur shapes: round, bud, hart, setting, cone, finishing, flame, cup, oval and cylinder. Shank size 3 /32. Organized on a plastic stand with a clear cover. 3. Bur Kit - Bud Set of bud burs. Shank size 3 /32. Organized on a plastic stand with a clear cover. BR-500 ASSORTED BURS 24 PCS- ( MM) BR-511 BUD-20 PCS ( MM) 7. Bur Set - Finishing Set of finishing burs in shapes- round, cone, oval, flame, pearl, inlay and bud. Shank size 3 /32. Organized on a plastic stand with a clear cover. 4. Bur Kit - Wheel Set of wheel burs. Shank size 3 /32. Organized on a plastic stand with a clear cover. BR-514 FINISHING-12 PCS 8. Bur Kit - Deluxe Carving A speciality set of shapes for carving metal, wood or wax. Shank size 1 /8. Organized on a plastic stand with a clear cover. BR-512 WHEEL-16 PCS ( MM) BR-515 CARVING KIT 12 PCS ASSORTED 45

42 BURS Bur Sets- Alloy Tool Steel Burs with special points and styles in a range of smaller diameters. Carefully heat treated to maximize sharpness over extended use. Multiple flutes for better cutting capability. 9. Setting Bur Set of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3 /32. Sizes are 010, 012, 015, 016, 020, 022, 033, 035, 037, 040, 045, 050. BR-494 SETTING SET OF Round Bur Sets of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3 /32. Small set consists of sizes 006, 007, 009, 012, 013, 014, 015, 018, 019, 021, 022, 023. Large set consists of sizes 024, 025, 026, 027, 028, 029, 030, 031, 033, 035, 037, 040. BR-491 ROUND LARGE SET OF 12 BR-495 ROUND SMALL SET OF Cone Bur Set of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3 /32. Sizes are 008, 009, 010, 012, 013, 016, 018, 019, 020, 021, 022, 023. BR-496 CONE SET OF Cup Bur Set of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3 /32. Sizes are 009, 011, 012, 013, 015, 016, 017, 018, 020, 023, 027, 030. BR-497 CUP SET OF Hart Bur Set of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3 /32. Sizes are 009, 010, 012, 013, 014, 015, 018, 021, 023, 025, 030, BR-498 HART SET OF Cone SQ/CC Set of 12 burs in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3 /32. Sizes are 007, 008, 009, 011, 012, 013, 014, 015, 016, 018, 021, 023. BR-499 CONE SQ/CC SET OF 12 46

43 19. Wooden Bur Boxes BURS Hardwood box with hinged cover to store burs with 3 /32 shank. Keeps burs neatly organized and protected. 15. Bur Lube A carefully formulated compound that provides the optimum balance of cooling and lubrication. Reduces friction and heat build up thereby extending tool life. Essential to use when drilling, cutting or grinding. BR-700 BR-701 BR-702 BUR LUBE 2 oz PUSH UP DISPENSER BUR LUBE LIQUID 4 oz BUR LUBE PASTE 4 oz 16. Rotating Bur Stand Tiered, heavy duty plastic stand. Accommodates 150 burs 3 /32 shank. The revolving design makes it easy to choose the right bur. BR-718 BR-719 BR Wooden Bur Block 36 HOLES 72 HOLES 100 HOLES Slanted, hardwood block stand, with non-slip rubber grip base. Organizes drills, files, and brushes of either 3 /32 or 1 /8 shanks. BR-715 BUR STAND- FOUR TIERS 17. Plastic Bur Stands Rectangular plastic stand to hold 3 /32 shank size burs. Keeps burs organized and protects the cutting edges from damage. 21. Wax Burs BR HOLES These are special burs for carving wax models. Widely spaced flutes provide smooth cutting and will not clog like standard burs. Available individually or in a set of 6 shapes. Shank size 3 /32. BR-714 BUR STAND- LARGE 5 3 /4 X 3 1 /2 BR-716 BUR STAND- SMALL 4 3 /4 X Acrylic Bur Stand Clear acrylic stand with 36 holes to store 3 /32 shank size burs. SIZE BR /2 X 3 X 3 /4 BR-484 BR-486 BR-485 BR-487 BR-488 BR-489 BR HELIX 018-HELIX 023-HELIX 023-ROUND 030-ROUND 050-ROUND 6 PCS- (2 HELIX, 4 ROUND) 47

44 BURS 22. Jewelers Burs- High Speed Steel -USA Experience the superior cutting performance of burs made from high density, tough cobalt alloy steel. Significant reduction in cost due to long lasting edge sharpness. Operate these burs at higher speeds to generate smoother surface finishes. Shank size 3 /32. Available individually or in sets. 90 # MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR ROUND HART 45 SIZE MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-624 BEARING 90 # MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR HART 45 SIZE MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-634 SETTING SIZE MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR HART 45 SIZE MM BR BR BR BR BR BR

45 Bur Kit- High Speed Steel- USA Kit contains the most popular sizes in specific shapes. All have 3 /32 shanks which will fit most flexible shaft handpieces. 23. Hart 90 Set of 33 burs. Shank size 3 /32. All organized in a polished wooden box. 26. Flame Set of 14 burs. Shank size 3 /32. All organized in a polished wooden box. BURS 90 SIZE QTY BR-686 EVEN SIZES #2-26, & #30 14 SIZE QTY BR-677 #1-34 EXCEPT # Hart 45 Set of 24 burs. Shank size 3 /32. All organized in a polished wooden box. 27. Round Set of 33 burs. Shank size 3 /32. All organized in a polished wooden box. 45 SIZE QTY BR-690 #1-34 EXCEPT # Bud Set of 23 burs. Shank size 3 /32. All organized in a polished wooden box. SIZE QTY BR-680 #2-20 & EVEN SIZES # Setting Set of 33 burs. Shank size 3 /32. All organized in a polished wooden box. SIZE QTY BR-692 #2-14 & EVEN SIZES # Cone Set of 23 burs. Shank size 3 /32. All organized in a polished wooden box. SIZE QTY BR-685 #1-34 EXCEPT #21 33 SIZE QTY BR-694 #2-14 & EVEN SIZES #

46 BURS 30. Black Top Burs - German Made of tungsten vanadium alloy steel. These burs provide extra long life due to superior cutting tooth geometry. Manufactured to close tolerances and precise forms, they are ideal for carving and finishing. Shank size 3 /32. Available individually or in sets. ROUND SETTING 32. Carbide Burs Designed to cut with confidence, these carbide burs yield high productivity. Exceptional durability and wear resistance enables you to cut and finish at the same time. Burs have 1 /16 shank size for use on friction grip high speed - flex shaft handpieces. ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-450 ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR CUP HART 90 ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR-016 ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR Round for Pearl Setting Accurately calibrated sizes, specifically designed for cutting the seat and simultaneously forming a peg for securing the pearl. Made in high speed steel. Shank size 3 /32. Set contains 0.20, 0.25, 0.30, 0.35, 0.40, 0.45, 0.50, 0.55, 0.60, 0.65, 0.70, 0.75, 0.80, 0.90, 1.00mm sizes. SET OF 15 PCS ROUND BR-850 ROUND / 123 ISO MM BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR Stone Setting-Carbon Steel Bur Set An indispensable bur set for cutting precise stone seats. Made of carbon steel. Available in different sets, neatly organized on an acrylic stand. Shank size 3 /32. BR-492 BR-493 BR-492 BR-493 SHOULDER LEVEL SET OF 22 PCS STONE SETTING SET OF 30 PCS

47 BURS Black Top Bur Kits - German Made of tungsten vanadium alloy steel. These burs provide extra long life due to superior cutting tooth geometry. Manufactured to close tolerances and precise forms, they are ideal for carving and finishing. Shank size 3 / Black Top Bur-Round Set of 17 burs in increments of 0.5 mm, from 1 to 8 mm in a polished wooden box. Shank size 3 / Black Top Bur-Setting Set of 29 burs in increments of 0.25 mm, from 1 to 8 mm in a polished wooden box. Shank size 3 /32. BR-018 SET OF 17 BR-501 SET OF Black Top Bur-Cup Set of 17 burs in increments of 0.5 mm, from 1 to 8 mm in a polished wooden box. Shank size 3 / Black Top Bur - Assorted Set of 30 burs in increments of 1 mm, from 2 to 7 mm in a polished wooden box. Shank size 3 /32. Contents- 6 each of round, setting, cone, cup and cylinder shapes. BR-019 SET OF 17 BR-506 SET OF 30 Select Burs according to the shapes, material and shank diameter. Bur diameters are either in ISO No. or mm. The reference chart specifies the nominal diameters of the bur. High Speed Steel burs last longer than tungsten vanadium steel. Carbide burs have the longest life. Small diameter burs are generally run at higher speeds than large diameter burs. Use of a lubricant reduces friction and extends bur life. Bur Conversion Reference Chart -Actual Size 51

48 BURS 38. Carbide Florentine Tools Carbide burs easily surpass ordinary steel tools and are the logical choice to produce the most brilliant finish by any rotary tool. Improved penetration allows quick clean cutting at high speeds. Shank size 1 / Florentine Cylinder Burs Made from high quality tungsten carbide, these tools are extremely efficient for fine chip removal. Available in different diameters and grades. SHAPE HEAD Ø HEAD LGTH. BR-462 CYLINDER 1 /8 1 /2 BR-463 POINTED 1 /8 1 /2 BR-465 BARREL 5 /32 5 / Carbide Inside Ring Burs Long lasting and wear resistant carbide with fine teeth, designed for high speed smoothing and finishing the inside of rings. Different finishes are possible from coarse to extra fine. HEAD DIA. GRADE BR-470 7mm FINE BR-471 7mm COARSE BR mm FINE BR mm COARSE 41. Bur Setting Gauges Precision Swiss made, plate type gauge to check bur diameters in ISO sizes. Black easy to read numbers on a silver background. BR-508 BUR GAUGES HEAD Ø HEAD LGTH. SHANK FINISH BR /4 1 /2 3 /32 X-FINE BR /4 1 /2 3 /32 FINE BR /4 1 /2 3 /32 COARSE BR /8 3 /4 1 /8 FINE BR /8 3 /4 1 /8 STD BR /2 1 1 /8 FINE BR /4 1 3 /32 FINE BR /4 1 3 /32 COARSE 42. Gem Setting Bur with Gauge Set stones like a master jeweler with this indispensable new inovation. Achieve precision without the guess work. Cut channels to a perfect size to match the corresonding gauge. Drop the stone into seat and close the prongs or bezels. Shank size 3 /32. Bur Lube Makes easy! Gem lube reduces friction and heat build up thereby extending tool life. Essential to use when drilling, cutting or grinding. BR PCS. ( mm) 52

49 CASTING 1. Kerr Wax Injectomatic An innovative wax injector with a convenient swing out cover and built-in pump to manually apply pressure 0-30 PSI. Fast 20 minute warm up to 160 F/71 C. This one quart injector produces dense, accurate wax patterns. The Injectomatic includes a thermometer and a clean drip guard nozzle. Ambient to 230 F/110 C. SPECIFICATION CAPACITY CW V/ 60Hz 1 qt CW V/ 50Hz 1 qt 2. Kerr Projector A large four quart capacity wax injector that is sturdily constructed and designed for use with an external air source. Ideal for professional use, this unit features a swing out cover and an air pressure gauge 0-30 PSI with regulator to ensure consistent wax pressure. Added features include positive sealing, drip guard nozzle, and a side drain for easy clean out. Ambient to 250 F/120 C. SPECIFICATION CAPACITY CW V/ 60Hz 4 qt CW V/ 50Hz 4 qt 3. Wax Injector 2 3 /4 Qt. / 4 Qt. Achieve higher productivity using these heavy duty wax injectors with all the essential features to guarantee consistent dense wax patterns. A swing out cover to fill wax and a side drain for clean up. Uses an external air source, but has a built-in air pressure gauge 0-30 PSI, with a regulator and a safety valve. Non-drip injection nozzle is reliable and leak proof. Ambient to 250 F/120 C. SPECIFICATION CAPACITY CW V/ 60Hz 2 3 /4 qt CW V/ 50Hz 2 3 /4 qt CW V/ 60Hz 4 qt CW V/ 50Hz 4 qt CW-209 SPARE NOZZLE 54

50 4. Kerr Satin Cast-20 Formulated for investment casting. Provides a clean breakaway and leaves a satin smooth finish that greatly reduces finishing time. The material blends to a smooth consistency and includes wetting agents that create a composite high strength mold. Suitable to cast gold, silver and other metals that melt at less than 2000 F/1093 C. 7. Kerr Platinite CASTING High strength, high temperature, investment for casting platinum, stainless steel and alloys that melt above 2200 F. Forms a strong mold with good dimensional accuracy and caters to the exacting needs for excellence. An exceptionally smooth surface is achieved without cracks and fissures which drastically reduces finishing time. CW-180 SQ. DRUM 100 Lb / 45 Kg CW-184 SQ. DRUM 100 Lb / 45 Kg 5. Kerr Kerrcast-2000 This popular grade uses cristobolite, and is a general type of investment, mixes homogeneously and has a clean burn out. The surface finish is of good quality. Overall characteristics are a good bond and resistance to thermal shock. Useful for custom orders that you need immediately. 8. Platinum Casting Powder Ikohe's special formulation for investment castings of platinum, palladium and other alloys that melt at temperatures higher then 2000 F. Molds exhibit a fine smooth surface that reduces polishing costs. Mold strength is high and castings divest easily. These drums include the binder and platinum investment powder. The binder is a special liquid which provides additional strength to withstand the high temperature being used. CW-182 SQ. DRUM 100 Lb / 45 Kg 6. Investment Mixer A quality blending system using elliptical motion to mix generous quantities in minimum time. The mix is homogenous, does not entrap air bubbles and is of consistent density. This eliminates mold gasses and controls shrinkage. Bowl and whip are of stainless steel. CW-186 CW Investment Scale DRUM 50 Lb / 22 Kg WITH 16 oz BINDER SPARE BINDER- 16 oz A free standing scale, with capacity up to 20 lbs. in one ounce increments. Easy to read dial. Large weighing bowl to facilitate transfer of the investment powder to the mixer. CI-105 CI-106 CI CI V/ 60Hz-K45 220V/ 50Hz-K45 REPLACEMENT BOWL 4 1 /2 qt REPLACEMENT WHIP CI-075 DIMENSION 10 X 7 X 16 Ht. 55

51 CASTING 10. Investment Scoop Made of heavy duty plastic, the scoop has high supporting sides and scoops investment without spilling and waste. A full scoop holds about 3 lbs. 14. Rubber Table Pad A rubber mat for use in vacuum casting under the bell jar. The silicone pad (red) is of premium quality and lasts longer. Ideal hardness effectively seals the jar on the investing table. DIMENSION CI /2 X 4 3 /4 X 3 CI-112 CI SQUARE- RUBBER 7 1 /2 DIA. ROUND- SILICONE 11. Investment Spatula A useful instrument for mixing, forming or shaping wax or clay. Conveniently sized stainless steel rounded blade with a wooden handle. 15. Non-Asbestos Paper Rolls When flasks are lined with this sheet, investment removal becomes easier. The paper liner withstands high temperature and is useful when casting platinum. BLADE SIZE CI /2 12. Rubber Mixing Bowls Bowls in two sizes, made in flexible long lasting rubber. Ideal to use for mixing investment powder. WIDTH X T LENGTH CI /2 X 1 /16 50 ft CI X 1 /16 50 ft CI X 1 /16 50 ft CI /2 X 1 /16 50 ft 16. Masking Tapes This tape may be used to cover the holes on perforated flasks during investing. Very easy to peel away after burn out. CI-074 JUMBO- 1 gal 9 X 7 CI MEDIUM- 1 1 /2 quart 6 X Dial Thermometer A dual scale F/C thermometer. Use to accurately measure the temperature of wax or to calibrate vulcanizers. Dial diameter 1 1 /2. WIDTH LENGTH CI yds CI yds CI yds CI yds CI yds 17. Mold Release Sprays Effective, non-stick silicone base releases spray that may be used on rubber or metal molds. Spray helps patterns to come off clean from the mold. CW STEM F( C) CR-820 CR-821 CASTALDO - 20 oz SPRITS - 20 oz 56

52 Castaldo Rubber 21. Castaldo Super High Strength Silicone/Econosil Strips CASTING Silicone strips are extremely strong, tough and flexible. When uncured, it is easy to pack detailed areas. Works like clay or putty and produces molds with good tear strength. Vulcanizes at 330 F - 15 minutes per layer of rubber. Econosil strips are harder, red in color, economical to use and easy to pack or cut. Low temperature metals like pewter may be cast directly in this rubber mold. Size Strips: 2 7 /8 X 18 Ready Cut: 1 7 /8 X 2 7 /8 Quadrotto: 18 X Castaldo Gold Label This is a soft, natural, pliable rubber. It has the ideal characteristics for difficult molds containing undercuts, filigree and settings. Rubber is 1 /8 thick and vulcanizes at 310 F- 15 minutes for 1 /4 mold frame thickness. 1LB 5LB 10LB 50LB ROLL - CR-700 CR-701 STRIPS CR-619 CR-703 CR-702 READY CUT - CR QUADROTTO - - CR-615 CR Castaldo White Label Firm and flexible. A good all purpose mold rubber that is suited for thin molds. Rubber is 1 /8 thick, vulcanizes at 310 F -15 minutes for 1 /4 mold frame thickness. 1LB 5LB 10LB 50LB ROLL - CR-605 CR-601 STRIPS CR-618 CR-603 CR-602 READY CUT - CR QUADROTTO - - CR-614 CR-610 CR-705 SILICONE STRIPS- 5lb PK CR-708 ECONOSIL STRIPS -2 7 /8 X Castaldo Mold Lock Formers Brass metal cones that have projections on one side to lock into the base. Use one in each corner to locate the top half of the mold. Tapered shape prevents the mold from displacement during injection. Pkg 3 oz. CR-714 MOLD LOCKS- 155 PCS. APPROX. 23. Castaldo MoldMatic Ready Made Molds Quick, easy way to make molds. Use these ready made molds, with a Moldmatic frame, for accurate alignment. Mold locks are pre-formed. Simply remove the protective cloth at the mold center and insert your model. After vulcanization, just pull the edges apart. 20. Castaldo No-Shrink Pink Minimal shrinkage of less than 1%. High adherence for detail and excellent memory. May be used alone or combined with Gold Label or White Label on the outside of the mold to save costs. 1LB 5LB 10LB 50LB STRIPS CR-620 CR-706 CR READY CUT - CR QUADROTTO - - CR-616 CR-612 WHITE GOLD SHRINK SIZE L X WIDTH LABEL LEBEL PINK CR-650 CR-653 CR-656 SMALL 1 7 /8 X 2 7 /8 CR-651 CR-654 CR-657 MEDIUM 2 3 /8 X 3 CR-652 CR-655 CR-658 LARGE 2 7 /8 X 3 3 /8 57

53 CASTING 24. Castaldo MoldMatic Mold Frames High precision frames for Ready Made Mold system. Three different sizes are available. Will fit any standard vulcanizer. 27. See-Thru Mold Frames Aluminum U- frame with a sprue former, available in different thicknesses. Two glass panels, one on each side, are held together with a pair of spring clips. Easy to assemble and ideal for use with LMR Rubber Set. SIZE L X W X HT. CM-500 SMALL 1 7 /8 X 2 7 /8 X 3 /4 CM-501 MEDIUM 2 3 /8 X 3 X 3 /4 CM-502 LARGE 2 7 /8 X 3 3 /8 X 3 /4 25. Castaldo Quick-Sil RTV Molding Rubber A safe, non-toxic two part silicone rubber-mix that is pliable. Cures in about 15 minutes at room temperature with heat, but with pressure. The rubber must be pressed or clamped in order to provide good detail. Good tear resistance with minimal shrinkage. H X W X T CM X 2 X 5 /8 CM X 2 X 3 /4 CM X 2 X 1 CM X 2 X 1 1 /4 CM X 2 X 1 1 /2 CM X 2 X 2 CM-457 SPARE GLASS 28. LMR- Liquid Mold Rubber Vulcanizing at room temperature, this liquid mold rubber consists of a base and a white catalyst. Ideal for delicate items of wax, wood or plastic, that cannot withstand heat or pressure. Molds have high tear strength with zero shrinkage. CR lb KIT CR lb LMR KIT WITH CATALYST 26. Castaldo LiquaCast Liquid Mold Rubber A two part liquid rubber compound that vulcanizes overnight without any heat or pressure. Contains no silicone, but makes a strong durable mold for waxes and plastics. 29. Knife Handle & Spare Blades Made of high impact plastic, and shaped for a comfortable grip, these handles hold cutting blades securely when cutting molds open. Surgical steel hollow ground blades are available as a replacement. #10A CM-904 #11 #12 CM-903 CR-710 CR-711 CR lb - TWO PART 10 lb - TWO PART 1 lb - TWO PART CM-902 BLADE #10A CM-900 BLADE #11 CM-901 BLADE #12 CM-903 KNIFE HANDLE #3 CM-904 KNIFE HANDLE- PLASTIC

54 30. Mold Mate This unit has a cutting board and two clamps to aid mold separation. Permits all around access and helps to increase production. CR Soft Grip Knife CASTING Non-slip, soft grip handle knife has a knurled screw locking arrangement for blades. Knife measures 5 in length without the blade. Spare blades are available. CR CM-905 CM-906 SOFT GRIP KNIFE WITH SAFETY CAP 5 PCS. SET OF REPLACEMENT BLADES CR-600 MOLD MATE 6 X 14 CR MOLD MATE JUNIOR 31. Base Mate Holds sprue bases for easy accessibility. Tilts up or down and rotates 360 for working at any angle. Accepts 3 1 /2 and 4 sprue bases. 34. Sprue Rod Former/Sprue Mandrel Sprue tip with guide may be heated to form cone shaped entry hole for wax injection. CS-215 BURNING MANDREL CS-216 SPRUE FORMERS 3 /16 CS-218 SPRUE FORMERS 1 /8 CR-590 BASE MATE 32. Aluminum Multiple Frames Frames of different thickness that can be assembled together to get a mold of the desired height. This method builds mold frames to suit your models. 35. Steam Dewaxer Steam dewaxers remove wax from invested casting before burn out. Electrically heated steam eliminates 95% of wax thereby reducing porosity and carbonization. Furnace life is increased because the heating element is not exposed to harmful wax fumes. The unit is double wall stainless steel and has a front access drain. CM IN 1 (1 7 /8 X 2 7 /8 X 7 /8 ) CM IN 1 (1 7 /8 X 2 7 /8 X 3 /4 ) CM IN 1 (1 7 /8 X 2 7 /8 X 1 ) CM IN 1 (1 7 /8 X 2 7 /8 X 1 1 /2 ) 7 in 1 Mold Frame Consists of three frames that can be assembled together. Mold size 1 7 /8 X 2 7 /8. Makes the following thicknesses: 1 /2, 5 /8, 3 /4,1 1 /8, 1 1 /4, 1 3 /8 & 1 7 /8. CM IN 1 CI-118 POWER 110V/ 60 Hz OUTSIDE DIMENSION 24 1 /2 X 14 1 /2 X 17 INSIDE DIMENSION 20 X 12 1 /2 X 10 1 /2 WATER CAPACITY 2 gal 59

55 CASTING 36. Standard Vulcanizer Rigid box frame, cast iron construction, stainless steel heated platens and a powerful one inch pressure screw. Platen alignment is by twin guide bars of ample dimensions. The base encloses the controls, thermostat, pilot lamps and on/off switch. Temperature range 500 F/ 260 C. 39. Dual Vulcanizer Sturdy, heavy duty construction, with twin guide posts and a centrally located pressure screw. Large stainless steel platens, perfectly aligned and individually heated by two separate thermostat controls. Heat transfer is identical to both sides of the mold to guarantee perfectly cooked molds with Castaldo No-Shrink Pink. Base houses controls, both thermostats, and on/off switch. Temperature range 500 F/ 260 C. CR-901 CR-900 CR-904 SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz HEATING ELEMENTS CR-898 CR-899 SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz 37. Deluxe Vulcanizer Heavy duty cast iron construction has larger platens of stainless steel, twin guide rods, and a central pressure screw with a thrust pad. Platens can accommodate multiple molds of similar thickness. Base has built-in controls, thermostat, pilot lamp, and on/off switch. Temperature range 500 F/ 260 C. 40. Digital Vulcanizer Reliable, accurate temperature regulation, and uniform pressure produces molds that are evenly vulcanized and have minimal shrinkage. Precise platen alignment is assured by large diameter guides. Completely protected electronic circuitry is designed for consistent repeatability. CR-902 CR-903 CR Mold Frame Plates SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz HEATING ELEMENTS Aluminum plates in different sizes to cover top and bottom of the mold frames when vulcanizing. Smooth flat surfaces prevent the rubber from sticking to the platens. Sold in pairs. CR-895 CR-896 SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz 41. Aluminum Mold Frames One piece aluminum with a single or double cavity. Additional side holes form escape channels for the excess rubber during vulcanization. Measurements denote the mold sizes. L X WIDTH CM /2 X 3 1 /2 CM /8 X 5 3 /8 CM X 6 CM X 7 1 /8 60 L X W X Ht. SINGLE DOUBLE 1 7 /8 X 2 1 /2 X 1 /2 CM-059 CM /8 X 2 7 /8 X 3 /4 CM-034 CM /8 X 2 7 /8 X 5 /8 CM-058 CM /8 X 2 7 /8 X 1 CM-100 CM /8 X 2 7 /8 X 1 1 /4 CM-125 CM /8 X 2 7 /8 X 1 1 /2 CM-150 CM /2 X 3 3 /4 X 1 CM-129 -

56 42. Perforated Flasks Heavy gauge perforated flasks, in quality stainless steel, withstand thermal shock and corrosion. Ideal for use on vacuum casting machines. Provides complete air withdrawal which results in a denser casting. Available in all the standard sizes. Gauge size is 6. HEIGHT /2 9 1 /2 Ø 3 CI CI Ø 3 3 /8 CI Ø 3 1 /2 CI-084 CI-046 CI-083 CI-039 CI-040 CI-048 CI-049 Ø 4 CI-034 CI-035 CI-036 CI-037 CI-056 CI-038 CI-042 Ø CI-107 CI CASTING 43. Regular Flasks Durable, stainless steel flasks are corrosion resistant and withstand thermal shock during quenching. All surfaces of the flask have a smooth finish and edges are machined for optimum sealing. Gauge size is 14. HEIGHT 2 1 / Ø 2 CI Ø 2 1 /2 CI-130 CI-131 CI-132 CI Ø 3 CI-140 CI-141 CI-142 CI-143 CI-144 Ø 3 1 /2 CI-150 CI-151 CI-152 CI-153 CI-154 Ø 4 - CI-161 CI-162 CI-163 CI Flask Sleeves Reusable flexible rubber sleeves slide on to the outside of the perforated flasks while investing. After the investment has set, the sleeves may be removed. HEIGHT Ø 3 3 /8 CI Ø 4 - CI-065 CI-066 CI Flask Extender Mainly used on solid wall flasks to prevent overflow of investment while filling the flasks up to their top level. Ideal to avoid waste. DIA. CI /2 CI /4 46. High Temp Gaskets Graphite impregnated gaskets used to seal flasks while vacuuming. Sizes available to suit all standard flask sizes. All are 1 /8 thick. DIA. CI CI /2 CI Silicone Gaskets These gaskets come in different sizes and are used to seal the casting flask to the vacuum table. More pliable, these gaskets conform to a greater variation of uneven surfaces. DIA. CI CI /8 CI /2 CI CI /2 CI DIA. 1 /8 T 1 /4 T 3 CI-068 CI /8 CI-069 CI /2 CI-070 CI CI-071 CI /2 CI CI /2 CI

57 CASTING 48. Inva-Cast Vacuum Machines Bench top unit that allows investment of both standard and perforated flasks using vacuum technology. Superior air bubble elimination for cleaner, denser molds. Easy to operate, the machine produces consistent results, while reducing the risk of casting defects. An additional feature is the low maintenance aspect of filters, lines and pump. The system includes all the essentials for vacuum casting. CI-030 CI-032 INVA-CASTING 110V/ 60Hz INVA-CASTING 220V/ 50Hz Spare parts for Inva-Cast CI-028 VACUUM PUMP OIL CI-068 RUBBER SEAL FOR 3 FLASK CI-069 RUBBER SEAL FOR 3 3 /8 FLASK CI-071 RUBBER SEAL FOR 4 FLASK CI-112 RUBBER VACUUM SEAL 11 SQUARE CI-113 SILICONE VACUUM SEAL-7 1 /2 ROUND CI-033 BELL JAR 9 X Sprue Bases Long lasting rubber bases for spruing all types of trees. Various shapes and different diameters are available with all sizes of button holes. Flexible to fit flasks and provide a leak proof seal. Tree Style -C FLASK Ø BUTTON ID. CB /2 3 /8 CB /8 CB /2 3 /8 CB /8 CB /2 5 /16 CB /8 CB /8 CB /8 Button Style -A FLASK Ø BUTTON ID. CB /2 7 /8 CB /2 CB /2 2 CB /16 CB /16 Donut Style -B FLASK Ø CB /2 CB CB /2 CB Sprue Base Holder Very convenient for fast tree assembly. Holds sprue base in a horizontal plane and permits rotation. Cone Tree Center -CT Universal Sprue Base CB-610 UNIVERSAL SPRUE BASE FLASK Ø CB /2 CB CB /2 CB CB-611 SPRUE BASE HOLDER 62

58 51. Platinum Casting Machine A vertical casting system for platinum specifically designed with a high starting torque to ensure quality castings before cool down occurs. The machine is mechanically driven by a set of heavy duty springs and enclosed with a shield for safety. Crucible capacity 5 oz. 53. Neycraft Fiber Furnace CASTING The only bench-top electric burn out furnace with a one piece molded heating chamber. The outer cabinet is sturdy steel construction and the fiber muffle has an embedded heating element for even heat distribution. Fast start up time- 15 min. to reach 1000 F temperature. Features include a temperature indicator in F/C, top port for venting wax and water vapor. Chamber accommodates a 6 flask. Outside dimensions 15 X 14 1 /2 X 16 1 /2 Inside dimensions 9 X 9 X 7. CI-085 CI-086 CI CI CI CI Ney Vulcan Furnaces The Vulcan bench-top furnace has a high performance hybrid muffle consisting of an outer fiber shell and inner individually replaceable ceramic heating element plate. The benefits are a faster heat-up and cool-down with a more durable inner chamber. A vertical lift, roll back door channels heat away from operator. The programmable controller has features to expand the capabilities for a 6-stage operation. Model #A-550- Analog CI-210 CI-211 CI-217 CI-218 CI-228 CI-229 SPECIFICATION PLATINUM CASTING MACHINE WITH SHIELD ARM ASSEMBLY- COMPLETE BACKPLATE FOR FLASK CRUCIBLE CARRIAGE WESGO COMPLETE ASSEMBLY CRUCIBLE CARRIAGE REPLACEMENT SET OF 4 SPRINGS SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz HEATING ELEMENT FOR A-550 OR V HEATING ELEMENT FOR A-550 OR V STAND ALONE CONTROLLER 110V/ 60Hz STAND ALONE CONTROLLER 220V/ 50Hz CAPACITY SPECIFICATION CI CU. INCH 110V/ 60Hz/ 1320W CI CU. INCH 220V/ 50Hz/ 1320W CI-232 MUFFLE FOR FIBER FURNACE CI-233 REPLACEMENT ELEMENT 110V/220V Model #A Analog CI-212 CI-219 Model # Programmable CI-213 CI-214 SPECIFICATION 220V/ 50Hz HEATING ELEMENT FOR A-1750 OR V SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz Model # Programmable CI-215 SPECIFICATION 220V/ 50Hz Exterior Dimensions MODEL A B C D mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/21 Internal Muffle Dimensions MODEL E F G mm/7 230 mm/9 230 mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/

59 CASTING 54. Ceramic Fiber Furnaces Energy efficient furnaces with fast heating and cooling 1000 F (538 C) in thirty minutes. One piece firing chamber (13 L x 13 W x 9 Ht) for jewelry, ceramics and enameling. The chamber is encased in heavy gauge steel, insulated with ceramic fiber shell. Front door locks with a heavy spring latch and is provided with a peep hole for viewing. Controls are reliable, powerful and located in the base. Two modes, single segment for simplicity, a program review, temperature in F or C and other features. Manual control models come with a built in thermocouple mounted at the rear of the furnace. This allows for an easy hook up to a pyrometer. CI-258 CI-256 CI-255 SPECIFICATION CI-251 MANUAL 110V/60Hz CI-252 DIGITAL 110V/60Hz CI-253 MANUAL 220V/50Hz CI-254 DIGITAL 220V/50Hz CI-255 PYROMETER -ANOLOG CI-256 PYROMETER -DIGITAL CI-257 REPLACEMENT ELEMENT 110V/220V CI-258 S.S WAX TRAY 12 X 12 X 3 /4 Furnace warranty excludes damage due to overfiring exceeding melting temperature, improper electrical installation and use of furnaces for purposes other than firing glass ceramic and heat treatment. 56. Satelite Furnaces Heavy duty galvanized steel construction with double coated protection in hammertone gray. Gradual temperature control from F in 15 min. and F in 45 min., for quick and clean burn out. Features include heavy duty element, side opening door, top venting for moisture and wax escape. Convenient front viewing of control panel. Maximum operating temp F. 55. Furnace Repair Cement A high temperature cement for all types of firebrick kilns. Mix with water and repair cracks or broken sections. May also be applied as a dust free coating on the inner lid. CI Lb BAG 57. Italian Saturn Melter Metal melting without the hassle. Two crucible sizes maintain temperature accurately within the pre-set range 2050 F/1120 C, without overheating. Designed for hand held pouring directly from the crucible. Built-in electronics protect the element and provide a visual and acoustic alarm. Unit is complete with crucibles, graphite stirring rod and instructions. INSIDE DIMENSION SPECIFICATION CI-097 MANUAL 8 1 /2 X 9 X 6 1 /4 110V/ 60Hz CI-096 MANUAL 8 1 /2 X 9 X 6 1 /4 220V/ 50Hz CI-092 MANUAL 12 X 12 X 8 1 /2 110V/ 60Hz CI-093 MANUAL 12 X 12 X 8 1 /2 220V/ 50Hz CI-094 AUTOMATIC 12 X 12 X 8 1 /2 110V/ 60Hz CI-095 AUTOMATIC 12 X 12 X 8 1 /2 220V/ 50Hz CI-098 REPLACEMENT ELEMENT 110V/220V CI-099 OVEN THERMOCOUPLE CI MUFFLE 64 SPECIFICATION CAPACITY CI V/ 60Hz 1 Kg CI V/ 50Hz 1 Kg CI V/ 60Hz 2 Kg CI V/ 50Hz 2 Kg CU-700 CRUCIBLES 1 Kg CU-702 CRUCIBLES 2 Kg

60 58. Kerr Electro-Melt Furnace -Digital Recommended when sustained high temperature use is required. Digitally electronic controller regulates the temperature by providing full power input until a pre-selected temperature is attained. CE, UL & CUL certified CASTING 62. Neycraft Centrifugal Casting Machine A reliable machine featuring easy wind, lock and release mechanism. Accepts all flask sizes up to 4 x 4 with a fast set counter balance system. Machine is complete with crucible, tongs, two flasks and two sprue bases. Standard Model Features: Melting Capacity: Gold-930g/ 30 troy oz Silver-775g/ 25 troy oz 21 minutes to 982 C/ 1800 F Maxi Model Features: Melting Capacity: Gold-3.1 kg/100 troy oz Silver-2.6 kg/83 troy oz 31 minutes to 982 C/1800 F CE, UL & CUL certified. SPECIFICATION CRUCIBLE CAP. CI V/ 60Hz 30 troy oz (1 Kg) STANDARD CI V/ 50Hz 30 troy oz (1 Kg) STANDARD CI V/ 60Hz 100 troy oz (2 Kg) MAXI CI V/ 50Hz 100 troy oz (2 Kg) MAXI CI-200 CI-201 CU-712 CASTING MACHINE MAIN SPRING CRUCIBLE- 9 oz 59. Heating Elements for Electro Melt Furnace CI-245 STANDARD -110V CI-246 STANDARD -220V CI-247 MAXI- 110V CI-248 MAXI- 220V 63. Centrifugal Casting Machine Crucibles These fused silica crucibles are available in various styles and are designed with high side walls for extra safety when casting. Metals may be torch melted in these crucibles as they sustain high temperatures up to 2500 F/1370 C. CU Crucibles for Electromelt CAPACITY CU troy oz (1 Kg) CU troy oz (2 Kg) CU Regular Melting Dish Quality made dish, in fused silica with a clay bond. Best suited for all high temperature melting of metal alloys and precious metals. CU-715 CU-719 CU-698 CU /2 oz- STRAIGHT BACK 20 oz- HIGH BACK TYPE CAPACITY CU-718 WESGO LARGE A 3 oz CU-719 LARGE D - SMALL ORIFICE 10 oz CU-715 LARGE D - LARGE ORIFICE 11 oz CU-712 NEY 9 oz 65

61 CASTING 64. Salamander Graphite Crucibles Natural graphite crucible with pouring spout, bonded with silicon carbide and fire clay. Lined with mullite for long life. These crucibles are resistant to high temperatures and thermal shock. 67. Investment Remover Non corrosive, non fuming solution formulated for complete cleaning in minutes. No harmful effects to personnel during use. Mix one part of solution with five parts of water. Not for use on aluminum, pearls or calcified stones. CW-190 CONTENTS 1 GALLON STYLE# H A Ø B Ø CU-721 A1 3 7 /8 3 1 /8 2 1 /8 CU-722 A2 4 1 /4 3 3 /4 2 1 /4 CU-723 A /8 2 3 /4 CU-724 A4 5 1 /2 4 1 /2 3 CU-725 A6 6 3 /8 5 1 /8 3 3 /4 CU-726 A / /8 4 1 /8 68. Crucible with Handle This melting dish has a removable heat resistant wooden handle. The crucible is made of fused silica for efficient melting and will not contaminate precious metals. 65. Fused Silica Melting Dishes Clay bonded fused silica melting dishes withstand temperatures up to 2800 F/1538 C. They have good thermal conductivity and will not contaminate metal alloys, chromium, gold or platinum. DIA. DEPTH DWT GRAMS CU /4 5 / CU /4 3 / CU CU / CS-220 CS-222 CU Hydro Air Wash Gun HANDLE ONLY CRUCIBLE & HANDLE CRUCIBLE /2 OZ Reduce cleaning time while removing investment from castings. This wash gun uses water and compressed air at PSI. Set includes trigger air valve, rubber nozzles and hand grips for protection against hot water. Connects to a sink faucet with 3 /4 hose connection. 66. Wesgo Platinum Melting Dish A melting crucible specifically for platinum, made by Wesgo. Designed to withstand the high temperatures that are needed for platinum and precious alloys. CI-080 COMPLETE SET CU-716 CU-717 STRAIGHT BACK / 8 troy oz HIGH BACK / 10 troy oz 70. Flask Tongs Light weight spring steel tongs for holding small or large flasks. Grip has extended length to provide a firm hold on flasks. LENGTH CU

62 CASTING 71. Crucible Tongs These tongs are made of steel, with curved or straight ends to hold heated crucibles when pouring molten metal into molds. CU-600 CU STRAIGHT 19 CURVED 72. Stirring Rods High heat resistant graphite or quartz stirring rods to stir molten metal in crucibles or dishes. Use to skim the surface of molten metal before pouring. SIZE CU-606 CARBON 12 X 3 /8 CU-607 QUARTZ 12 X 3 /8 73. Heat Resistant Gloves Non-asbestos, fully inside lined with soft felt, and available in different sizes. Useful when briefly handling hot items. CI-076 CI-077 CI-078 CI PAIR 18 RIGHT 14 PAIR 14 RIGHT 74. Adjustable Ingot Molds Convert metal scrap into rolling stock. Made of high quality steel, the mold cavities are smoothly finished. Each mold may be reduced in size by adjusting the sides in a horizontal direction. L X W X T DWT IM X 45 X 3.5mm 80 IM X 45 X 4.5mm 150 IM X 45 X 4.5mm 200 IM X 70 X 5.5mm 500 L T 75. Reversible Ingot Molds You may convert metal scrap into convenient and usable shapes: round, half round or flat. Simply melt metal and pour into the heated mold. To mold flat ingots one side is to be reversed. The mold is in two parts for ease of extraction. Ø mm Ø X W 2 X 1 3 X X 2 5 X 2.5mm T X W 4 X Adjustable from 15-45mm W Ø IM-703 IM-704 CLAMP ONLY INGOT MOLDS T Ø T 76. Open Ingot Molds Used to make large ingots from molten scrap. One piece forged steel mold with tapered sides for easy extraction of the ingot. L X W X T DWT IM X 90 X 35mm 50 IM X 120 X 45mm 80 IM X 155 X 65mm

63 CASTING 77. Wire Ingot Mold Cast molten scrap into wire shapes that may subsequently be drawn into profiles. Easy to hold by the handle, each mold has three different cavities and are available in two lengths. LENGTH IM-803 REGULAR 6 IM-804 EXTRA LONG 9 1 /2 78. Graphite Ingot Mold Single or multiple cavity molds in graphite. These molds withstand high temperatures and are useful to cast smaller ingots of metal or alloys. C F E B D A A X B X C D X E X F IM oz- 6 CAVITIES 6 X 5 X 3 /4 2 X 1 1 /4 X 1 /2 IM oz 2 1 /4 X 2 X /4 X 1 X 1 /2 IM oz 3 X 2 1 /4 X /4 X 1 1 /4 X 1 /2 IM oz 3 X 2 3 /4 X1 1 /4 2 X 1 3 /4 X 5 /8 IM Kg 3 3 /4 X 2 3 /4 X 1 1 /4 2 3 /4 X 1 3 /4 X 3 /4 79. Casting Alloys High purity alloys when added to 24k gold will create a lower carat and color of your choice. Sold in troy ounzes. CA-001 TEMP F CA-001 ALLOY #111 FOR YELLOW 10, 14K 1955 CA-002 ALLOY #121 FOR YELLOW 10, 14, 18K 1965 CA-009 ALLOY #129 FOR WHITE 10, 14, 18K 2100 Casting temperature should be approximately F above melting temperature. Casting temperature will vary slightly depending upon the particular alloy used. Flask temperature will vary depending on the size of the casting. GOLD CONTENT 10k = k = k = k = CA-002 CASTING TEMPERATURE CHART CA-009 ALLOY MELTING TEMP. METAL TO WAX FLASK CASTING TEMP. F C RATIO F C Silver Fine Silver Sterling Gold 10k Y Gold 14k Y Gold 18k Y Gold 10k W Gold 14k W Gold 18k W Platinum Aluminum Pewter Ambient Ambient 68

64 CLEANERS 1. Hoffman Steam Cleaners Steam cleaners are an efficient and cost effective way to clean jewelry and other articles prior to plating. This unit develops PSI steam in a short time. Constructed of a stainless steel outer cabinet. Essential features include: a sealed heating element, adjustable thermostat, safety valve and a water level sight gauge. UL and ASME approved. 2. Elma Ultrasonic Cleaners SPECIFICATION CAPACITY CL V/ 60Hz JEL3-2 gal CL V/ 50Hz JEL3-2 gal CL V/ 60Hz JEL16-3 /4 gal CL V/ 50Hz JEL16-3 /4 gal Complete stainless steel construction, both inside and outside, makes this cleaner both durable and long lasting. Engineered to generate ultrasonic waves at 35 khz throughout the cycle, these powerful waves reach into fine recesses and hard to get areas. Includes an acid resistant tub and glass beakers. CAPACITY TANK SIZE HEATER SPECIFICATIONS UL L / 1 /2 gal 6 X 5 1 /3 X 4 YES 110V/ 60Hz 100W UL L / 1 /2 gal 6 X 5 1 /3 X 4 YES 220V/ 50Hz 100W UL L / 3 /4 gal 9 1 /2 X 5 1 /3 X 4 YES 110V/ 60Hz 240W UL L / 3 /4 gal 9 1 /2 X 5 1 /3 X 4 YES 220V/ 50Hz 240W UL L / 1 1 /2 gal 12 X 6 X 6 YES 110V/ 60Hz 285W UL L / 1 1 /2 gal 12 X 6 X 6 YES 220V/ 50Hz 285W UL L / 3 1 /4 gal 12 X 9 1 /2 X 8 YES 110V/ 60Hz 560W UL L / 3 1 /4 gal 12 X 9 1 /2 X 8 YES 220V/ 50Hz 560W Accessories for Elma UL-001 ROUND BASKET UL-002 RECTANGULAR TRAY 3. Mini Cleaner A table top model for small to medium volume ultrasonic cleaning. Ideal for retail stores or home use. Efficient solid state circuitry with a three minute auto off timer. Includes plastic basket and cover. Capacity- 600ml. 4. Polishing Compound Remover A specially developed alkaline liquid cleaner for removal of tripoli, rouge and other buffing compounds. Eliminates hand wiping, streak marks and discoloration on gold, silver and other metal alloys. Use 2-4 ozs per gallon of water. 70 UL-009 UL-008 VOLTS/ WATTS 110V/ 60W 220V/ 50W UL-080 UL-081 CONTENTS 1 gal 5 gal

65 5. Plastic Coated Steam Tweezers Coating on tweezer tips provides a non-scratch surface for holding work pieces during steam cleaning. Made of heat resistant stainless steel. LENGTH TW TW TW Ring Cleaning Racks CLEANERS Wire formed and vinyl coated to protect rings from abrasion or marring, when dipped into the tank for ultrasonic cleaning. Select from different capacities and sizes. 6. Stainless Steel Baskets & Trays Drop and lift off baskets make handling of small articles and jewelry easy to immerse while ultrasonic cleaning. UL-025 UL-024 UL /4 X 4 3 /4 X 2-1 /2 gal. UL /8 X 5 X 3 3 /8-3 /4 gal. UL X 5 X 3 3 /8-1 1 /2 gal. UL-027 MESH BASKET 2 DIA. X 2 UL /2 gal. TANK CAPACITY UL /4 gal. TANK CAPACITY 7. Modular Ultrasonic Racks UL-023 Heavy duty vinyl coated racks for holding items of jewelry while cleaning ultrasonically. These are provided with an adjustable handle to suit different tank depths. To increase capacity, add-on racks may be snap fitted to the handle. All racks are 8 L X 3 W. UL-027 UL-003 UL UL-004 UL /2 X 4 X 1 3 /4 -SINGLE-16 RING 5 1 /2 X 4 X 1 3 /4 -DOUBLE-32 RING 10 X 4 X 2 1 /2 -SINGLE-32 RING 10 X 4 X 2 1 /2 -DOUBLE-72 RING 10. Umbrella Ring Rack Stainless steel frame plastic coated rack. Hooks are adjustable and evenly spaced to hold articles of jewelry for cleaning or plating. UL-059 UL-061 UL HOOKS 8 HOOKS 10 HOOKS UL-028 UL Plating Racks RACK WITH 14 HANDLE ADD ON RACK Heavy duty vinyl coated racks for hanging articles of jewelry, rings and findings during plating. These racks are provided with a hook that allows it to be immersed into the plating tank. DIA. ROWS HOOKS SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO Plastic Strainer Heavy gauge, in three different sizes. The rim is reinforced and provided with a handle. DIA. UL UL UL

66 CLEANERS 12. Portable Steam Cleaner A bench model, made of heavy gauge stainless steel. Efficient steam generation at PSI. Incorporates safety features for pressure and temperature limits. No need for any plumbing or boiler permit. Use only distilled or de-ionized water for maintenance free performance. UL listed. Dimensions 12 L X 9 W X10 Ht. 13. Quatro Air Purifier Most finishing operations like grinding, buffing and polishing generate a large amount of airborne dust. The air purifier is essential to remove fine dust particles that are an environmental hazard. These units are quiet, compact and efficiently eliminate dust. Easy to install any where in the shop without the need of duct work. UL-046 UL V/ 60Hz- 1300W 220V/ 50Hz- 1300W 14. Speed Brite Ionic Cleaners A fast cleaning process to clean jewelry and precious stones, without ultrasonic waves, in less than a minute. This process, called ionic cleaning, uses on electrolyte solution that imparts a brightness to jewelry and a sparkle to precious stones. Environmentally safe, it is a gentle way to clean emeralds, opals, pearls and other soft stones. UL-074 MODEL SPECIFICATION L X W X H DC-290 AF V/ 60Hz 16 X 22 X 37 DC-291 AF V/ 60Hz 16 X 22 X 52 DC-292 AF V/ 60Hz 26 X 24 X 71 SPECIFICATION CAPACITY UL V/ 60Hz 1 qt.-turbo UL V/ 50Hz 1 qt.-turbo UL V/ 60Hz 12 oz.-200sb UL V/ 50Hz 12 oz.-200sb UL-074 9V BATT. 6 oz.-mini 15. Speed Brite Ionic- Adapter Boost the power of your ultrasonic cleaner by the add-on ionic adapter which comes complete with transformer and metal hook for suspension. (UL approved) UL-075 / UL-076 UL-072 / UL-073 GEM SPARKLE UL-070 / UL-071 UL-075 UL-076 UL-037 UL-038 UL-039 SPECIFICATION #300SB 110V/ 60Hz #300SB 220V/ 50Hz 16. Gem Sparkle- Cleaning Solution Specifically formulated solution to remove dirt, grime and oxidation. May be used to clean delicate stones with a soft brush. GEM SPARKLE 16 oz- CONCENTRATE 32 oz- CONCENTRATE 1 gal- CONCENTRATE 17. Parts Holding Baskets Basket may be used for keeping small parts together during steam or ultrasonic cleaning. Quick acting spring device opens or closes the basket while loading or unloading parts. UL-030 SMALL BASKET 6 X 1 1 /2 UL-031 LARGE BASKET 6 X 2 72

67 18. Selvyt Cloths High quality, long lasting, lint free cloth. Treat it with a little polishing rouge then use it to shine jewelry, watches, silverware and crystal. CLEANERS SIZE PC X 5 PC X 10 PC X 14 SIZE PC X 17 PC X 21 PC X Rouge Cloth A short nap cloth impregnated with rouge. Cloth feels like felt, but removes tarnish and fine scratch marks to leave a bright attractive finish on jewelry M Scotch Brite Cloths SIZE PC X 11 An extraordinary cloth that has oil and water absorbing qualities. Lifts out liquids, greases and dirt particles, without leaving any smear or residue. Very durable wipes that can be machine washed in clod water then air dried. (Do not bleach) 12 1 /2 X 14 1 /2 6 X 7 1 /2 COLOR PC-740 PC-746 WHITE PC-741 PC-747 BLUE PC-742 PC-748 GREEN PC-743 PC-749 YELLOW PC-744 PC-750 RED 21. Lint Free Cloths Non-abrasive lint free cleaning cloths, restore luster and brilliance to articles of jewelry and precious stones. Scratch proof cleaning action is gentle and reliable. Size 9 X Inspection Cotton Gloves An absolute necessity that needs to be worn when handling precious metal and stones. Made of special cotton fabric, it is invaluable for protection of jewelry. PC-754 PC-755 COLOR WHITE- FOR PEARL BLUE- FOR DIAMOND PC-800 PC-801 COTTON GLOVE - GENTS COTTON GLOVE -LADIES 22. Jewelry Wipes A moist cloth that removes dirt and tarnish from gold, silver and all non-ferrous metals. Will not scratch or mar the surfaces of fine articles of jewelry. Each dispenser contains 25 dry wipes. 24. Washout Brushes Durable nylon bristles, set in rows, mounted in wood or plastic, for cleansing of work parts. BU-031 BU-032 PC-757 JEWELRY WIPES BU-031 BU-032 BONE HANDLE WOODEN HANDLE 73

68 CLEANERS 28. JAX Master Metal Cleaning Solutions JAX Silver Cleaner & Polish Chemically cleans and polishes the blackest silver in one application. Does not strip surface to a raw, dull finish. Incorporates a special polish that will not harm or streak the most delicate surfaces. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Metal Cleaner Polish Chemically cleans and polishes tarnished brass, bronze, copper, pewter, nickel and steel. Removes oxidation, surface dirt, oil and finger prints. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Instant Brass, Copper & Marble Cleaner A heavy duty cleaner that removes tarnish, surface dirt, old lacquer and grease from brass, bronze, and copper. Safe for use on gold and marble. PE PINT (473ml) 25. Steam Additive A necessary additive for removing rust and mineral deposits in the boiler chamber of steam cleaners. Regular use extends the life of the unit by preventing calcium build up and reduces scaling. JAX Instant Brass, Copper & Gold Cleaner A light duty cleaner for delicate metals. Removes tarnish and surface contamination from fine gold finishes, bronzes, lamps, lighting fixtures, jewelry, and antiques. Contains no abrasives. Leaves no residue. PE PINT (473ml) CL-035 STEAM ADDITIVE-16 oz JAX Instant Brass & Copper Cleaner A heavy duty cleaner that removes tarnish and oxidation from the blackest copper, brass and bronze. PE PINT (473ml) 26. 3M Anti-Tarnish Strip Non-toxic, non abrasive strips protect all precious metals from stains and oxidation. Easy to use. Simply place in the carton or box. Effectively draws away tarnish, keeping the articles of jewelry with original shine. PE X 7-8 PCS M Tarnish Shield A thin film coat that protects silver, gold and other treasured articles. Ideal for silver plate, gold plate and trophies. Does not effect solderability. Helps avoid discoloration and oxidation for months. JAX Instant Silver Cleaner A heavy duty cleaner that removes tarnish and oxidation from the blackest silver. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Aluminum Cleaner Produces a bright clean finish on all aluminum surfaces. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Rust Remover A rust remover and an effective pre-paint primer for iron and steel. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Rust Preventer A water based solution that protects iron and steel from rust. PE PINT (473ml) PE-055 PE COPPER & BRASS POLISHER-10 oz SILVER POLISHER-10 oz JAX Lacquer Remover A water based solution that removes lacquer and paint from metal surfaces. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Tarnish Remover Prevents tarnish on clean brass, bronze, and copper. PE PINT (473ml)

69 DAPPING Dapping...Punches and Blocks are used to form and dome sheet metal into different curved shapes. Smaller sizes are used for thinner metal. Larger sizes for thicker metal. When working with metal forming, the usual practice is to work from a shallow curve to a larger one. Punches and blocks are matched so as to form perfect hemispheres. 1. Dapping Block-Brass Highly polished, tempered brass, with numerous depressions on all six sides. Useful to stretch soft metal into shallow forms or perfect hemispheres. Available in two sizes. SIZE DB DB /8 2. Dapping Block-Steel Alloy steel cube with eighteen polished depressions on all six sides. Useful to dome metal sheet or strips into various forms. The 2" cube has its largest hemisphere at 1 3 /8 and the 2 1 /2 cube has a maximum hemisphere at 1 3 /4. SIZE DB DB /2 3. Dapping Block-Lead This soft base block provides the ideal surface when stamping, forming or chasing. Large surface area is adaptable for rolling in designs. 4. Flat Dapping Block Made of alloy steel, hardened and polished. The smaller has 14 hemispheres: 25, 22, 20, 19, 17, 16, 14, 13, 11, 9, 7.5, 5.5, 4.5 and 3mm. The larger has 27 hemispheres:1.5, 2, 2.4, 2.8, 3.2, 3.6, 4.4, 4.8, 5.6, 6.4, 7.1, 7.9, 8.7, 9.5, 10.7, 11.1, 12.7, 14.3, 15.5, 15.9, 17.1, 17.5, 19.1, 20.6, 22.2, 23.8 and 25.4mm ( 1 /8-1 ). SIZE AN /2 X 3 1 /2 X 3 /4 SIZE DB X 2 1 /2 X 1 DB X 2 1 /2 X 2 5. Shallow Dapping Block Four large shallow depressions, two on each side, in a hardened steel block. Ideal for pre-forms or creation of hollow articles of jewelry. 6. Dapping Block- Rubber A unique dapping block made in hard rubber with six working sides. It is the ideal resilient surface that easily conforms to all sizes or shapes of steel or hardwood dapping punches. Useful in creating all types of shallow forms or channels in thin and soft sheets of precious metal, without scratch marks or mars. 7. Dapping Die & Design Block A versatile, hardened and polished steel dapping block, having working surfaces on all six sides. The block has fourteen different hemispherical depressions from 1 /8 to 1 and eight semi-circular forms for working pre-cut strips. Size 3 3 /4 x 2 1 /2 x 1. SIZE DB X 2 X 3 /4 SIZE DB X 4 X 1 DB-360 DELUXE DB-363 ECONOMY 76

70 8. Knuckling Block Use all six sides of this hardened steel block. The block has an assortment of half-round, triangular and channel grooves for bending and shaping creative forms. SIZE DB /2 X 2 1 /2 DAPPING 9. Bending Block High quality, hardened, polished steel block which can be used on both sides. Ten different forms to work large or small metal strips. 10. Dapping Punch Sets SIZE DB X 2 X 1 DB X 3 X 1 Three different sets of punches made of hardened steel with finely polished ball ends. DELUXE ECONOMY QTY SIZE DB-218 DB /64-3 /4 DB-224 DB /64-1 DB-236 DB / Dapping Punches & Block Hardened steel, mirror finished punches and die block. Punches and die block are available individually. Compete set includes: Four dapping punches, one die block and hardwood stand. 12. Deluxe Dapping Punch Set Exceptional premium quality steel set of 24 pieces. Each punch is precision made and highly polished. A long support stem provides stability. All neatly organized on a laminated hardwood stand with clearly marked sizes( 7 /64, 1 /8, 9 /64, 5 /32, 7 /32, 1 /4, 9 /32, 5 /16, 3 /8, 13 /32, 7 /16, 15 /32, 1 /2, 9 /16, 19 /32, 5 /8, 11 /16, 23 /32, 3 /4, 25 /32, 13 /16, 7 /8, 15 /16, 1 ). 13. Dapping Punches DB-197 DB-199 DB-166 DB-336 DB-340 DB-345 DB-350 DB-200 COMPLETE SET DAPPING PUNCH ON WOOD STAND DAPPING BLOCK ONLY 1 3 /8 (36mm) DAPPING PUNCH 1 9 /16 (40mm) DAPPING PUNCH 1 3 /4 (45mm) DAPPING PUNCH 2 (50mm) DAPPING PUNCH 24 PCS. SET Select the exact punch or punches for your needs. Made of hard tempered steel with smooth finished ball ends. Full hemispherical head provides superior forming or chasing. May be used in dapping blocks or on any soft base. IN MM DC / DC /8 3.2 DC / DC / DC / DC /4 6.4 DC / DC / DC /8 9.5 DC / DC / DC / IN MM DC / DC / DC / DC / DC / DC / DC / DC / DC / DC / DC / DC

71 DAPPING 14. Riveting Stake A universal riveting tool having fifty-two holes from 0.29 mm to 10 mm. Made in hard polished steel. This high precision block is ideal for all riveting applications. SIZE AN X 40 X 40mm 15. Disc Cutters Made of hardened tool steel to precision tolerances. These cutters will cut perfect round discs in gold, silver or soft metal sheets. SIZE DC /8 X 1 /2-7 PCS. 1 /16 INCR. DC /2 X 1-5 PCS. 1 /8 INCR. 16. Precision Disc Cutter A larger size disc cutter, made in tool steel, hardened and tempered to pierce metal sheet of thicker gauges. Achieve a clean cut by using a hand or hydraulic press. DC-270 DISC CUTTER -1 1 /4 X 1 1 /2 17. Deluxe Disc Cutters Designed for cutting annealed metal sheets up to 18 gauge, these hardened punches will shear perfect circles. Two sets are available in different range sizes and increments. SIZE SET DC to 14mm DC to 21mm 18. Wood Dapping Block & Punches Hardwood block, smoothly finished, has shallow depressions on all six sides for repairs and removing dents. Two wooden punches with convex shaped ends to gently work thin soft metal. SIZE DB /2 X 2 1 /2 X 2 1 /2 19. Wood Dapping Punches Very carefully handcrafted wood dapping punches are ideal for forming shapes safely and quickly without marring your metal. 7-20mm by 1mm increment and by 2mm increment. Set of 24 pcs. DB-044 SIZE 7 to 40mm 78

72 20. Wood Dapping Punches & Die-Set This wood dapping block and punch set is carefully handcrafted and clearly marked with the disc size. Eight punches and matched concave hemispheres from 10mm-19mm. 21. Large Dapping Block DAPPING Use for forming large domed or grooved shapes. Comes with depressions on four sides. SIZE DB /4 X 7 X 3 SIZE DB X 7 X 3 3 /4 22. Necklace Mandrel Made of highly polished cast iron and chrome plated. This mandrel may be used for shaping, forging, sizing and forming jewelry neck pieces. SIZE DB X 7 3 /4 X 5 1 /2 23. Bezel Blocks Made of hardened polished steel, each bezel block in a different shape, all with matched punches. Create the bezel forms you need in a range of calibrated sizes. Indispensable for setting stones. NOTE: Bezel blocks and punches of special shapes and sizes are available on order. PROFILE SHAPE RANGE PUNCH ANGLE DB-501 EMERALD 4 to 14mm DB-502 ROUND 5 to 20mm 17 DB-503 OCTAGON 4 to 14mm 17 DB-504 TRIANGLE 4 to 14mm 17 DB-505 OVAL 4 to 14mm 17 DB-506 HALF ROUND 5 to 15mm 17 DB-507 HEXAGON 4 to 14mm 17 DB-508 PEAR 4 to 14mm 17 DB-509 SQUARE 4 to 14mm 17 79

73 WORKBENCHES BE-009 MO-35 A well constructed hardwood workbench with three side railing and skirted legs. Three storage drawers and two large slide out catch trays. Left and right arm supports, with a replaceable bench pin slot. 32 W X 21 D X 36 Ht. BE-011 MO-50 A quality laminated top workbench with skirted legs. Three drawers and two slide out trays. Right and left arm rests with bench pin slot /2 W X 21 1 /2 D X 36 Ht. BE-008 MO-40 Laminated top hardwood workbench with three side railing and skirted legs. Three storage drawers and two large slide out catch trays. Predrilled holes for mandrels. Left and right arm supports, with a replaceable bench pin slot. 28 W X 20 D X 36 Ht. BE-007 BN S A top quality workbench of seasoned hardwood with side railings and full skirted sides and rear. Four drawers, a slide out tray with shelf, and lockable. Right and left arm supports, a replaceable bench pin slot and predrilled holes /4 W X 19 1 /2 D X 38 Ht. BE-015 MO-10 BE-017 MO-20 A compliment to your workbench for easy organized storage. Free standing, may be placed conveniently anywhere in the shop. 3- drawer 11 1 /4 W X 16 D X 22 1 /2 Ht. 7- drawer 13 W X 16 D X 36 1 /2 Ht. BE-006 BN-250 A top quality workbench of seasoned hardwood with side railings and full skirted legs. Four drawers and a slide out tray with shelf. Right and left arm supports, a replaceable bench pin slot and predrilled holes /4 W X 19 1 /2 D X 38 Ht. 80 For MoreWorkBenches Page 24 BE-014 Sturdy, swivel tubular steel chair on heavy duty casters. Adjustable cushioned seat with padded back support that reduces fatigue and helps increase production. Seat adjusts in height. Note: For work benches some assembly is required. All Benches will be shipped via Master Craft.

74 DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES 1. Diamond Points Premium quality diamond particles are electroplated on stainless steel shanks. Diamond points are excellent for carving, smoothing and performing numerous tasks in stone, glass, ceramics and all non-ferrous metals. Use of a coolant, either water or a cutting oil, will maximize tool life. Recommended operating speed is 30,000 rpm. Shank size 3 /32. A B C D E F G H I J K L FIG. SIZE(MM) A. BR X 12 B. BR X 10 C. BR X 10 D. BR X 10 E. BR X 12 F. BR X 9 G. BR X 8 H. BR X 5 I. BR X 5 J. BR X 1.5 K. BR X 2 L. BR X 1 M N O P Q R S T U V W X FIG. SIZE(MM) M. BR X 7 N. BR X 6.5 O. BR X 9 P. BR X 5 Q. BR X 8 R. BR X 6 S. BR X 7 T. BR X 1 U. BR X 1.5 V. BR X 2.5 W. BR X 3 X. BR X 0.8 Always use water as Lubricant on diamond tools Diamond Point Sets Set of 12 points in a plastic pouch. Shank size 3 /32. BR-502 SET OF 12 INCLUDES #A-L BR-503 SET OF 12 INCLUDES #M-X 2. Diamond Points in Set 20/30 pcs A complete set of electroplated diamond points on stainless steel shanks, in various shapes. Manufactured under the most stringent standards. Significantly outperforms all other tools to give a super smooth finish on stone, glass, ceramic and all precious metals. Recommended operating speed is 30,000 rpm. Shank size 3 /32. BR-504 BR-505 ASST. SHAPES 20PCS. ASST. SHAPES 30PCS. 3. Diamond Texturing Tools-Pavé Achieve beautiful textures and artistic designs on gold and silver jewelry. These single point diamond tools are for use on a Badeco hammer handpiece or similar. Shanks are screw on type with tapered points to extend into working intricate areas. Useful for freehand designing. 4. Diamond Tip for Air Scriber Diamond tip will mark all soft or hard materials. Use with an air scriber for writing, designing and layout work. For air scriber page 116. AW-030 AW-030 AW-031 STANDARD DELUXE LASER POINT AW-031 MO-409 DIAMOND TIP 82

75 5. Diamond Fly Wheels Use these fly wheels on rotary handpieces to fashion brilliant patterns on jewelry. Tools have a natural diamond point and are available in two widths and different degrees. Speed min.30,000 rpm. DEGREE SHANK SIZE AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm 6. Diamond Tools Single point diamond cutting tools mounted in a steel shank for use in faceting machines. Different styles and novel designs may be cut with these special styled tools. DEGREE SIZE AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm 7. Diamond Coated Drills DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES DEGREE SHANK SIZE AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm DEGREE SIZE AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm AW mm These electroplated twist drills are excellent for drilling stones, pearls, glass or ceramics. Drills are all medium grit. Shank size 3 /32. Lubricate with water during use. DR-188 DR-189 DR-190 DR-191 DR-192 DR-193 DR-194 DR-195 DR-196 SIZE 1.0mm 1.1mm 1.2mm 1.3mm 1.4mm 1.5mm 1.6mm 1.8mm 2.0mm Diamond Tools -Special Styles STYLE SIZE AW-605 CONVEX 2mm AW-608 CONCAVE 2mm AW-609 CONVEX 1mm AW-610 CONCAVE 1mm 9. Diamond Needle Files Quality diamond files in different shapes for very fine finishing. Made of virgin diamond particles electroplated on high precision steel blanks, with comfortable handles to provide maximum strength, flexibility and durability. Overall length 5 1 /2. 8. Diamond Disc Set These diamond discs are electroplated and ideal for cutting or sanding stones and glass. Kit comes with 1 /8 mandrel. Disc will also fit standard mandrel with 3 /32 shank. DR PC SET WITH MANDREL Diamond sharpening stones See Page 2 FL-080 FL-081 FL-082 FL-083 FL-084 THREE-SQUARE PILLAR HALF-ROUND ROUND SQUARE 83

76 DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES 10. Diamond Tweezers Absolutely the best and the finest made tweezers specifically for the professional jeweler. Perfectly aligned hardened tips, in all point sizes. Select from a wide range of stainless matt or black finish. Inside grooved or serrated tips, with or without a locking mechanism. Overall length 160mm. R - style indicates locking Tweezers. STYLE /SIZE MATT FINISH BLACK FINISH STYLE/SIZE MATT GROOVED BLACK GROOVED REG. LOCK REG. LOCK REGUL. LOCK REGUL. LOCK XF M1 TW TW TW-906 TW-910 TW-929 TW-931 XF XF MR1 M1 MR1 M1 MR1 F L1 TW-901 TW-918 TW-921 TW-928 TW-905 TW-911 TW-930 TW-932 FR F FR F FR LR1 L1 LR1 L1 LR1 M XL1 TW-902 TW-917 TW-922 TW-927 TW-908 TW-912 TW MR M MR M MR XLR1 XL1 XLR1 XL1 - L TW-903 TW-916 TW-923 TW-926 XXL1 TW TW LR L LR L LR XXL1 XXL1 - XL TW-907 TW-919 TW-925 TW XLR XL XLR XL XLR 11. Starlight- Diamond Tweezers Starlight tweezers have a fine granulated coating which firmly holds small or large stones at any angle. Starlight titanium tweezers are lighter than Starlight diamond tweezers, yet twice as strong. Overall length 160mm. 12. Titanium Diamond Tweezers Super lightweight rust resistant Tweezers, excellent for sorting and inspecting stones. 100% non-magnetic. Overall length 160mm. STYLE /SIZE STARLIGHT STARLIGHT STARLIGHT STYLE /SIZE TITANIUM DIAMOND DIAMOND LOCK TITANIUM DIAMOND XF TW TW-870 XF TW-890 XF XF F F TW-936 TW-838 TW-871 FR F FR F TW-891 M M TW-937 TW-839 TW-872 MR M MR M TW-892 L L TW-938 TW-840 TW-873 LR L LR L TW-893 XL TW-837 XL R - style indicates locking Tweezers. 13. Teflon Grip Tweezers- Swiss Special tweezers to hold soft stones, pearls etc. Teflon bonded tip protects the girdle of the stones. TW-900 TEFLON POINTS 84

77 14. Diamond Washing Cups Rinse and clean diamond and precious gem stones. Stainless steel inner container easily lifts out of external glass jar. A screw cap glass jar prevents evaporation of cleansing liquid. DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES 16. Prong Holder Ideal for holding precious and semi-precious stones for inspection and valuation. DI-103 SMALL 2 1 /2 X 2 1 /2 DI LARGE 3 X Tray for Diamond Sieves An organizer to hold sieve plates for easy viewing. Clearly marked locations store each sieve separately. Sieves not included. DI-010 DI Diamond Scoops SIEVE TRAY PLASTIC SIEVE TRAY ACRYLIC Handle all stones in a time saving manner. Made of non-magnetic stainless steel. Select from a range of sizes to suit your convenience. LENGTH DI /4 DI Diamond Sellers Exhibit the brilliance of precious gemstones in an eye catching display. Safe, secure and a more efficient way to reveal the shapes of emerald, oval, pear, square, round and marquise. DI-085 DI DIAMOND ARMS 10 DIAMOND ARMS SIZE DI-090 SCOOP W/HANDLE 2 3 /4 X 2 1 /8 DI-092 S.S #2 2 X 1 1 /4 DI-093 S.S #3 2 1 /2 X 2 DI-094 S.S #4 3 X 2 DI-095 S S #5 3 1 /2 X 2 1 /2 19. Sorting Trays Use this ideal tray, made of unbreakable plastic and available in two colors. Four grooves on one side, and specific hole sizes on the other, provides a functional way to sort all loose gemstones. 20. Diamond Sieve Sets Long lasting chrome plated brass sieves to sort diamonds and other precious stones. Calibrated sizes in a full range. 23 plates in full numbers- Econo 42 plates with half numbers.- Econo 40 plates with half numbers- Belgium. 21. Laser Drill Diamond Sieve Sets These Sieves are made in Belgium. Holes are drilled with laser technology to get highest tolerence. Stones are calibrated to almost perfect sizes, longer lasting and seives will not wrap or change size. 80mm dia. comes with Sieve plate numbers and mm sizes. SIZE DI-104 LEAD 4 X 2 1 /2 DI-105 WHITE 4 X 2 1 /2 DI-106 BLACK 4 X 2 1 /2 DI-107 WHITE-GROOVED 7 1 /8 X 3 3 /4 DI-108 BLACK-GROOVED 7 1 /8 X 3 3 /4 PLATES 47MM 66MM 80MM 107MM 23 DI-050 DI-070 DI-080 DI DI-052 DI-072 DI-082 DI DI-035 DI-036 DI-037 DI-038 PLATES 80MM 42 DI DI

78 DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES 22. Diamond Sorting Pad Extra firm sorting pad with a non-reflective flat surface. A practical method to sort large quantities of gemstones. Saves time-consuming scooping and ensures broad based viewing for selection. Deluxe contains 70 sheets per pad. 9 X X X X 22 ECONOMY - DI-109 DI DELUXE DI-117 DI-116 DI-118 DI-119 DI-181 DI-180 DI Leather Wallets and Case Use these slim style wallets made of durable leather to carry precious gemstones. Wallets have ample space to carry gemstones in parcel paper and have a zipper. 24. Diamond Wax Stick Ideal for lifting loose stones, without smudge or stain, and positioning them in the stone seats. Cones are tapered to a point and mounted on a handle. 25. Diamond Scribe A slim finely pointed scriber for layout work. Will mark glass, stone, ceramic and all precious metals. Diamond tip is retractable for protection. 26. Parcel Papers DI X 3 1 /2 X 2 DI X 3 1 /2 X 1 /2 DI X 3 3 /4 X 1 /2 DI-113 TS-300 WAX STICK- 1 /2 WIDE DIAMOND SCRIBE Choice selected papers, polished to perfection. Unmatched for protection. Created to enhance gems with reflected light. Select from different flute colors for every situation. Available as 25 papers per pack and 4 packs per box. Sizes from 1 to 4. OUTSIDE INSIDE STONE PAPER FLUTES SIZE # Color Gemstone Papers DI-190 RUBY WHITE 2-YELLOW 3 1 /4 X 1 3 /4 1 DI-191 EMERALD WHITE 2-TAN 3 1 /4 X 1 3 /4 1 DI-192 OPAL WHITE 2-BLACK 3 1 /4 X 1 3 /4 1 DI-193 SAPPHIRE WHITE 2 MATT WHITE 3 1 /4 X 1 3 /4 1 Diamond Parcel Papers DI-196 DIAMOND WHITE 2-WHITE 3 3 /4 X 2 2 DI-197 DIAMOND WHITE 2-WHITE 4 X 2 3 DI-198 DIAMOND WHITE 2-WHITE 4 1 /2 X 2 3 /4 4 Economical Diamond Parcel Papers DI-199 DIAMOND WHITE 2-WHITE 3 1 /4 X 1 3 /4 1 DI-200 DIAMOND WHITE 2-DARK BLUE 3 1 /4 X 1 3 /4 1 DI-211 DIAMOND WHITE 1-BLUE 1-WHITE 3 1 /4 X 1 3 /4 1 Belgium Diamond Parcel Papers DI-201 DIAMOND WHITE 1-BLUE 1-WHITE 3 1 /4 X 1 3 /4 1 DI-202 DIAMOND WHITE 2-DARK BLUE 3 1 /4 X 1 3 /4 1 DI-203 DIAMOND WHITE 2-WHITE 3 1 /4 X 1 3 / Diamond Flutes Made of the finest glassine paper, these flutes provide the best protection for all loose gemstones. Sold in packs of 100. Size 2 1 /2 X 1 1 /2. SIZE DI-299 BRIGHT WHITE 1 DI-300 BRIGHT WHITE 3 /4 DI-301 BLUE 3 /4 DI-302 BLUE 1

79 28. Leveridge Type Gauge The most versatile measuring instrument for any jeweler appraiser or gem cutter. Estimates weight of diamonds mounted or loose. May also be used for other precious gems and pearls. Comes with high setting attachment and weight estimator. Includes an inside measuring system for rings. Precision crafted for years of service. DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES GM-602 GM-605 LEVERIDGE TYPE GAUGE BOOK & CASE 29. Presidium Gauges Presidium Dial Gauge: Predictable accuracy. Read out measurement in millimeters and weight in carats simultaneously. Measures stones up to 23 mm in divisions of 0.1mm. Hardened wear resistant measuring surfaces. Includes a conversion booklet and a carrying case. Presidium Digital Gemstone Gauge: Hi-tech, solid state circuitry eliminates miscalculation and gives direct digital read out up to one micron accuracy. Features include long life battery, zero reset and auto-off. Unsurpassed value for the discriminating jeweler. GM-606 GM-603 DIAL GAUGE DIGITAL GEMSTONE GAUGE 30. Pocket Digital Gauge Precision pocket digital caliper with LCD display and zero re-set button. Maximum reading 25mm. Resolution 0.01mm. GM-604 POCKET DIGITAL GAUGE 31. Diamond and Pearl Gauges An elegant, sensitive, precision engineered, dial gauge for accurate measurements of pearls and other small stones. Parallel, ground measuring faces for rounds and even baguettes, in 0.1mm increments up to a maximum of 10mm. Dial rotates for absolute zero setting. GM-501 GM-502 GM-503 GM mm 20mm ECONO-10mm ECONO-20mm 32. Fan Type Diamond Gauges Compact, fan type, pocket gauge in stainless steel. Overall 3 1 /2 length. Measures in carat weight all stone cuts in brilliant, marquise, pear, square, emerald and oval. FAN GRADUATION GM TO 4 CARAT GM TO 6 CARAT GM TO 7 CARAT 87

80 DIAMOND TOOLS & SUPPLIES TS-220 TS Presidium Diamond Testers Diamond Fact: Top of the line tester that performs like a pro. Instantly separates simulant from the genuine. Small compact pocket model has needle tip testing point for extremely small stones. Operates on two AAA batteries (not included). Comes in a carrying case with a manufacturer s guarantee. Diamond Mate: Professional, compact, sleek pen like instrument. Advanced digital electronic circuitry consistently and reliably distinguishes between diamonds and simulant. Operation is simple. LED display shows green and gives audible beep when diamond is tested. TS-220 DIAMOND FACT TS-240 DIAMOND MATE-A TS-241 DIAMOND MATE-C WITH BATTERY CHARGER TS Presidium Multi Testers Utilize the combined principles of thermal and electrical conductivity from our patented technology. The measuring probes, together with the electronics circuitriy, are designed to pick up and segregate data collected from the stones via a customized micro-controller. Within a split second, the test result will be displayed. Dimension 160 X 42 X 22mm. TS-222 TS-223 PRESIDIUM MULTI TESTER ADAPTER FOR MULTI TESTER 35. Moissanite Tester The revolutionary new tester that outsmarts and even detects moissanite, which is a simulant for diamond. Ultra sensitive, can check stones of 0.01 carat or less. Readings displayed on both sides allowing use in either hand. Backed by manufacturer s warranty. TS-211 IKOHE MOISSANITE TESTER 36. Diamond Tester- Japan Improved positive sensing distinguishes the look alike from the genuine. A very reliable tester that identifies natural diamond from white corundum, Y.A.G and other simulant. Advanced electronic display. Simultaneous audible beep and light signal for instant recognition. Supported by manufacturer s warranty. TS-210 CULTI- JAPAN 37. Diamond Testers-USA Fast, sensitive and reliable. Delivers result in seconds. Tests even the smallest gem stones. Negligible warm up time, automatic shut off and audible diamond signal. Supported by manufacturer s warranty. 88 TS-200 MIZAR- USA

81 DRAWPLATES & ROLLING MILLS 1. Cavallin Rolling Mills-Flat High quality, sturdy, one piece frame construction. Alloy steel hardened and tempered rolls run in lubricated bronze bearings. Rolls are gear driven, can be aligned, raised and lowered. Calibrated dial indicates reduction in the sheet size. Select from three models for flat forms up to a maximum of 120mm width. Dimensions in mm MODEL L Ø RM-104 L RM-106 L RM-108 L Cavallin Rolling Mills Combination- Flat/Square Wire Diversify your rolling needs with a choice of different models. All manual operated models built to the high exacting standards of Cavallin for years of trouble free performance. Select from various models to form shapes of flat, round, square and half round. Special feature of an open end with side rollers to do bracelet patterns. Dimensions in mm MODEL F L Ø SQ. RM-120 LF RM-110 LF RM-111 LF RM-112 LF Cavallin Rolling Mills-Combination-Square/ Half Round Wire Dimensions in mm MODEL F Ø SQ. HF/RND RM-105 F X 1.2 RM-107 F X 1.2 RM-109 F X Economy Rolling Mills Compact, bench mounted rolling mills. Heavy duty frame, hardened and tempered rolls, gear reduction for ease of operation. Select from three different models for a variety of shapes according to your needs. Rolls are 1.67 dia. and 3 in length. RM-001 RM-002 RM-003 SHAPE FLAT YES YES YES SQUARE (4-1mm) - YES YES HF-ROUND (3-2mm) - YES YES TEXTURE (3 EX. ROLLS - - YES 90

82 DRAWPLATES & ROLLING MILLS 5. Cavallin Rolling Mills-with Gear- Flat Engineered with top quality material and machined to close tolerances, these rolling mills make easy work of heavy jobs. Features an additional gear reduction of 1:4 ratio for effortless rolling. Three models with different capacities. Dimensions in mm MODEL L Ø RM-091 LR RM-092 LR RM-093 LR Cavallin Rolling Mills-with Gear Combination-Flat/ Square Dimensions in mm MODEL F Ø SQ. L RM-099 LFR RM-103 LFR RM-102 LFR Cavallin Rolling Mills-London These rolling mills are available with and without gear. Model LF120 is without gear (illustration shown). Model LFR120 is with gear. Reduction ratio 1:4 Dimensions in mm MODEL F Ø SQ. HF/RND L RM-089 LF X 2 / 2 X RM-090 LFR X 2 / 2 X Pedestal for Cavallin Rolling Mills To free up bench working space all Cavallin Rolling Mills can be mounted on steel pedestals. Positions mill at a convenient working height. Select from individual base plates to suit the machine model. RM-115 RM-113 RM-114 RM-116 RM-117 STAND OR PEDESTAL PLATE FOR 80mm PEDESTAL PLATE FOR 100mm PEDESTAL PLATE FOR 120mm PEDESTAL PLATE FOR 130mm PEDESTAL 91

83 DRAWPLATES & ROLLING MILLS 9. Cavallin Motorized Rolling Mills Single Side: This single side, heavy duty rolling mill is suitable for small to medium sized jewelry workshops. Motors are intermittent duty and can work uninterrupted for up to 15 mins. A forward/reverse switch contributes to operator safety. Speed is variable from 0-16 fpm. Rolls are hardened and tempered alloy steel, to generate rolled forms of flat, square and half-round. A calibrated dial ensures precise size control. RM-098 Double sided, heavy duty production mill guarantees steady pressure and uniform rolled products. Expanded range gives a greater capacity for flat rolled and profile stock for all jewelry workshops. Motors are intermittent duty and can work uninterrupted for up to 15 mins. A forward/reverse switch contributes to operator safety. Speed is variable from 0-16 fpm. Rolls are hardened and tempered steel. A calibrated dial ensures precise size control. RM-098 RM-097 MODEL LMF SINGLE LMF DOUBLE POWER 1HP/110V, 8.5A, 60 Hz 1HP/110V, 8.5A, 60 Hz ROLL(L X D) 120 X 65mm 120 X 65mm FLAT 60 X 5.5mm 120 X 5.5mm SQ. WIRE 7.0-1mm mm HF-ROUND mm - DIMENSION 19 W X 16 D X 20 Ht cm 29 W X 16 D X 20 Ht cm RM Cavallin Floor Model Motorized Rolling Mills Heavy duty production mills for continuous operation suitable for jewelry and industrial manufacturing. Main transmission is by gear reducer immersed in oil bath. Hardened and tempered alloy steel rolls rotate in ample dimensioned bronze bearings that are continuously lubricated through a programmable pump. Indicator dials ensure precise positioning of rolls. Flat rolls are fully protected for operator safety. Electrical system- Machine has an inverter which allows it to be connected to three phase or single phase line. RM-100 RM-101 MODEL SRM-65 SRM-65E POWER 2HP/110V, 8.5A, 60 Hz 1HP/110V, 8.5A, 60 Hz INVERTER THREE-PHASE MOTOR WITH SINGLE CURRENT NO VARIABLE SPEED 0-7m/s NO LUBRICATION SYSTEM AUTOMATIC NO LAMP YES NO ROLL. (L X D) 120 X 65mm 120 X 65mm SQ. WIRE 7.0-1mm 7.0-1mm HF-ROUND mm mm DIMENSION 80W X 55D X 140Ht cm 80W X 55D X 140Ht cm Design Rollers: Available on special order for some Cavallin Mills only. Cavallin Rolling Mills: Spares available on special order. 92

84 11. Draw Plates Die Steel-Italy Premium quality, hardened steel draw plates, with numerous highly polished holes to draw wire down gradually. Always use Bur Lube, as a lubricant to draw smoothly and protect the die plate from frictional heat. DRAWPLATES & ROLLING MILLS SHAPE RANGE HOLES DP-223 ROUND mm 31 DP-235 ROUND mm 31 DP-236 ROUND mm 31 DP /2 ROUND mm 20 DP /2 ROUND mm 20 DP /2 ROUND mm 31 DP-253 SQUARE mm 20 DP-256 SQUARE mm 31 DP-257 OVAL mm 20 DP-258 TRIANGLE mm 20 DP-259 STAR mm Draw Plates Tungsten Carbide- Deluxe Draw plates have mirror finished carbide inserts for drawing extremely bright, super smooth round wire. Wear resistant carbide is ten times longer lasting than die steel. Use Bur Lube to draw with reduced friction. SHAPE RANGE HOLES DP-301 ROUND mm 24 DP-310 ROUND mm 24 DP-320 ROUND mm 36 DP-330 ROUND mm Draw Plates Tungsten Carbide- Econo Specialty draw plates with mirror finished wear resistant carbide inserts. Different shapes - round, square, hexagonal and oval. All sizes clearly marked on the plates. Use Bur Lube to draw with reduced friction. SHAPE RANGE DP-340 ROUND mm DP-341 ROUND mm DP /2 ROUND mm DP-345 SQUARE mm DP-347 SQUARE mm DP-348 SQUARE mm DP-352 HEXAGON mm DP-353 HEXAGON mm DP-355 OVAL mm 14. Bur Lube A carefully formulated compound that provides the optimum balance of cooling and lubrication. Reduces friction and heat build up, thereby extending tool life. Essential to use when drilling, cutting grinding, or drawing. BR-700 BR-701 BR-702 BUR LUBE 2 oz BUR LUBE LIQUID 4 oz BUR LUBE PASTE 4 oz Bur Lube Makes easy! Bur lube liquid makes drawing wire easier. Apply frequently to facilitate drawing and protection of die bore. 93

85 DRAWPLATES & ROLLING MILLS 15. Cavallin Wire Drawing Benches Manually operated to draw wire forms. This heavy duty machine has a gear reduction system that enables continuous traction on a guided rail. Specific draw plates are needed for round, square, half round and other profiles. Draw plates must be ordered separately. DRAW (L X D) RM X 10mm RM X 10mm RM-141 SPARE DRAW CLAMP 16. Draw Tongs- Econo Forged steel tongs have a T handle to enable pulling and exerting leverage when drawing or twisting wire. Broad serrated jaws provide a strong non-slip grip. DT-308 DT-310 LENGTH 8 (200mm) 10 (254mm) 17. Draw Tongs-Deluxe Superior forged steel tongs with a hole in the T handle. Facilitates initial start of the draw operation. Extra broad serrated jaws grip metal firmly. DT-368 DT-370 LENGTH 8 (200mm) 10 (254mm) 18. Draw Tongs with Ring All steel forged, draw tongs with U handle and ring. Especially for use with larger diameter wire forms for pulling, bending or twisting. DT-311 LENGTH 8 (200mm) 19. Lowell Pattern Hand Vise Hollow handle and grooved corrugated jaws that open and close by turning the handle. Securely grips wire ends. Jaw width 1 /2. PV-409 LENGTH 4 3 /4 (120mm) 94

86 DRILLS 1. Jewelers Twist Drills Superior quality twist drills ground to precision tolerances. All with 3 /32 shanks so they can be used with standard flexshaft handpieces. Apply bur lube when drilling for cool cutting and lubrication. Individual sizes available in 6 packs. 3. Jewelers Twist Drills-Set SIZE MM ISO INCH DR-090 5/ DR-091 4/ DR-092 3/ DR-093 2/ DR DR DR DR DR DR DR DR DR DR DR DR DR DR DR High Speed Twist Drills All purpose jobbers drills with super sharp cutting edge to drill all materials including industrial steel. Shank size is the same as the drill size. Ideal for use on all bench and mini drills. Individual sizes available in packs of ten. DORMER IKOHE DRILL SIZE (MM) (IN) DR-050 DR DR-051 DR DR-052 DR DR-053 DR DR-054 DR DR-055 DR DR-056 DR DR-057 DR DR-058 DR DR-059 DR DR-060 DR DR-061 DR DR-062 DR DR-063 DR DR-064 DR DR-065 DR DR-066 DR DR-067 DR DR-068 DR DR-069 DR DR-070 DR DR-071 DR DR-072 DR DR-073 DR DR-074 DR DR-075 DR DR-076 DR DR-077 DR DR-078 DR DR-079 DR DR-080 DR Set of 12 of the most popular sizes, packaged in a durable plastic pouch. Drills have 3 /32 shanks. Size ISO to 016 (0.05 to 1.60 mm) DR-110 DR-019 DR-020 DR-021 DR-082 SET OF 12 TWIST DRILLS 4. High Speed Twist Drill- Set A complete set of 20 drills from size 61 to 80 (0.039 to ). Made of the finest steel and hardened to Rc 63. Precision ground sizes for drilling accurate holes. Choice of different storage cases for easy access and protection. 5. Pearl Drill Set DR-021 SET WITH DOME CASE SET WITH METAL CASE SET WITH PLASTIC CASE SIZE 1.05 TO 3.0mm DR-019 Set of 11 high speed steel drills, all organized on a plastic stand with a protective cover. 96

87 6. Mini Drill Machine A mini bench drill just the right size for all drilling projects. Rugged aluminum housing with slotted base to clamp fixtures. Sturdy vertical column with quick release to adjust chuck to table distance. Selectable speeds with calibrated depth control and positive stop. Ball bearing spindle, 1 /4 drill chuck and key. HO-019 HO-018 SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz DRILLS 7. Drill Press Convert your Foredom flexshaft or any 1 diameter handpiece into a precision drill press. Securely holds the handpiece in a vertical position. Lever operated with depth stop for precise drilling, countersinking or reaming. Drill head and table are adjustable for maximum flexibility. 8. Pearl Holding Vise Center drill pearls accurately without any mar on the surface. Quick clamp and release system. Thirteen cavities accommodate pearls or beads size 2-10mm. HO-022 HO-007 DRILL PRESS DRILLING VISE 9. Pearl Drilling Machine Ultra high precision drill, specifically designed to drill pearls from 3 to 7mm diameter without any chipping or cracking. Unit is compact with motor, speed 6,000 rpm, a drill chuck and self centering vise to automatically hold pearls for center line drilling. Includes collets to hold pearls from 3 to 7mm. Pearl drills must be ordered separately. Dimension 145 x 235 x 122mm. Wt. 4.2 kgs. HO-001 HO-002 SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz 10. Pearl Drills Special profile tungsten vanadium drills for perfect micro-drilling of pearls. Drill points at both ends. Sizes range from 0.6 to 1.5 mm. HO-025 HO-026 HO-027 HO-028 HO-029 HO-030 HO-031 HO-032 SIZE 0.60mm 0.70mm 0.80mm 0.90mm 1.00mm 1.10mm 1.20mm 1.50mm 97

88 DRILLS 12. Poseidon Lathe This mini lathe is one of the finest machines manufactured to ISO 9002 standards. Made in rigid all metal construction for high precision accuracy, the design is streamlined for ease of operation. Features include calibrated hand wheels, adjustable jibs for backlash, ground prismatic bed and a smooth power drive. A high torque motor delivers different spindle speeds to machine most materials. The machine is versatile for all types of work such as turning, milling, drilling, and carving in various materials like metal, wood, plastics and wax. Additional accessories extend the capability for other special operations. 11. Bur Lube A carefully formulated compound that provides the optimum balance of cooling and lubrication. Reduces friction and heat build up, thereby extending tool life. Essential to use when drilling, cutting grinding, or drawing. BR-700 BR-701 BR-702 BUR LUBE 2 oz BUR LUBE LIQUID 4 oz BUR LUBE PASTE 4 oz Specifications. Center height 1.89 Swing over bed 3.78 Distance between centers 7.78 Maximum dia. over cross slide 3.78 Cross slide travel 2.05 Spindle speeds 130-4,000 rpm. Drive motor 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz Poseidon Lathe Accessories Rolling Center: HO-058 ROLLING CENTER Power Feed: HO-059 POWER FEED SPECIFICATION HO V/ 60Hz HO V/ 50Hz Poseidon Lathe Accessories Tool Bits: HO-054 TOOL BITS Top Slide: HO-055 TOP SLIDE Face Plate: HO-056 FACE PLATE Drill Chuck & Adapter- 3 Pcs: HO-057 DRILL CHUCK 98 Collet Holder: HO-060 Collet 10 Pcs Set: HO-061 Set of O-Ring Belt: HO-062 Set Of V-belt: HO-063 COLLET HOLDER COLLET SET O-RING BELT POWER FEED V BELT

89 ENGRAVING 1. Presidium Outside Engraver A manual engraver so easy to operate anyone can get professional results in minutes. Engrave on small objects of jewelry, in any precious metal or plastics. Pantograph ratio from 2 1 /2: 1 to 6:1, a universal vise 360 rotation with 8 index positions, and height adjustment up to 115mm. Slide accomodates 1 1 /4 and 2 3 /4 character blanks. Diamond tip has drag feature to give a bright, highly readable appearance without removing any precious metal. Complete instruction included. 2. Engraving Character Sets Engraving copy scripts are high accuracy characters made by a V groove in bright coated brass. Made of standard 1 1 /4 width blanks, these fonts will fit the machine slides of most manufacturers. Sets of different font styles come neatly organized in a polished wooden box. Individual replacement letters and numbers are available. EN-013 EN-019 EN-012 EN-013 EN-014 EN-019 Double Line Script- 5 /8 LETTER SPECIFICATION ENGRAVER MACHINE DIAMOND TIP BOX FOR TEMPLATES JEWELRY HOLDER SET OF 4 PCS EN Capitals + 56 Lower case + 20 Numerals + 17 Special / Spacers= 140 pcs Largest 2 1 /2:1 Note: Scripts of different fonts and zodiac signs may be ordered separately. Smallest 6:1 Fancy Single Line Script- 5 /8 LETTER EN Capitals + 56 Lower Case + 20 Numerals + 18 Special / Spacers=140 pcs Miniature Single Line Script - 1 /2 LETTER EN Capitals + 56 Lower Case + 20 Numerals + 18 Special / Spacers=140 pcs Largest 2 1 /2:1 Smallest 6:1 3. Zodiac Signs EN SET OF 12 Single Line Script- 5 /8 LETTER EN Capitals + 56 Lower Case + 20 Numerals + 13 Special / Spacers=136 pcs Largest 2 1 /2:1 Largest 2 1 /2:1 Smallest 6:1 Smallest 6:1 Double Line Block- 5 /8 LETTER 104 Capitals + 20 Numerals + 16 Special / Spacers= 140 pcs EN-016 Aquarius Pisces Aries Taurus Gemini Cancer Largest 2 1 /2:1 Smallest 6:1 Leo Virgo Libra Scorpio Sagittarius Capricon 4. Chinese White Apply lightly by brush on surfaces, prior to layout. Wipes away easily. Available in block form and soluble in water. Single Line Block- 5 /8 LETTER EN Capitals + 58 Lower Case + 20 Numerals + 10 Special / Spacers = 134 pcs Largest 2 1 /2:1 Smallest 6:1 Miniature Single Line Block- 1 /4 LETTER 104 Capitals + 20 Numerals + 16 Special / Spacers= 140 pcs EN-010 EN-002 BLOCK-0.35 oz Largest 2 1 /2:1 Smallest 6:1 100

90 5. Inside Ring Engraver Point-of-purchase engraving offers customers complete satisfaction. Bright legible marking that makes every ring a memorable possession. Features include automatic centering of rings, one engraving reversible dial, auto-indexing, pressure and depth regulation. Operating instructions included. EN-022 EN INSIDE RING ENGRAVER DIAMOND TIP EN-023 4mm / 7mm ENGRAVING Dial Templates for Ring Engraver Dial templates with different letter heights and style are interchangeable on the ring engraver. Dial diameter is 118mm and engraving ratio is 1 /5. LETTER HT. EN-023 BLOCK DIAL REVERSIBLE 7 & 4mm EN-024 SCRIPT DIAL ONE SIDE 7mm EN SPECIAL BLOCK 4mm EN STYLUS FOR SPECIAL BLOCK EN-024 EN Presidium Inside Ring Engraver The Presidium inside ring engraver is manufactured to the highest standards with hardened powder-coated paintwork. The machine is compact, user friendly and complete with an engraving diamond tip. Wide ring-holding capacity of sizes from Ø 19 to Ø 30mm. One single template produces letters with height of 1 and 2mm with automatic letter spacing. Includes practice rings and instructions. EN LETTER HT. EN-020 INSIDE RING ENGRAVER EN-086 REVERSIBLE DIAL 9mm / 4mm EN DIAMOND TIP EN-021 SCRIPT DIAL CAPS/LOWER CASE EN-087 REVERSIBLE DIAL SCRIPT 9mm / 4mm EN-086 9mm / 4mm 7. Ringstar Engraver Table-top inside ring manual engraver. Composed text from the copy slide is engraved on the inside of all sizes of rings by a diamond tip. Automatic spacing of characters. Micrometer screw control varies the pressure and the cutting depth of the diamond tip. Character height continuously adjustable from 1-3mm. Includes one script letter set and instructions. EN-028 EN-025 RINGSTAR WITH SCRIPT LETTER SET R5000 EN-035 TEMPLATE RAIL FOR RING STAR EN-036 CLAMPING WIRE FOR RINGSTAR EN-037 DIAMOND TIP- RINGMATIC Template for Elma EN-026 SCRIPT LETTER SET WITH R5000 EN-027 RINGSTAR BLOCK LETTER SET EN-043 ELMA TEMPLATE LETTER NR 3C SCRIPT EN-044 ELMA TEMPLATE LETTER NR 4C BLOCK EN-045 ELMA TEMPLATE LETTER NR 6C SCRIPT EN-029 EN-030 EN-031 EN-032 EN-033 EN

91 ENGRAVING EN Elma Inside/Outside Engraver A top of the line engraver with limitless possibilities. It is the most complete machine, dedicated for jewelry engraving. Engraves all articles of jewelry gold, silver, platinum etc, on outside, inside and flat surfaces. Basic machine includes main frame, work plate, copy slide, letter stretching device, engraving mouse and diamond tip. Other features are predictable pressure on diamond tip and cutter depth and variable letter height adjustment from 0.8 to 6.5mm. Operating instructions included. EN-051 EN-052 EN-048 EN-049 EN-051 EN-052 COMBINATION ENGRAVING MACHINE INSIDE RING ENGRAVER MODEL SHORT CLAMPING ATTACHMENT LONG CLAMPING ATTACHMENT 9. GRS Engraving Block Heavy duty block with thrust bearing mounting for a smooth rotation without any slack. Adjust the block to whichever way you need, to allow working with reduced fatigue. Sliding jaws are operated by a steel screw in a close fitting T slot. Jaws are hardened, extra deep, and accept a set of pins, plates, and clamps to hold varied workpieces. EN-007 EN-008 EN-009 ENGRAVER BLOCK ONLY ACCESSORIES ONLY BLOCK WITH ACCESSORIES 10. JUN-AIR Compressor Sturdy rugged construction, low noise level 40db air compressor. Powerful enough to supply air at 2 cfm/100 PSI to handle all air tools and wax injectors. Features include: 4 gallon tank capacity, adjustable start/stop pressure switch, pressure gauge, thermal overload protector and drain/outlet cock. Dimension 15 L X 15 W X 17 1 /2 Ht. EN-077 EN-078 SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 0.5hp 220V/ 50Hz 0.5hp Maintenance Kits Include: Intake filter, SJ-27 oil and O-ring. EN-079 KIT EN-080 AIR COMPRESSOR OIL 102

92 11. GRS System 3 An affordable impact tool system that uses compressed air. The System 3 is a comfortable, light weight handpiece that machined from heat-treated stainless steel. There are no plastic or cast metal parts. It allows you to engrave, texture, carve and set stones. Use the foot control to start and precisely vary the impact power needed. Deluxe Package Includes handpiece, foot control, air filter-regulator, hand graver handle, 6 quick change tool holders, 8 steel points, 2 gravers and operating instructions. Standard Package Includes handpiece, foot control, air filter-regulator, 3 quick change tool holders, 6 steel points and instructions. ENGRAVING EN-071 EN-072 EN-073 EN-074 EN-075 DELUXE PACKAGE STANDARD PACKAGE HANDPIECE ONLY FOOT CONTROL AIR FILTER REGULATOR 12. GRS GraverMax Experience the ability to perform consistent accurate decorative designs with quality and speed. GraverMax has two different tool powers- IMPACT and ROTARY. The control unit has one outlet connector for two impact handpieces, utilizing a selector switch to choice the impact handpiece desired. Plus an outlet for a rotary handpiece. Includes foot control, four tools and instructions. Requires compressed air 1.4 cfm at 45 psi. minimum. Order handpieces separately. Change tools in seconds witho QC- Quick Change Handpiece. EN-060 EN-061 GRAVERMAX,110V/ 60Hz- without handpiece GRAVERMAX, 220V/ 50Hz- without handpiece Handpieces for GraverMax #710 Handpiece for stone setting, hammering and medium to deep engraving. All stainless steel construction with a quiet rear exhaust. Includes 6-QC holders. #801 Handpiece for all purpose work. Medium power with fine control for engraving and stone setting. Small handy unit with rear exhaust. Includes 3-QC holders. #610 Hammer handpiece of stainless steel, with a wide power range for bead raising, stone setting and deep engraving. Accepts sq. tools max 2.5mm and round 3.3mm. #609 Hammer handpiece uses only threaded hammer tips. Includes one tip. #901 Heat treated stainless steel handpiece with huge power range and fine controls. Ideal for relief work bead raising, setting and engraving. Includes 6-QC holders. EN-065 #901 HAMMER HANDPIECE-66mm LONG 2.6 oz EN-066 #710 HAMMER HANDPIECE-107mm LONG 5.9 oz EN-067 #801 HAMMER HANDPIECE-71mm LONG 4.3 oz EN-068 #609 HAMMER HANDPIECE 114mm LONG 5.5 oz EN-069 #610 HAMMER HANDPIECE-114mm LONG 5.5 oz EN-070 #804 QC HOLDERS SET OF 3 EN-070 EN-065 EN-066 EN-069 EN-068 EN

93 ENGRAVING 13. GRS Diamond Power Hone A portable machine in a steel housing, powered by a continuous duty motor and a double bearing spindle. The GRS Power Hone uses diamond wheels to sharpen hardened steels, high speed steels and carbide. The wheels last for years and stay flat for accuracy. Different grits are available from coarse to fine for mirror polishing. 17. GRS Diamond and Ceramic Wheels EN-100 EN POWER HONE WITH 600 DIA. WHEEL-110V/ 60Hz 1543 POWER HONE WITH 600 DIA. WHEEL-220V/ 50Hz 14. GRS Dual Angle Sharpening System The complete system includes Power Hone, Quick Wheel Change Adapter, 260 and 600) grit Diamond Wheels, Ceramic Lap, Diamond spray 1 /4 micron Diamond Spary, Dual Angle Sharpening Fixture and Wheel Storage Rack. EN-102 EN GRS Dual Angle Fixture Only A fixture that holds a wider variety of tools and adjusts to more angles than the standard fixture. With two degree dials, you can set the elevation angle and the rotation angle of each tool. The fixture holds tools with or without handles and even those in QC holders. EN-104 EN DUAL ANGLE FIXTURE WITH POST 3571 DUAL ANGLE FIXTURE HEAD ONLY 16. GRS Q/Change Sharpening Fixture Insert the tool with its QC holder into the front of this fixture and sharpen. It has two degree dials, plus a unique detent system that makes sharpening faster and easier. EN-106 EN COMPLETE DUAL ANGLE SYSTEM-110V/ 60Hz 3572 COMPLETE DUAL ANGLE SYSTEM-220V/ 50Hz 3580 QUICK CHANGE SHARPENING WITH POST 3581 QUICK CHANGE SHARPENING HEAD ONLY EN-108 EN-109 EN-110 EN-111 EN-112 EN-113 DIAMOND WHEEL 5 DIA. 260 GRIT C DIAMOND WHEEL 5 DIA. 600 GRIT M DIAMOND WHEEL 5 DIA GRIT F CERAMIC LAP 6 DIA.-USE WITH DIAMOND SPRAY DIAMOND SPRAY 1 /2 MICRON FINE 1838 QUICK WHEEL CHANGE ADAPTER 18. GRS GlenSteel Gravers Made of special High Speed Steel (cobalt free). Fits all GRS impact handpieces and QC Holder. EN-114 EN-115 EN-116 A1-SQUARE A2-FLAT A3-BLANK 19. GRS Tungsten Carbide Gravers These last ten times longer between sharpening, when properly used. They are harder than any tool steel, but more brittle. Always sharpen these tools on a diamond wheel. EN-117 EN-118 B1-SQUARE B2-BLANK 20. GRS Hard Steel Points Use to make punches, hammer tool, bead raises, stipple points and more. EN-119 EN-120 EN-121 DIA. X LEN C1-1.8 X 38mm C2-3.3 X 76mm C3-3.1 X 38mm 21. Beading Tool Sets Concave tip that puts beads on prongs to secure stones in mountings. Set of 12 from #5-16 (0.5 to 1.05mm). Set of 24 from #0-22 (0.5 to 1.35mm). All on plastic stands with a handle. BD PCS. BD PCS. BD-630 BEADING TOOL HOLDER

94 FILES 1. Swiss Precision Files High precision durable files, manufactured from chrome alloy steel and heat treated by a special process to guarantee sharper teeth for outstanding cutting performance on all hard and soft metals, including platinum. File measurement is from the point to where the teeth end. All files are in 6 lengths. X-COARSE COARSE MEDIUM SMOOTH FINE X-FINE CUT #00 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 TEETH PER INCH A B BARRETTE A: 23 /32 /16mm B: 5 /32 /4.0mm CUT #00 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 FL-199 FL-200 FL-201 FL FL-203 HALF ROUND A: 19 /32 /16mm B: 3 /16 /4.8mm CUT #00 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 FL-208 FL-209 FL-210 FL-211 FL-213 FL-212 HALF ROUND RING A: 19 /32 /16mm B: 3 /16 /4.8mm CUT #00 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 FL-218 FL-219 FL-220 FL FL THREE SQUARE B: 5 /16 / 8mm CUT #00 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 FL FL FL-232 HAND A: 3 /4 /19mm B: 5 /32 /4.0mm CUT #00 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 FL-238 FL-239 FL-240 FL FL-242 ROUND TAPERED Diameter: 1 /4 /6.0mm CUT #00 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 FL FL FL-252 SQUARE A: 5 /16 /8mm CUT #00 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 FL FL FL-256 KNIFE EDGE A: 23 /32 /18mm B: 5 /32 /4.0mm CUT #00 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 FL FL FL

95 FILES 2. Needle Files- with Round Knurled Handles-Swiss Precision needle files for miniature work, made of the finest chrome steel, hardened and tempered to ensure efficient cutting. Knurled handle provides a firm grip. BARRETTE CUT #00 #0 #2 #4 #6 16CM(6 1 /4 ) FL-090 FL-100 FL-101 FL-102 FL CM(7 3 /4 ) - FL-169 FL-170 FL-171 FL-172 EQUALLING CUT #00 #0 #2 #4 #6 16CM(6 1 /4 ) FL-116 FL-117 FL-118 FL-119 FL CM(7 3 /4 ) - FL-173 FL-174 FL HALF ROUND CUT #00 #0 #2 #4 #6 16cm(6 1 /4 ) FL-131 FL-132 FL-133 FL-134 FL cm(7 3 /4 ) - FL-177 FL-178 FL CUT #00 #0 #2 #4 #6 16cm(6 1 /4 ) FL-148 FL-149 FL-150 FL-151 FL cm(7 3 /4 ) - FL-180 FL-181 FL-182 FL-183 ROUND 16cm(6 1 /4 ) 20cm(7 3 /4 ) THREE SQUARE CUT #00 #0 #2 #4 #6 16cm(6 1 /4 ) FL FL-153 FL-154 FL-155 FL cm(7 3 /4 ) - FL-184 FL-186 FL-187 FL-188 SQUARE CUT #00 #0 #2 #4 #6 16cm(6 1 /4 ) FL FL-157 FL-158 FL-159 FL cm(7 3 /4 ) - FL-188 FL-189 FL-190 FL-191 CROSSING CUT #00 #0 #2 #4 #6 16cm(6 1 /4 ) - FL-161 FL-162 FL-163 FL cm(7 3 /4 ) - FL-192 FL-193 FL-194 FL KNIFE CUT #00 #0 #2 #4 16cm(6 1 /4 ) FL FL-165 FL-166 FL cm(7 3 /4 ) FL FL-195 FL-196 FL

96 FILES 3. Needle File Sets Set of 12 needle files made of the finest chrome steel and heat treated to give twice the cutting power. Indispensable for use in detailing delicate designs. 6. Needle Files- German Precisely graded needle files in the most popular shapes of half round, barrette, three square, equalling round and square files. Set of 6 pcs in 160mm length. FL-016 FL M Diamond Files LENGTH 16cm 20cm Diamond files can smooth finish all precious metal, glass, ceramic and stone. Four different grit sizes. Size 1 /2 X 1 3 /4. CUT COLOR FL-023 #2 YELLOW FL-024 #3 RED FL-025 #4 BLUE 7. Diamond Needle Files Made of virgin diamond particles electroplated on high precision steel blanks. Comfortable handles provide maximum strength, flexibility and durability. Overall length 5 1 /2. MICRON COLOR GRIT FL BLACK 120 FL RED 200 FL YELLOW 400 FL WHITE Wax File Set Set of 6 most popular shapes. Teeth will not clog with wax or plastic. Shapes include equaling, flat, half-round, round, square and three square. Overall length Wax Files Flat Hand FL-080 FL-081 FL-082 FL-083 FL-084 FL-085 THREE-SQUARE PILLAR HALF-ROUND ROUND SQUARE SET OF 5 PCS. Truly the best file for every wax modeler. Special tooth form resists wax loading into teeth. FL-006 WAX FILE SET OF 6 PCS. 9. Double-End Vulcanite Files FL-003 PLASTIC HANDLE-8 1 /4 FL-004 WOOD HANDLE-10 Double end wax files have tooth forms specially designed for use on wax, plastics and other soft materials. One file combines both coarse and fine cuts. FL-001 FL VULCANITE FILE-DELUXE 8 VULCANITE FILE- ECONOMY 108

97 10. Escapement Files Made of chrome alloy steel. These square handle files of different shapes from coarse to fine grades, are suitable for every type of miniature sculpting. Also available in sets. Overall length 5 1 /2-14cm. FILES BARRETTE CUT FL-030 #0 FL-031 #2 FL-032 #3 FL-033 #4 CROSSING CUT FL-034 #2 FL-035 #4 HALF ROUND CUT FL-041 #0 FL-042 #2 FL-043 #3 FL-044 #4 ROUND CUT FL-046 #0 FL-047 #2 FL-048 #3 FL-049 #4 PILLAR CUT FL-037 #2 FL-038 #3 FL-039 #4 SQUARE CUT FL-054 #0 FL-055 #2 FL-056 #4 11. File Handles THREE SQUARE CUT FL-059 #0 FL-060 #2 FL-061 #3 FL-062 #4 KNIFE CUT FL-051 #2 FL-052 #4 Screw Head Handle: Holds files securely. Handle has a comfortable non-slip grip for files from 6-8. Needle File Handle: This file handle clamps tools with a vise-likegrip. Suitable for holding needle files, scrapers, small drills and gravers. Overall length 3 3 /4. Wood Handle: Made of seasoned wood with a brass collar, these durable file handles are round and smooth all over. Assorted Escapement Files Assorted shapes in three different cuts. Pillar shape is not included in the sets. CUT SET FL-007 #2 12 PCS FL-008 #4 12 PCS FL-009 #6 12 PCS FL-010 FL-011 FL-010 FL-011 FL-012 FL-013 FL-014 FILE HANDLE-ALUMINUM FILE HANDLE- 3 1 /2 PVC PUSH GRIP HANDLE 3-4mm PUSH GRIP HANDLE 2-3mm WOOD HANDLE WITH BRASS COLLET FL-012 FL-013 FL File Cleaner Steel bristle, mounted in a shaped wooden handle, used for cleaning debris from clogged file teeth. FC-001 FILE CLEANER 109

98 FILES 13. Valtitan Files- Swiss The hardest files known Rc72, made from graded alloy steel, heat treated, tempered and corrosion resistant. Use on all metals, including platinum. Unique tooth form eliminates clogging. All shapes and cuts are available. File length 6 /150mm and 7 /180mm. Length 6-150mm CUT #00 #0 #2 #4 HAND CHECKING FL-310 FL-312 FL-317 FL-322 HALF RND RING FL-313 FL-318 FL-323 HALF RND - FL-314 FL-319 FL-324 BARRETTE FL-311 FL-315 FL-320 FL-325 THREE SQUARE - FL-316 FL-321 FL-326 Length 7-180mm CUT #00 #0 #2 #4 ROUND FL-330 FL-332 FL-338 FL-344 SQUARE - FL-333 FL-339 FL-345 THREE SQUARE - FL-334 FL-340 FL-346 HALF RND - FL-335 FL-341 FL-347 PILLAR - FL-336 FL-342 FL-348 BARRETTE FL-331 FL-337 FL-343 FL

99 FLEXSHAFTS 1. CC Series Foredom Motors The most popular system. Complete and affordable by every jeweler. Allows extensive applications for grinding, carving, drilling, deburring and engraving. A well balanced 1 /10 hp ball bearing motor with a variable speed range up to 18,000 rpm. A 39 flex shaft with Foredom #30 handpiece and Jacobs chuck that accepts all tools with 0-5 /32 shanks. Motor speed variation from low to high is by a solid state electronic foot control. MO-104 CC MODEL WITH CFL V MO-106 CC MODEL WITH CFL V MO-108 CC MODEL WITH CFL-15110V -#30 H/PIECE MO-110 CC MODEL WITH CFL V -#30 H/PIECE MO-112 CC MODEL WITH FCT-2 220V-#30 H/PIECE 2. S Series Foredom Motors Select this model for complete versatility and dependable power capability. Full torque by a 1 /8 hp. ball bearing motor that will not stall at any speed up to 18,000 rpm. A 39 flexshaft with a quick detach feature accepts all Foredom handpieces, except H series. Handpiece #30 with Jacobs chuck holds all accessories with 0-5 /32 shanks. Use mounted points, bristle brushes, sanding drums and much more for finishing all types of metals. Includes Foredom solid state foot control for speed regulation. 3. Red Wing Motors MO-115 MO-116 MO-119 MO-120 S MODEL WITH FCT-1 110V S MODEL WITH SCT-1 110V S MODEL WITH FCT-2 220V S MODEL WITH SCT-2 220V The Red Wing Flex 1 /8 hp motor delivers more power at low rpms and high rpm s than any other standard motor. The newly designed motor delivers more torque and power with less noise and runs cool longer for better performance. The flexible shaft double wound construction runs smooth and cool without memory providing maximum performance and a much longer life than single wound flexible shafts on the market today. The Red Wing is ideal for variety of applications: grinding, engraving, de-burring, polishing and finishing. The flex shaft accepts most standard handpieces. Complete set includes motor with shaft/sheath and foot control. MO-201 MO-202 MO-203 MO-204 MO-205 MO-206 MO-207 MO-208 COMPLETE SET -110V/ 60Hz COMPLETE SET- 220V/ 50Hz MOTOR WITH SHAFT/SHEATH 110V/ 60Hz MOTOR WITH SHAFT/SHEATH 220V/ 50Hz FOOT CONTROL 110V/ 60Hz FOOT CONTROL 220V/ 50Hz SHEATH SHAFT 4. Flexible Shaft Motors An all purpose, versatile, unit that is the key to all model making, die finishing, wood carving, engraving and polishing. Hang up version, with 1 /10 hp ball bearing motor, variable speed range 0-18,000 rpm. Complete set includes motor, handpiece and foot control. Spares for Gems Motor MO-310 COMPLETE SET -110V MO-311 COMPLETE SET -220V MO-320 MOTOR 110V -W/O H/PIECE MO-321 MOTOR 220V -W/O H/PIECE MO-143 MO-147 SHAFT- INNER SHEATH- OUTER 112

100 5. Micro-Motors These two Micro-Motors, Microlab 350 and Gempower are very simple and economical motor driven handpieces. One of the best engineered tools for freehand. They are great for model makers, stone setters, cleaning, polishing of casting. Both have forward and reverse control with dual voltage 110/220V. FLEXSHAFTS Microlab 350 is more economical. It comes with Tech 2000 handpiece 0-35,000 rpm heavy duty, precision machined and balanced drive shaft, cooling fan built into motor, and quick release handpiece. Speed is controlled from the speed dial. MO-008 MICROLAB 350 WITH CONTROL BOX MO-009 TECH 2000 HANDPIECE MO-010 COLLET CHUCK 1 /8 MO-011 COLLET CHUCK 3mm Gempower can be used especially with diamond flywheels for easy and fast cutting. Comes with Gempower handpiece. The handpiece is vibration free and has built-in ball bearings. Features superior torque and speed control. Speed can be controlled by the speed dial in the hand operated mode or through a variable speed foot pedal. Comes with 3mm chuck. MO-012 GEMPOWER WITH CONTROL BOX MO-013 GEMPOWER HANDPIECE MO-010 COLLET CHUCK 1 /8 MO-015 COLLET CHUCK 3 /32 6. Z500 Motor Compact lightweight table model designed for high productive performance and overall excellence. A microcomputer integrated controller precisely sets the speed for optimum cutting and polishing of a variety of materials. Motor handpiece delivers excellent torque with smooth, quiet vibration free operation. The control panel has a digital display with variable speed from 1,000-50,000 rpm. Standard Package Includes: Control Unit Z500SB Motor Handpiece UM50T Foot Pedal FC-40 Collet Chucks (Ø 3 & Ø 2.35 mm) MO-290 MO-291 MO Electer E-max Multi-purpose ultra-precision micro-grinder includes higher user-friendliness. Provides a digital display, a built in switch on the handle and innovative vertical tower case which allows less footprint. This is the successor to the outstanding performance of ELECTER-GX, a grinder that has gained a high reputation among precision users over many years. Specifications: Rotation Speed: 1,000-35,000 rpm Power Source: 100V/ 50-60Hz Power Consumption: 30W Output Power: 71W Maximum Torque: 4.1N cm Standard Package Includes: Control Unit Motor Attachment Collet Chucks (Ø 3 & Ø 2.35 mm) Handpiece stand Handpiece Holder Spanner (7 X 5.1mm) Pin spanner MO-300 STANDARD PACKAGE MOTOR HANDPIECE UM50T FOOT PEDAL FC-40 STANDARD PACKAGE 113

101 FLEXSHAFTS 8. No.30 & 330 Handpiece General purpose, continuous duty handpiece. One piece, light weight metal body, with permanently sealed ball bearings that requires no lubrication. Protected Jacobs 3 jaw chuck to grip all tools with straight shanks up to 5 /32. Includes chuck key. MO-162 FOREDOM HANDPIECE #30 MO-163 GEMS HANDPIECE #30 9. Foredom No.35 Handpiece The ideal handpiece for diamond fly tools and carbide points. Speed up to 35,000 rpm, with a planetary drive, from a motor speed of maximum 12,000 rpm. Single piece construction, with double shield, pre-lubricated ball bearings. Includes 1 /8 collet with wrench. Collets for other sizes are available. MO-165 #35 HANDPIECE 10. Foredom Hammer Handpiece No 15 & 15D A precision made affordable handpiece for stone setters. Create textures, florentine, set stones in channels, close bezels and prongs. Adjustable 5,000 stroke per minute with an impact hammer action. Uses screw style tools, diamond pave and carbide points. MO-172 #15 MO-173 #15D WITH DUPLEX SPRING 11. Foredom Quick Change No 18 & 18D (Duplex) Impressive handpiece for the stone setter that has applications involving numerous tool changes. Quiet continuous operation, pre-loaded lubricated ball bearings and a rapid lock/release lever for tools with 3 /32 shanks. MO-160 #18D WITH DUPLEX SPRING MO-161 # Badeco Rotary Handpiece A high precision handpiece, ergonomically styled for long periods of hand carving, grinding and finishing. Quiet, vibration free model, with three super precision bearings to achieve a maximum speed up to 18,000 rpm. Ingenious clamping and unclamping of tools by only a quarter turn of the body, eliminates the use of keys or spanners. Unit is complete with 3 /32 collet. MO-435/MO-436 MO-437 MO Badeco Hammer Handpiece MO-158 MODEL -437 MO-159 MODEL-437 WITH DUPLEX SPRING Dependable striking force makes this handpiece the #1 choice of the professional stone setter. Close bezels and prongs, design pave, texture and florentine. The duplex spring system offers complete maneuverability. Working speed 12,000 strokes per minute. MO-439 AW-031 MO-170 MO-171 MO-435 MO-436 MO-437 MO-438 MO-439 AW-031 NORMAL STROKE-217 STRONG STROKE-222 HAMMER TIP- 0.5mm ROUND HAMMER TIP- 1mm ROUND HAMMER TIP- 1mm SQUARE HAMMER TIP- 0.5 X 1mm OVAL SET OF 9 TIPS DELUXE LASER POINT 114

102 14. Faro Handpieces Light weight one piece body with permanently lubricated, double sealed ball bearings. Quick tool change system provides real time savings. Comes with or without duplex connector and one 3 /32 collet. MO-155 HANDPIECE STANDARD MODEL MO-156 H/PIECE WITH DUPLEX SPRING MO-157 DUPLEX CONNECTION 15. Faro Hammer Handpiece Premium quality, custom engineered, this handpiece works with an impressive power and high accuracy to perform all diamond pave, texturing and various stone setting operations. Features a sealed ball bearing assembly with a quick tool change system for 3 /32 shanks. FLEXSHAFTS MO-175 FARO HAMMER 16. #40 Handpieces-Italy- Quick Change Precision machined, handpiece of superior quality and durability, for increased production. Slim style, permanently sealed ball bearings, adapts to all grinding, cutting and polishing needs. Flip type lever for a rapid tool change suitable for 3 /32 shanks. 17. Rotary Air Grinder Handpiece A vibration free air powered light weight tool, with a low noise level at the top speed of 80,000 rpm. Handpiece has built-in rotary air vane motor and collet to hold 1 /8 shank tools. Slim design affords a comfortable finger tip control. Effective for aggressive roughing, light to medium finishing and super finishing on all metals. Requires compressed air, filter, lubricator, regulator and 1 /8 NPT coupler with hose. MO-350 ROTARY AIR GRINDER MO-351 SPARE COLLET 1 /8 MO-352 SPARE COLLET 3 /32 MO-353 SPARE COLLET 3mm MO-354 REPLACEMENT HOSE Carbon Foot Control -CFL-15 A reliable carbon rheostat foot control housed in a metal body. Continuous speed variation for Foredom motors type CC & S MO-138 MO-139 MO-166 MO-167 CFL /110V/ 60Hz CFL /220V/ 50Hz HANDPIECE STANDARD MODEL Q40 HANDPIECE DUPLEX MODEL 40D 20. Electronic Foot Control -FCT Solid state, foot operated control in a high impact plastic housing, with skid resistant base. Positive continuous range of speeds from low to high. Suitable for all Foredom motors type CC & S. MO-134 MO-135 FCT-1 /110V/ 60Hz FCT-2 /220V/ 50Hz 19. Electronic Foot Control -SCT Wide base design, non-slip floor grip, speed controller in a metal body. Dependable solid state circuitry for continuous speed variation of Foredom Motors type CC & S. MO-136 MO-137 SCT-1 /110V/ 60Hz SCT-2 /220V/ 50Hz 21. Electronic Foot Control -FCR High impact plastic body with advanced solid state circuitry, has an built-in feed back to provide full torque at low speeds. Low profile, wide body with non-slip base. May be used with Gems motors. MO-140 MO-141 FCR-1 110V/ 60Hz FCR-2 /220V/ 50Hz 115

103 FLEXSHAFTS 22. Pneumatic Air Scribe Combine air power (less than 1 cfm) with the Scribe and you have the flexibility to write on a variety of materials, even hardened steel. Super sharp carbide stylus will legibly mark all layouts, designs, and details with flawless accuracy. All that is needed is the addition of a clean air connection with a filter/lubricator/regulator. Comes with 8 reinforced hose. MO-408 MO-409 MO-411 MO-412 MO-413 MO-414 MO-415 MO-416 MO-417 AIR SCRIBE TOOL COMPLETE SPARE DIAMOND TIP HOSE ASSEMBLY STYLUS ASSEMBLY AIR FOOT CONTROL REPAIR O-RING KIT CHISEL ASSEMBLY REPAIR TOOLS DRIFT & HOLDER AIR FILTER ASSEMBLY FOR MO Motor Brushes MO-593 MO-594 BRUSHES FOR CC BRUSHES FOR S 24. Chuck Adapters An accessory for holding small diameter tools. Adapter shank fits 3 /32 quick release handpieces. Do not use with speeds higher than 10,000 rpm. 26. Foredom Spares Foredom kit, inner shafts and outer sheaths. Use for motors type CC, S & EE. MO-143 INNER SHAFT-CC & S #93 MO-144 INNER SHAFT-EE #96A MO-147 OUTER SHEATH-CC & S #77 MO-148 OUTER SHEATH-EE #80 MO-150 MO-595 MO-598 FOREDOM REPAIR KIT HANDPIECE GRIP ARMATURE CC 220V 28. Motor Hangers Sturdy, steel arm motor stand that attaches firmly to your bench top with three screws. Adjustable height to suit all working positions. MS-100 FIXED TYPE MS-101 SINGLE-ADJUSTABLE MS-102 DOUBLE-ADJUSTABLE Chuck Keys Two different types of chuck keys to fits Jacobs chuck 0-5 / Duplex Connections MO-405 MO mm- SMALL MO-406 MO mm- MEDIUM MO mm- LARGE 30. Lubricants CHUCK KEY WITH HANDLE CHUCK KEY 25. Connector Metal body accessory that screws on to the end of Foredom motors and secures the flexshaft with a positive lock. MO-200 CONNECTOR MO-157 MO MO MO MO MO MO MO DUPLEX COMPLETE SET DUPLEX AXLE COLLAR SCREW SLOTTED SHAFT QD SLEEVES COLLAR INNER SPRING OUTER SPRING COVER Specifically formulated oil and grease, ensures hours of trouble free performance for motors and flexshafts. MO-596 MO-597 OIL (HYPODERMIC) GREASE (1 oz TUBE) 116

104 GAUGES 1. Sliding Gauges Convenient pocket sized sliding gauges in alloy, brass and plastic. Clear machine divided graduations. Useful for quick outside measurements in in/mm of small parts or stones. 6. Digimatic Caliper An innovation in electronic measuring, this caliper uses high efficiency sensor technology. Engineered in hardened stainless steel for stability and durability. Features a digital readout in both inch/metric, resolution /0.01mm, with hold and zero functions. Additional hold down screw locks the jaw in position. Inside, outside and depth readings are possible. GM-204 GM-205 GM-206 GM Steel Vernier Caliper A general purpose stainless steel vernier, with smooth sliding jaws, calibrated in both inch and metric measurements. Three way readings are possible: inside, outside and depth. Resolution 0.01mm. GM Hi-Impact Dial Caliper ALLOY 50mm- GERMAN PLASTIC 80mm- SWISS BRASS 60mm BRASS 80mm STEEL VERNIER-6 Made of high impact nylon, its lightweight elegant design makes it a real convenience for a variety of general applications. Features an accurate dial reading display in/mm. 7. Mitutoyo Plastic Caliper An affordable digital vernier made in tough reinforced fiberglass. Exclusive thumb grip sliding jaw for rapid reading digital display. For inside or outside measurements in either inch or metric readings. Includes a zero reset function. Resolution 0.1mm. 8. Micrometer GM-211 GM-212 GM-213 GM-209 DIGIMATIC 6 -MITUTOYO DIGIMATIC 4 -MITUTOYO DIGIMATIC 6 -ECONOMY DIGIMATIC 4 -ECONOMY GM-215 MITUTOYO CALIPER 6 An outside micrometer of the finest quality with a measuring range in inch and mm. Distinct figures and graduations on a non glare background permits easy reading. Measuring faces are hardened and precision ground. Friction thimble and positive lock lever ensures reliable measurements. GM Presidium Digital Caliper HI-IMPACT NYLON Made of light weight carbon-fiber the Presidium Digital Caliper provides strength, durability and precise measurement. Features direct digital readout with solid state electronics, automatic power off, instant conversion from metric to inch, resolution 0.05mm or Quick Mini Digital Gauge GM-225 MICROMETER 0-25mm GM-230 MICROMETER 0-1 An ingenious measuring device designed and crafted to the most exacting standards. Lightweight, ergonomic body, with large measuring faces, useful for both thin and thick parts. Clear digital readout with a maximum capacity 25mm/1 and a resolution of 0.01mm/ Digital Gauge CAPACITY GM mm/ 0-6 A high precision palm sized digital gauge, with a super smooth sliding anvil. Gives a clear digital display in both inch or metric readings. Includes a zero re-set button. Maximum reading 15mm GM-521 DIGITAL GAUGE 25mm 118 GM-520 POCKET DIGITAL GAUGE For Leveridge Gauges see page 87

105 10. Flexible Ruler Indispensable for general layout work, these flexible stainless steel rulers have micro fine etched graduations that will not wear away. Markings in inches and millimeters, by 1 /64 and 0.5mm. 14. Degree Gauges- French GAUGES High precision degree gauges superbly constructed in extra fine quality steel, with black etched graduations on a glare free surface ensure accurate readings. The combination degree gauge measures in both millimeters and lignes. Range 15mm and 6 lignes. 6 1 /2 in length. GM-701 S.S RULER 11. Starrett Dividers with Round Legs Highly polished dividers made of spring steel with hardened, tempered and well balanced round legs. Floating washer and thumb screw permit fast and positive adjustment. GM-301 GM-302 SINGLE- 1 /10mm COMBINATION GM ROUND LEGS 15. Moe Type Degree Gauge A convenient way for quick estimates of carat weight without the need to remove stones from their settings. Measurement of the girdle diameter with a cross reference chart indicates weight. 12. Dividers with Square Legs Heavy duty hardened and tempered steel with square legs that will not flex or bend. Sturdy spring pivot and a centrally located fine adjustment screw ensures precise setting over the entire range. GM-299 DEGREE GAUGE 16. Degree Gauges -German Precision degree gauges in stainless steel with contrasting brass indices to enhance readability. Superior construction with return spring action ensures perfect accuracy. GM-236 GM-237 GM-238 GM Pocket Degree Gauges 4 SQUARE LEGS 3 SQUARE LEGS 3 WITH REPLACEABLE POINTS SPARE POINTS FOR GM-238 Lightweight, sensitive, smaller than conventional gauge for measurements up to 10mm. Made of stainless steel with easy to read indices. Wax gauge comes with rounded points 4 in length. 17. Bracelet Gauge GM mm / 0.1mm -SMALL 4 GM mm / 0.1mm -LARGE 6 1 /2 An economical strap type gauge that easily adjusts to measure bracelets or other wrist jewelry. Clear legible markings in 1 /4 increments. Measures circumference in inches from 5 to 9. GM-297 GM-298 DEGREE GAUGE FOR WAX DEGREE GAUGE FOR STEEL GM-307 BRACELET GAUGE 119

106 GAUGES 18. Standard Flat Bands Convenient, easy to use, accurate US standard sizes # 1-15 including half sizes. Each band is clearly marked and colored for easy reading. 22. Jumbo Finger Sizer A set of five larger than ordinary ring sizers made in polished nickel plated brass. Sizes include 14, 14 1 /2, 15, 15 1 /2 & 16. GM Deluxe Ring Sizer STANDARD FLAT BANDS- USA A customer-friendly way to check ring sizes. All individually calibrated, together with a universal ring stick, displayed in an attractive storage box. Includes a conversion chart for American, English, and French sizes. GM Half Round Finger Sizer JUMBO FINGER SIZER Extremely comfortable for measurements, the inside of these ring sizers are half round to facilitate easy on and easy off. Includes US standard sizes #1-13 with half sizes, clearly marked and colored for easy reading. GM-002 GM-003 WIDE BAND REGULAR 20. Wide Band Finger Sizer A complete set of wide band ring sizers in bright nickel plated brass, each individually smooth finished. Sizes #1-15 including half sizes. Ideal for wedding band ring measurements. GM Steel Bracelet Mandrels with Tang HALF ROUND FINGER SIZER Shape, stretch or form bracelets using these tough polished cast iron mandrels. Available in round or oval forms, stepped or tapered all with 1 1 /2 tangs for holding in a vise. GM Plastic Finger Sizer WIDE BAND FINGER SIZER An economical version of ring sizers in plastic, # 1-13 with half sizes. Useful to give customers for measurement at home. GM-005 PLASTIC FINGER SIZER Stepped SHAPE SIZE MD-015 OVAL MD-020 ROUND Tapered SHAPE SIZE MD-021 OVAL MD-022 ROUND 120

107 25. Jumbo Steel Ring Mandrel This extra large size mandrel accommodates sizes 16 to 24 in 1 /4 size increments. It is provided with a knurled hand grip and is practical for use on custom designed jewelry. Overall length Plastic Ring Stick GAUGES Made of hard plastic, this ring stick provides precise and accurate measurements. Markings are legible and indicate sizes #1-15 in 1 /4 size increments. GM Universal Ring Stick JUMBO STEEL MANDREL A ring stick fashioned from lightweight aluminum with an integral handle. Measures in US and European ring sizes and shows both diameter and circumference in millimeters. Calibrated in US sizes #2-15 in 1 /4 size increments. GM-105 GROOVED 30. Steel Ring Mandrels These hardened and polished steel mandrels are especially useful for shaping and forming rings. Accommodates all ring sizes #1-15 in 1 /4 size increments. GM-100 REGULAR 27. Aluminum Ring Sticks A durable, economical solid aluminum ring stick in two versions, regular or grooved for stone set rings. Measures # 1-15 in 1 /4 size increments. GM-106 GM-107 REGULAR GROOVED 31. Ring Sticks Hollow Elegantly finished, tubular nickel plated ring stick is extra lightweight and provided with a shaped redwood handle for comfort. Ideal for wax working as the hollow tube does not retain heat. The grooved style is for measuring stone set rings. Measures sizes #1-15 in 1 /4 size increments. GM-101 GM Bezel Mandrels REGULAR GROOVED Quite simply, the fast way to form bezels in different shapes. May also be used to make decorative wire forms. These mandrels are made of case hardened steel, precision finished and polished. Mandrel portion is approx. 8 long with a 1 /2 to 1 /8 taper. GM-103 GM-104 REGULAR GROOVED 32. Wire Steel Gauge Made of heavy gauge hardened and tempered steel and useful for measuring all wire and sheets of ferrous or non-ferrous metal. Calibrated in gauge numbers as well as decimals. SHAPE LENGTH GM-108 SQUARE 11 GM-109 ROUND 8 GM-110 TRIANGLE 11 GM-111 OVAL 11 GM-112 RECTANGLE 11 GM-113 ROUND 11 GM-390 WIRE STEEL GAUGE- USA 121

108 GAUGES 33. Jo-Di Gauge Unique international sizing system. Measures diameter and width of four basic shapes: round, marquise, emerald and pear. High contrast black anodized scale readings are to be compared with the reference booklet. Comes in a handy wallet. 37. Accurate Diamond Gauge Pocket sized, aluminum gauge, provides the comparative size of gemstones in carats. Size range is 1 point to 2.1 carats. Estimates round, brilliant cuts and baguettes. GM-402 ACCURATE DIAMOND GAUGE GM Diamond/Pearl Gauge JO-DI GAUGE An efficient, accurate plastic gauge for determining the size of loose or mounted stones when other methods are unavailable. Clearly marked numbers provide instant estimates. 38. K & B Diamond Gauge Flat, tempered aluminum pocket gauge measures loose or mounted stones ranging from three points to 4 carats. Handy birthstone chart is imprinted on the reverse. GM-601 K & B DIAMOND GAUGE 35. Baker Gauge GM-403 DIAMOND/PEARL GAUGE The holes in this gauge are used to measure stones and the extensions are used to measure mountings. Gauge has millimeter and carat measurements. 39. Diamond Gauge Polished steel gauge, in either oval or rectangular shape. Determines the carat weight of loose or mounted stones, from 1 point to 4 carats. Embossed marked sizes for easy reading. GM Pearl & Stone Dial Gauges BAKER GAUGE An elegant, sensitive, precision engineered dial gauge for accurate measurements of pearls and other small stones. Parallel ground measuring faces for rounds and baguettes in 0.1mm increments up to a maximum of 10mm. Dial rotates for absolute zero setting. 40. Fan Type Diamond Gauges SHAPE SIZE GM-305 OVAL 5cm GM-306 RECTANGLE 9 X 2.5cm Compact, fan type, pocket gauge in stainless steel. Overall 3 1 /2 length. Measures in carat weight all stone cuts in brilliant, marquise, pear, square, emerald and oval. 122 GM-501 GM-502 GM-503 GM mm mm mm ECONOMY mm ECONOMY FAN CARAT GM TO 4 GM TO 6 GM TO 7

109 GRAVERS 1. Muller Gravers High Speed: These gravers hold an edge up to five times longer than carbon steel gravers. Preferred for use on silver, gold, platinum and steel. May be modified for use with power assisted engraving systems. Carbon Steel: Made of high grade steel. Suitable for use on metals such as copper, silver, gold and other alloys. 3 4 CARBON HIGH SIZE STEEL SPEED 3/0 GH-001 GH-123 2/0 GH-002 GH GH-003 GH GH-004 GH GH-005 GH GH-006 GH GH-007 GH GH-008 GH GH ONGLETTE ROUND CARBON HIGH SIZE STEEL SPEED 50 GH-017 GH GH-018 GH GH-019 GH GH-020 GH GH-021 GH GH-022 GH GH-023 GH GH-024 GH GH-025 GH GH-026 GH-146 CARBON HIGH SIZE STEEL SPEED 36 GH-034 GH GH-035 GH GH-036 GH GH-037 GH GH-038 GH GH-039 GH GH-040 GH GH-041 GH GH-042 GH GH-043 GH GH FLAT KNIFE CARBON HIGH SIZE STEEL SPEED 0 GH-011 GH GH-012 GH GH-013 GH GH-014 GH GH-015 GH-136 CARBON HIGH SIZE STEEL SPEED 0 GH-063 GH GH-064 GH GH-065 GH GH-066 GH GH GH BEVEL SQUARE CARBON SIZE STEEL 0 GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH-058 Use bur lube to extendgraver life and brighten cuts. TAPER SQUARE CARBON SIZE STEEL 1 GH GH GH-061 TAPER LOZENGE CARBON SIZE STEEL 1 GH GH GH-093 LOZENGE CARBON SIZE STEEL 0 GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH-090 OVAL CARBON SIZE STEEL 63 GH GH GH GH GH

110 2. Yellow Tang High Speed Gravers These gravers are specially used by stone setters, die sinkers, jewelers and watch makers. Excellent for use on all alloys and precious metals. Made of High Speed Steel hardened and tempered. All gravers may be re-sharpened when needed. ROUND HIGH SIZE SPEED 50 GH GH GH GH GH GH GH Straight & Bent Line Gravers FLAT HIGH SIZE SPEED 36 GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH-238 E.C. Muller line gravers are essential for performing various engraving techniques. The first number is the grade. For reference #6 is the smallest #32 is the largest. The second number is the number of lines that can be engraved at a time. ONGLETTE HIGH SIZE SPEED 5/0 GH-215 4/0 GH-216 3/0 GH-217 2/0 GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH GH-227 GRAVERS 65mm Use bur lube to extendgraver life and brighten cuts. STRAIGHT LINE HIGH CARBON SIZE STEEL 6/4 GH-181 6/6 GH-182 6/8 GH-183 6/10 GH-184 6/18 GH /4 GH-185 8/6 GH-186 8/10 GH /8 GH /10 GH /12 GH /16 GH /10 GH /4 GH /8 GH STRAIGHT LINE HIGH CARBON SIZE STEEL 16/10 GH /12 GH /16 GH /4 GH /6 GH /8 GH /10 GH /12 GH /10 GH /6 GH /8 GH /10 GH /10 GH /10 GH /8 GH BENT LINE HIGH CARBON SIZE STEEL 6/4 GH-190 6/6 GH /8 GH /10 GH Adjustable Graver Handle Set the graver to the required length and lock in position by the set screw. Useful for working with gravers of short lengths. LENGTH GH /2 GH

111 GRAVERS 5. Graver Handles Handles for gravers made in fine finished hardwood. Ends are reinforced with metal sleeves to retain the tang firmly. SHAPE DIA. X LEN. GH-253 MUSHROOM 1 1 /4 X 2 3 /4 GH-254 MUSHROOM 1 1 /4 X 1 3 /4 GH-256 HALF HEAD 1 1 /4 X 2 GH-258 HALF HEAD 1 3 /8 X 1 5 /8 GH-259 PEAR 1 5 /8 X 1 7 /8 GH-260 PEAR 1 1 /4 X 1 3 /4 HALF ROUND ROUND GH-261 ROUND 1 3 /8 X 1 5 /8 PEAR GH-262 GOURD 1 5 /16 X 2 1 /2 MUSHROOM 6. Graver Sharpener GOURD A precision tool that secures the graver in the required angle for sharpening. 7. Crocker Pattern-Graver Sharpener A useful fixture to assist sharpening of gravers on bench stones. Any precise angle may be pre-set with the setting index. GH-180 GRAVER SHARPENER 8. Original Arkansas Stones GH-179 CROCKER GRAVER SHARPENER Natural Arkansas stones are excellent for sharpening and final honing of gravers. Available in hard and ultra hard grades. Hard grades are dense-grained and ideal for pre-sharpening. Ultra hard are closegrained for final honing. Lubricate with a light oil for rapid cutting. SIZE GRADE AT X 2 X 1 /2 HARD AT X 2 X 1 /2 HARD AT X 2 X 1 /2 HARD AT X 2 X 1 /2 EX-HARD AT X 2 X 1 /2 EX-HARD AT X 2 X 1 /2 EX-HARD Imported Arkansas SIZE GRADE AT X 40 X 12mm HARD AT X 50 X 12mm HARD AT X 50 X 18mm HARD AT X 40 X 18mm HARD AT X 50 X 18mm HARD AT X 50 X 18mm HARD AT X 50 X 18mm HARD 9. Electric Engraver A very useful tool for engraving symbols, layout work and identification marks. High speed reciprocation of a finely pointed carbide tip marks the object. Controls may be set from slow to rapid. Replaceable carbide tips are available. Diamond tips are optional. 10. Burgess Vibro Engraver Rugged industrial engraver that hammer marks permanently into hardened steel, metal, stone, ceramic, glass or wood. Tungsten carbide tip vibrates at 7,200 strokes per minute. Calibrated dial controls impact from light to heavy. Ergonomic design allows for extended periods of work. GH-207 GH-208 GH-211 GH V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz ENGRAVER CARBIDE POINT ENGRAVER DIAMOND POINT GH-201 GH-202 GH-203 GH V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz DIAMOND SPARE TIP TUNGSTEN CARBIDE TIP 126

112 HAMMERS HM Chasing Hammers Made of forged steel with a hardwood handle. One large face to flatten and the other round to form shapes. 2. Riveting Hammers Made of drop forged chrome plated steel with hardwood handles. Head has one flat side for spreading and the other for levelling. DIA. NET WT. HM oz -GERMAN HM /8 5 oz -GERMAN HM /4 6 oz -ECONO HM /8 4 oz -ECONO Handles for Chasing Hammers HM-311 HM-312 PISTOL HANDLE ROUND HANDLE DIA. X L SHAPE HM /8 X 3 ROUND-FRENCH HM /2 X 3 5 /8 ROUND-FRENCH HM /2 X 4 SQUARE-GERMAN 3. Goldsmith Hammer Especially designed for the jeweler, this hammer is made of gun metal with polished finished ends. One end is flat and the other is chisel shaped. Ideal for riveting, forming and shaping work. Made in Germany. HM-280 GOLDSMITH HAMMER 4. Ball Pein Hammers Made of drop forged polished hardened steel with a hardwood handle for solid striking force. One end flat and the other round. DIA. X L NET WT. HM /2 X 2 2 oz HM /4 X 2 3 /4 4 oz HM /8 X 3 8 oz 5. Brass Head Mallet Solid brass head will not mar thin or soft metals. Fitted with a hardwood handle, overall length 9. HM-283 NET WT. 2 oz Mallets-Removable Faces This mallet face ends may be changed to any combination. Different ends of fiber, nylon or brass are available. 7. Nylon Mallets-German HM-284 HM-285 HM-286 HM-287 HM-288 These soft nylon faced mallets will not mar or dent work. Mallet is well balanced and provided with hardwood handle. DIA. HM mm HM mm BRASS & FIBER HAMMER 4 oz BRASS & NYLON HAMMER 4 oz EXTRA BRASS HEAD EXTRA FIBER HEAD EXTRA NYLON HEAD

113 8. Watch Maker Hammers Swiss style hammers, with finely polished forged steel heads fitted on hardwood handles. Use for miniature work. 9. Egg Head Hammer HAMMERS The best tool for the jewelers with changeable heads, steel, aluminum alloy or nylon. Manually turn the hammerhead for replacement. HM-712 HM-713 HM-714 HM Toroid Hammer HEAD LGTH. 50mm 60mm 70mm 80mm Versatile well finished hammer. Quality made with a comfortable handle. One head has three faces; brass, steel and nylon. Simple choice of face by easy pull out and turn. AN-390 HM-710 TOROID HAMMER AN ANVIL RI-115 HM-710 HAMMER WITH 3 HEADS 11. Plastic Mallets- USA HM-318 Abrasion resistant plastic mallet fitted with a hardwood handle that has a bounce similar to rawhide. Absorbs impact and leaves surfaces smooth. HM-319 DIA. HM /2 HM /4 12. Rawhide Mallets HM-300 HM-301 Cured rawhide, shellac treated mallet will not impair or mar metal surfaces. All fitted with durable hardwood handles. STYLE DIA. X L NET WT. HM X oz HM /4 X 2 1 /2 4.5 oz HM /2 X oz HM /4 X 3 1 /2 9.5 oz HM X 3 1 / oz HM-720 HM-304 HM-302 HM Planishing Hammers Forged steel hammers, with hardened and polished ends. Cambered faces for efficient work. All mounted on hardwood handles, perfectly balanced for good striking power. Double Headed Hammers HEAD LGTH. ENDS SIZE GRAMS HM mm 24mm X 21mm 200 HM mm 28mm X 28mm 375 HM mm 21mm X 22mm 200 HM mm 24mm X 24mm 300 HM-723 HM

114 HAMMERS HM-724 HM-725 HM-733 HM Hammers for Precious Metalsmithing Especially for metalsmithing on precious metals. Ground and polished ends with hickory handles provide the right amount of balance. HEAD LGTH. END SIZES GRAMS HM mm 24mm X 24mm 250 HM mm 24mm X 24mm 250 HM mm 25mm X 27mm 170 HM mm 18 X 35mm/22 X 35mm 375 HM-729 HM Grooving and Bordering Hammers High grade steel hammer ends hardened and polished. Handles are made of hardwood. Ideal for working in confined areas and edge finishing. HM-731 HEAD LGTH. END SIZES GRAMS HM mm 31 X 10mm/33 X 12mm 250 HM mm 27 X 7mm/27 X 6mm 250 HM mm 20 X 4mm/20 X 6mm 200 HM Stretching Hammer Made of quality steel. Ends are hardened and fine polished. Fitted with hardwood handles. HM-727 HM-728 HEAD LGTH. END SIZES GRAMS HM mm 25 X 25mm Forming Hammers Hammers made of quality steel. Ends are hardened and fine polished. All fitted with hardwood handles. Use to form metal to desired shapes. HEAD LGTH. END SIZES GRAMS HM mm 20 X 18mm/24 X 22mm 250 HM mm 16 X 18mm 175 HM Combination Hammer A high quality steel, hardened and polished hammer, one end for planishing and the other end for grooving. Used to spread, flatten and form metal. HEAD LGTH. END SIZES GRAMS HM mm 27mm

115 LAMPS & LOUPES 1. Dazor Lamps A metal enamel finished floating arm fluorescent lamp with 15W daylight tubes to provide natural light. The mechanical construction is enclosed, with no exposed springs or wires and its movement is easily positioned. Available in different colors and styles. Tubes and bulbs are not covered by warranty. UL listed. GRAY BLACK VOLTS TUBES CLAMP LM-101 LM V 2 CLAMP LM-103 LM V 2 DESK LM-105 LM V 2 DESK LM-107 LM V 2 CLAMP LM-110 LM V 3 CLAMP LM-112 LM V 3 DESK LM-114 LM V 3 DESK LM-116 LM V 3 Replacement Daylight Tube LM W DAYLIGHT TUBE 2. Dazor Circline Magnifying Lamps A well designed shadow free light around a magnifying lens with a Circline fluorescent tube. The swing arm has a 42 reach with adjustable positioning. Magnification power of three diaopters (+75%) with 13 focal distance. UL listed. GRAY BLACK VOLTS CLAMP LM-120 LM V CLAMP LM-122 LM V DESK LM-124 LM V DESK LM-126 LM V Replacement Tube LM W CIRCLINE TUBE 3. Portable Flip Lamp- White Light Especially for gems and jewelry, these lightweight, compact folding lamps are excellent for stone grading and color matching. Adjustable positioning and an auto shut off when closed. May be swiveled a full 360. A 13W fluorescent bulb is included. LM-134 LM-135 FLIP LAMP 110V FLIP LAMP 220V Replacement Fluorescent Bulb LM Assymetria Fluorescent Lamp FOR LM-134 & LM-135 Energy saving lamp provides a soft diffused light for comfortable viewing. The assymetric pattern of the light lowers the reflective glare and ensures ample coverage of the viewing area. Adjustable arm with clamp on base allows for easy positioning. Includes fluorescent double tube 13w, cord and plug, with a separate table top base. 132 LM-140 LM-141 LM V 220V REPLACEMENT BULB

116 5. B & L Hastings Triplet Loupes A Hastings lens has three lenses bonded together to form a compound lens. View sharp magnified images with no color distortion. LAMPS & LOUPES 8. H. Schneider Jewelers Loupe A world renowned professional jewelers loupe. Unsurpassed high quality viewing through a three lens system. The aplanatic-achromatic design provides a view that is distortion free from every angle. Lens dia 21mm. POWER FOCAL LENS DISTANCE DIAMETER LD X mm LD X 3 /4 12.5mm LD X 1 /2 8.25mm 6. B & L Coddington Loupes Single lens constructed loupe with an internal diaphragm to provide a larger field of distortion free viewing. Chrome plated swing type case protects the loupe. POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LD X 1 9. B & L Watch Makers-Double Lens Eye Loupes Twice the magnification in a single lens. Screw off the front lens when not needed. Attractive non-reflective black finish with precision ground and polished lenses for maximum clarity. POWER FOCAL LENS DISTANCE DIAMETER LD X mm LD X 3 / mm LD X 1 / mm 7. Gems 10X Triplet Loupes Four models are available. Each has a large, clear, tintless round glass lens. Working distance 1. Comes with leather pouch. POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LW-212 4X & 7X 1 1 /2 X 2 1 /2 10. B & L Single Lens Eye Loupes Optical precision ground lightweight lens with soft black interior provides a clear field of view. These magnifiers have a lens diameter of 1. COLOR LENS DIA. LD-662 BLACK 21mm LD-663 CHROME 21mm LD-667 GOLD 21mm LD-668 RUBBER 21mm POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LW-204 4X 2 1 /2 LW-205 5X 2 LW-207 7X 1 1 /2 LW X Economy Eye Loupes An economical lightweight loupe with ground and polished lens set in black plastic holder. Provides distortion free viewing. Available in different focal distances. COLOR LENS DIA. LD-702 BLACK 18mm LD-703 CHROME 18mm LD-707 GOLD 18mm LD-708 RUBBER 18mm POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LW X 1 LW-115 7X 1 1 /2 LW-120 5X 2 LW-125 4X 2 1 /2 LW X 3 LW-135 3X 3 1 /2 LW X 4 LW-145 2X 5 133

117 LAMPS & LOUPES 12. Zeiss Professional Loupe Pocket magnifiers for the professional. The aplanatic and achromatic design of the Zeiss lens system provides a field of view that is free of chromatic aberrations and distortion in the peripheral zone. The antireflective coating prevents glare. Protected in a leather pouch. 15. Nikon Professional Loupe A rare combination of peerless clarity and unrivaled optical quality from the world leader in optics. Compound lenses deliver a distinct magnified image with no color distortion. Images are as sharp at the edges as at the center. Comes in a leather pouch. POWER DIST. DIA. LD X mm POWER DIST. DIA. LD X mm 13. Gold Loupes-14Kt An exquisite gift for jewelers who need nothing but the best clear color corrected lens with a powerful 10X magnification, set in a finely crafted basket weave case. POWER FOCAL LD X 1 LD X 3 /4 LD X 1 /2 16. Double Lens 10X Loupes An economical combination of two lenses that provide distortion free viewing. LD-713 LD-721 LENS DIA. 14mm 23mm 17. B & L Illuminated Coddington Loupe A combined magnifier and light source. Illuminates the object being viewed through the lens. Powered by two AA penlight batteries (not included). Measures 5 3 /4 overall length X Triplet Loupes Color corrected triplet lens that ensures distortion free viewing. 10X- 20.5mm. LD-762 LD-763 LD-765 LD-767 LD X- 18mm. LD-902 LD-903 LD-907 LD-908 COLOR BLACK CHROME MARBLE GOLD RUBBER COLOR BLACK CHROME GOLD RUBBER POWER FOCAL LENS DISTANCE DIAMETER LD X mm 18. Illuminated Loupes Newly designed illuminated magnifying glass with a spotlight for night time use. Color corrected lens helps for long periods of observation without eye fatigue. Comes with a leather carrying case. Batteries not included. 20X- 18mm LD-901 COLOR CHROME POWER FOCAL LENS DISTANCE DIAMETER LD X 1 21mm LD X 1 14mm 134

118 19. Telesight Magnifiers LOUPES & LAMPS Binocular eye loupe in full-frame, half-frame and clip-on type. May be used with prescription glasses including bifocals. Lenses are of optical quality acrylic and are abrasion resistant. Light in weight with tension clamps for instant attachment and flip-up. Full Frame STYLE POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LS /4X 14 LS X 11 LS /4X 9 LS /2X 7 LS X 5 Half Frame STYLE POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LS /4X 14 LS X 11 LS /4X 9 LS /2X 7 LS X 5 Clip-on STYLE POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LS /4X 14 LS X 11 LS /4X 9 LS /2X 7 LS X Clips-on Opticaid Magnifiers -USA Magnifier has flexible wire clip for use with any eyeglass frame. Scratch-proof optical quality acrylic, prismatic lens. 23. Spring Clip Opticaid Magnifiers- USA May be used with any metal or plastic eyeglass frames. Scratch proof optical quality acrylic, prismatic lens. POWER FOCAL LS /2X 20 LS /4X 14 LS-251 2X 10 LS /4X 8 LS /4X 6 LS /2X Magnifying Specs-USA Can be worn alone or over eyeglasses. Scratch-proof optical quality acrylic, prismatic lens. POWER FOCAL LS /2X 20 LS /4X 14 LS-257 2X 10 LS /4X 8 LS /4X 6 LS /2X B & L Spectacle Loupes-Single/Double Lens Single lens spectacle loupe clips on to a frame and flips out when not in use. Double lens is two separate lenses that may be used together or singly. STYLE POWER FOCAL LS-329 #2 1 1 /2X 20 LS-330 #3 1 3 /4X 14 LS-331 #4 2X 10 LS-332 #5 2 1 /4X 8 LS-333 #7 2 3 /4X 6 LS-334 # /2X Loupe Chains Attaching these chains to the swivel end of your jewelers loupe will keep it handy at all times. POWER FOCAL LS-203 3X 3 1 /2 LS-204 4X 2 1 /2 LS-205 5X 2 LS-207 7X 1 1 /2 LS-235 3X, 5X 3 1 /2 & 2 LS-247 4X, 7X 1 1 /2 & 1 1 /2 25. Tripod Magnifier A fixed distance focal length magnifier designed for viewing engraving details. May also be used for assembly of delicate parts. LD-204 LD-205 GOLD CHROME LT-001 MAGNIFIER 10X 135

119 LOUPES & LAMPS 26. Megaview Plastic Lenses- Japan Ideal for viewing micro-fine details, without distortion. Light in weight, high quality lenses have a scratch proof coating. 27. Rayner Emerald Filter Identify emeralds professionally. The filter detects dyed green and blue chalcedony when viewed in intense light. Synthetic emeralds will appear red or pink, while green stones will appear green. LS-396 LENS-2X LS-397 LENS-2 1 /2X LS-398 LENS-3X LS-400 MEGAVIEW- 3 LENSES 28. OptiSight -USA OptiSight magnifying visor provides hands-free magnification for more accurate and efficient viewing. The visor tilts up for normal viewing or down for magnification. OptiSight brings work closer into focus, reducing eye strain and fatigue. Available in assorted colors. COLOR LS-450 W/3 LENS PLATE GREEN LS-451 W/3 LENS PLATE BLUE LS-452 W/3 LENS PLATE TAN LS-453 W/3 LENS PLATE RED LS-454 W/3 LENS PLATE PURPLE LS-455 W/3 LENS PLATE GRAY LD-909 Lens Plates EMERALD FILTER STYLE POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LS-456 #3 1 3 /4X 14 LS-457 #4 2X 10 LS-458 #5 2 1 /2X 8 LS-459 #7 2 3 /4X Optivisor - USA Optivisor lenses are manufactured from high quality optical glass prepared to ophthalmic standards. Frames are light in weight, durable and impact resistant. The visor is pivot mounted to the head band so that it may be adjusted to any position. Lens plates are interchangeable. Optivisor Lens Plates STYLE POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LS-402 DA2 1 1 /2X 20 LS-403 DA3 1 3 /4X 14 LS-404 DA4 2X 10 LS-405 DA5 2 1 /2X 8 LS-407 DA7 2 3 /4X 6 LS-410 DA /2X 4 Optiloupe LS-411 ATTACHMENT 2 1 /2X 30. AccurSITE STYLE POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LS-422 #2 1 1 /2X 20 LS-423 #3 1 3 /4X 14 LS-424 #4 2X 10 LS-425 #5 2 1 /2X 8 LS-427 #7 2 3 /4X 6 LS-430 # /2X 4 Spares LS-412 COMFORT LEATHER BAND LS-460 VISOR LIGHT W/BATTERY PACK LS-461 VISOR LIGHT REPLACEMENT BULB A magnifier with dual lens prismatic system that allows eye focus on the object at a proper viewing distance. May be worn over prescription eyeglasses or safety glasses. Visor tilts above when not needed. Comfortable padded headband is adjustable to fit any person. STYLE POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LS-432 AL3 1 3 /4X 14 LS-433 AL4 2X 10 LS-434 AL5 2 1 /2X 8 LS-435 AL7 2 3 /4X 6 Lens Plates STYLE POWER FOCAL DISTANCE LS-440 #3 1 3 /4X 14 LS-441 #4 2X 10 LS-442 #5 2 1 /2X 8 LS-443 #7 2 3 /4X 6

120 PLATING 1. Picklers This 14 oz. capacity pickler is safe and effective for removing oxides or fire scale from the surfaces of gold, silver and non-ferrous alloys. Comes with acid resistant retrieval baskets for easy immersion and removal. Constant bath temperature at 140 F/60 C. Provided with polypropylene perforated basket for easy immersion and retrieval of articles of jewelry, when working with hot pickling solutions. 4. Pyrex Beakers & Covers Useful for liquid measurement, these beakers are graduated and provided with spouts for easy pouring. Covers are essential to store and protect plating solutions from contamination. PB-210 PB-211 PB Copper Tongs 14 oz 110V 14 oz 220V BASKET These tongs are suitable to use when immersing articles in pickling or acidic solutions. Will not contaminate, nor corrode the solutions. 5. Stainless Beakers PE-527 PE-528 PE-529 PE-530 PE-532 BEAKER-50ml BEAKER- 600ml BEAKER-1000ml COVER FOR 600ml COVER FOR 1000ml Two sizes of beakers are available. When a lead wire from the rectifier is connected to the beaker, it acts as the anode for electro stripping, electrocleaning or gold plating. TW-444 BENT- 9 TW-445 FISH TAIL Plating Racks Well designed, in rows, with numerous hooks, these racks are made of heavy gauge polycoated copper for protection when immersed in plating baths. PE-534 PE Binding Wires- Copper and Iron SS BEAKER-600ml SS BEAKER-1200ml Pure Copper Wire, soft and pliable, for suspending articles of jewelry in plating baths. Do not use for rhodium or electro stripping. Iron Wire, for binding various items together. May be used to bind articles while soldering. 138 DIA. ROWS HOOKS SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO SO GAUGE INCH TYPE PE lb COPPER PE lb COPPER PE lb COPPER PE lb COPPER PE oz IRON PE oz IRON PE oz IRON PE oz IRON

121 7. Electric Hot Plates High quality hot plate has an external controller for temperature. When heating plating baths in glass beakers, always use a stainless wire mesh screen to protect the beaker from direct contact with the element. Heating elements are easily replaceable. 10. Wieland Plating Anodes PLATING The correct anode is a must to ensure quality plating results. Wieland plating anodes are of high purity and excellent for immersion in plating solutions without causing contamination. Au-Gold, Rh-Rhodium, Ag-Silver. PE-129 PE V -SINGLE 110V -DOUBLE 8. Plating Thermometer A glass plating thermometer resistant to chemicals. Temperature range F. PE-131 GLASS THERMOMETER 9. JAX Master Metal Plating Solutions JAX Silver Plating Solution Plates pure silver on to copper, brass, bronze and silver without heat or electricity. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Copper Plating Solution Instantly plates copper on to iron, steel, brass and solder articles without heat or electricity. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Blackener JAX Silver Black Produces a dark, black antique finish on silver and gold. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Pewter Black Produces a dark, black antique finish on pewter, lead, brass, bronze, copper, nickel, tin-lead alloys and solders. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Iron, Steel, and Nickel Black Produces an antique, metallic black finish on iron, steel, and nickel. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Aluminum Blacker Produces an antique black finish on aluminum PE PINT (473ml) STEEL TITANIUM SILVER ANODE SIZE PLATING PE-135 SPECIAL STEEL 110 X 60mm Au PE-136 PLATINIZED TITANIUM 1.5µ 100 X 30mm Rh PE-137 PLATINIZED TITANIUM 1.5µ 110 X 60mm Rh PE-138 PURE SILVER 100 X 50mm Ag PE-139 PURE SILVER 170 X 100mm Ag 11. Sparex Pickling Compound Non-flammable, granular dry acid compound, for use in Picklers. Cleans and removes surface oxidation and fire scale discoloration on gold, silver and non-ferrous alloys. Works efficiently at a constant temperature of 140 F/60 C. SO-128 SO-129 SO Umbrella Ring Rack UL-059 UL-061 UL-062 CONTENTS COMPOUND 2 1 /2 lb COMPOUND 10 oz COMPOUND 45 lb DRUM Stainless steel frame plastic coated rack. Hooks are adjustable and evenly spaced to hold articles of jewelry for cleaning or plating. 4 HOOKS 8 HOOKS 10 HOOKS 139

122 PLATING PE-512 PE Rectifier 30A with Micro Pen Plater A remarkable system that features both a plating rectifier and a pen plater. The plating rectifier is a source for direct current that is needed for electroplating and electro stripping. A variable voltage and sufficient amperage determines the size of the bath and the surface area that can be plated. Solid state circuitry, delivers filtered DC output. The control panel has an amp/volt meter, regulator, on/off switch. Maximum 4.5 gal. plating baths. The micro pen plater with a fiber tipped pen is designed to plate small areas and hard to reach places. Ideal to customize jewelry, detail designs and touch up repairs. The variable voltage provides the optimum settings for different plating solutions. PE-127 PE-128 PE-512 COMBO RECTIFIER SET RED/BLACK LEAD WIRE PLATING PEN (RED & BLACK) 14. Micro-Plating System Compact, self-contained bench top unit for electro cleaning and electroplating. Two beakers 600 cc. capacity, one for cleaning and the other for plating. Automatic water heating system with sight gauge for water level to ensure uniform plating. Comes complete with rectifier, power switch, variable control 0-12V, 15A for plating of gold, silver, rhodium, nickel and copper. Suitable for dual voltage 110/220V. PE-123 MICRO PLATING RECTIFIER 15. Liquid Electrocleaner This ready-to-use heavy duty electrocleaning solution is primarily used to clean castings and articles prior to being plated. 17. Activated Carbon A solution to remove organic contamination from Rhodium and Gold plating baths. 16. Tivaclean PE-526 CONTENTS 1 qt An electro cleaning concentrate for both metals and plastic.when Tivaclean is mixed with water changes from orange to fluorescent green to ensure complete rinsing. It contains an anti-foaming agent for low sudsing and a deodorant to suppress odor. It is biodegradable, easy to clean with a noncaustic ph of Use at room temperature or, to enhance its performance, the solution may be heated to a temperature between 160 F-180 F. 18. Tivabrite PE-544 CARBON TREATMENT PE-545 FILTER PAPER 13 An electro stripping powder used for polishing of yellow gold. Mix this unique combination of chemicals with water and sodium cyanide, utilize with a reverse current. In most cases, it can replace bombing, in a hydrogen peroxide/cyanide solution with better results. PE-540 CONTENTS 1 lb PE-541 CONTENTS 1 lb 140

123 19. Rhodinette Pen Plater Create designer effects, touch ups and repair work with the Rhodinette fiber electroplating pen. Unit is compact, has a rectifier and arrangement to hold the pen. The cathode connects to the work piece with an alligator clip. The fiber tip anode pen, which absorbs the plating solution, is used to create special effects. A set includes pen plater, five fiber tips, lead wires and a glass container. PLATING SPECIFICATION PE V/ 60Hz PE V/ 50Hz Spares for Rhodinette PE-506 RHODINETTE PLATING PEN PE-507 FIBER TIPS -5PCS PE-508 SUPER POINT TIPS -3PCS PE-509 YELLOW FIBER TIPS -5PCS PE WIELAND STOP-OFF PEN PE CLAMP WIRE FOR RHODINETTE PE PE PE CONTAINER GLASS -YELLOW GLASS -RED GLASS -BLACK 20. Wieland Fiber Electrode Plating Solutions These are specially formulated solutions for partial electro plating articles of jewelry. Plating layers applied by these solutions are relatively thin. Suitable for use with all pen platers for designer work. COLOR CONTENTS PE-516 FINE GOLD 2g/100ml PE-515 YELLOW GOLD 2g/100ml PE-517 PALE GOLD 2g/100ml PE NICKEL 100ml COLOR CONTENTS PE RED GOLD 2g/100ml PE-511 BRIGHT RHODIUM 2g/100ml PE BLACK RHODIUM 2g/100ml PE COPPER 100ml 21. Deluxe Pen Plater A stainless steel enclosure with recesses to hold three jars of plating solution. Unit will support four plating pens simultaneously. The fiber tips may be shaped to the needs of the user. A variable voltage enables adjustment for artistic reproduction. Unit includes one black lead and a plating pen with a replaceable fiber tip. PE-500 PE-501 PE-512 SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz PLATING PEN ONLY PE Stop-off Blue A very effective solution that may be used to mask areas that do not need to be plated. May be cleaned after use with acetone. 23. Degussa Rhodium Solutions A new type of pen plating solution, carefully formulated to give consistent results. Achieve a white reflective surface on gold to create artistic effects. RH- Rhodium PE oz JAR PE-524 PE PE PE J2-2g RH/100ml BATH J1-2g RH/100ml BATH TD 2g RH/100ml 271 PEN PLATING 2g RH/100ml 141

124 PLATING PE Uni Plater An array of designer shades of rhodium, gold, silver, nickel and palladium can be plated by means of a special fiber tip pen. The pen is slim and facilitates plating of intricate or specific areas. The article to be plated is connected to the cathode by an alligator clip. The fiber tip is the anode and is immersed into the plating solution. Unit is dual voltage 110/220V. PE-502 DUAL 110/220V PE-503 DELUXE PLATING PEN PE-510 JAR FOR PLATING SOLUTION PE-512 PLATING PEN (RED & BLACK) 25. Pen Plating Solutions These plating solutions plate directly on all types of metals. Use a porous fiber tip pen with a pen plating rectifier for creating artistic designs. RH- Rhodium COLOR CONTENTS PE K GOLD 1 /4g 2 oz PE K GOLD 1g 2 oz PE K GOLD 1 /4g 2 oz PE K GOLD 1g 2 oz PE-520 RH 1g-CONC. 2 oz PE-521 RH 2g-CONC. 2 oz COLOR CONTENTS PE K GOLD 1 /4g 2 oz PE K GOLD 1g 2 oz PE-106 ROSE GOLD 1g 2 oz PE-107 GREEN GOLD 1g 2 oz PE-108 BLACK RH 1g 2 oz 26. Krohn Gold Plating Solutions Specifically formulated for each grade of gold. These solutions are pre-mixed and ready to use. Articles achieve a bright reflective finish. May be used with stainless steel anodes. Contains one pennyweight of pure gold per quart. 27. Electro Cleaner PE-114 PE-118 PE-120 PE-121 PE-122 PE K GOLD- 1 qt. 18K GOLD- 1 qt. PINK- 1 qt. 18K GREEN- 1 qt. 24K GOLD- 1 qt. HAMILTON- 1 qt. A special formula of a combination of chemicals in powder form. May be diluted by mixing with distilled water. Surface is cleaned electrolytically leaving it bright for subsequent immersion in the plating bath. 28. Krohn Rhodium Plating Solutions Prepared from virgin rhodium salts, under stringent quality control, and guaranteed to give an exquisite appearance. Plates directly on platinum, gold or pure nickel. To plate silver, copper or bronze alloys, articles must first have a primary nickel plate. Use with platinized titanium or platinum anodes only. Rhodium Replenisher Use this solution to replenish the bath when the chemical balance is depleted during rhodium plating. PE PE-518 PE-519 PE-522 PE-523 PE PE RHODIUM 1 /2g-8 fl. oz (READY TO USE) RHODIUM 1g-1 pint (READY TO USE) RHODIUM 2g-1 qt. (READY TO USE) REPLENISHER 1g REPLENISHER 2g RHODIUM 1g (CONCENTRATE) RHODIUM 2g (CONCENTRATE) 29. Wieland Gold & Rhodium Plating Baths 750 is an acidic elecrolyte for gold plating of non-ferrous metals and silver alloys. The color of the surface may vary with different alloy materials. One step plating procedure can produce the end color. PE-525 ELECTRO CLEANER- 12 oz PE PE PE PE PE SCI 14K YELLOW/4 AU-1 lt. 750 FELN18K REDDISH/4 AU-1 lt. 750 SI 18K GREEN YEL./4 AU-1 lt. 750 SC 24K FINE GOLD/ 4 AU-1 lt. BLACK RH CONC. 2G/RH 100ml 142

125 30. Ceramitation A remarkably versatile decorative enamel that is full of vibrant color when cured. Its hardness is virtually equivalent to hard fired enamel. For spraying, Ceramitation may be thinned by a special thinner and applied to almost any surface, metal, porcelain, glass or rock. Non-conductive. Surface enameled with Cermitation may be electroplated without affecting the color or finish. This product is a two-part system. a) Color and b) Catalyst. Only minutes at 250 F (120 C) maximum curing temperature is required. Set consists of 6 transparent colors (red, brown, blue, green, yellow, clear) and catalyst. PLATING CONTENTS CT COLOR SET CT-002 CATALYST 16 oz CT-003 CATALYST 8 oz CT-004 CATALYST 4 oz CT-007 WHITE 2 oz CT-008 BLACK 2 oz CT-009 CHINESE RED 2 oz CONTENTS CT-010 GREEN 2 oz CT-011 ISRAELI BLUE 2 oz CT-012 YELLOW 2 oz CT-013 PEARL 2 oz CT-014 CLEAR 2 oz CT-015 RED 2 oz CT-016 BLUE 2 oz CT-017 THINNER 16 oz 31. Enamels A range of brilliant colors that can be effectively used to create artistic designs on jewelry. After application on gold, silver and copper, the articles when fired will convert the enamel into a hard glossy coating. Set consists of black, white, red, blue, yellow and green-2 oz ea. CONTENTS CT COLOR SET CT-025 BLACK 2 oz CT-026 WHITE 2 oz CT-027 RED 2 oz CONTENTS CT-028 BLUE 2 oz CT-029 YELLOW 2 oz CT-030 GREEN 2 oz 32. JAX Colorants An easy to use safe water base solution to produce different color shades on all metals, without the use of heat or electricity. JAX Green Patina: Produces a permanent, antique green finish on copper, brass and bronze. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Gold Finish: Produces a simulated 24K gold finish on brass. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Antique Rust: Produces an antique rust finish on iron and steel. PE PINT (473ml) JAX Darkeners Environmentally safe, effective solutions to produce permanent colors on various metals with consistent results without heat or electricity. JAX Brown: JAX Brown Black: JAX Black: JAX Flemish Gray/Black: Produces an antique brown finish on brass, bronze and copper. PE PINT (473ml) Produces an antique brown-black finish on brass, bronze and copper. PE PINT (473ml) Produces an antique black finish on brass, bronze and copper. PE PINT (473ml) Produces an antique flemish gray-black finish on brass, bronze & copper. PE PINT (473ml) 143

126 PLATED EAR STUDS Bezel Birthstone Set-Regular STONE TITANIUM GOLD WHITE GARNET PL001T PL001G PL001W AMETHYST PL002T PL002G PL002W AQUAMARINE PL003T PL003G PL003W CRYSTAL PL004T PL004G PL004W EMERALD PL005T PL005G PL005W ALEXANDRITE PL006T PL006G PL006W RUBY PL007T PL007G PL007W PERIDOT PL008T PL008G PL008W SAPPHIRE PL009T PL009G PL009W ROSE PL0010T PL0010G PL0010W TOPAZ PL0011T PL0011G PL0011W BLUE ZIRCON PL0012T PL0012G PL0012W ASSORTED PL0013T PL0013G PL0013W Bezel Birthstone Set-Mini STONE TITANIUM GOLD WHITE GARNET PL201TM PL201GM PL201WM AMETHYST PL202TM PL202GM PL202WM AQUAMARINE PL203TM PL203GM PL203WM CRYSTAL PL204TM PL204GM PL204WM EMERALD PL205TM PL205GM PL205WM ALEXANDRITE PL206TM PL206GM PL206WM RUBY PL207TM PL207GM PL207WM PERIDOT PL208TM PL208GM PL208WM SAPPHIRE PL209TM PL209GM PL209WM ROSE PL210TM PL210GM PL210WM TOPAZ PL211TM PL211GM PL211WM BLUE ZIRCON PL212TM PL212GM PL212WM ASSORTED PL213TM PL213GM PL213WM Mini Shapes STONE TITANIUM GOLD WHITE PEARLS PL214TM PL214GM PL214WM STAR PL215TM PL215GM PL215WM HEART PL216TM PL216GM PL216WM REGULAR PL217TM PL217GM PL217WM 144 PL800 Painless ear piercing, without the danger of infection. All studs are sterilized. The stud is inserted in the gun without touching with your fingers. Unit contains fluid to disinfect ear lobes before and after piercing. Clawset Birthstars Set STONE TITANIUM GOLD WHITE JANUARY PL301T PL301G PL301W FEBRUARY PL302T PL302G PL302W MARCH PL303T PL303G PL303W APRIL PL304T PL304G PL304W MAY PL305T PL305G PL305W JUNE PL306T PL306G PL306W JULY PL307T PL307G PL307W AUGEST PL308T PL308G PL308W SEPTEMBER PL309T PL309G PL309W OCTOBER PL310T PL310G PL310W NOVEMBER PL311T PL311G PL311W DECEMBER PL312T PL312G PL312W ASSORTED PL313T PL313G PL313W Shapes Set SHAPES TITANIUM GOLD WHITE STAR PL501T PL501G PL501W HEART PL502T PL502G PL502W CROSS PL503T PL503G PL503W TRIANGLE PL504T PL504G PL504W SQUARE PL505T PL505G PL505W FULLMOON PL506T PL506G PL506W CRSNT. MOON PL507T PL507G PL507W FLOWER PL508T PL508G PL508W ASSORTED PL509T PL509G PL509W Bezel Pearls Set- Shapes STONE TITANIUM GOLD WHITE PEARLS PL401T PL401G PL401W RED CORAL PL402T PL402G PL402W TURUOISE PL403T PL403G PL403W BLACK ONYX PL404T PL404G PL404W ASSORTED PL405T PL405G PL405W Shape with Stone STONE TITANIUM GOLD WHITE STARLITE PL601T PL601G PL601W HEARTLITE PL602T PL602G PL602W CROSSLITE PL603T PL603G PL603W FLOWERLITE PL604T PL604G PL604W ASSORTED PL605T PL605G PL605W Ball SHAPES TITANIUM GOLD WHITE REGULAR PL701T PL701G PL701W MINI PL702TM PL702GM PL702WM

127 PLIERS & SHEARS 1. Lindstrom Diagonal Cutters (Yellow Handle) Premium quality, Swedish diagonal cutters for use in jewelry and precision crafting. Black anodized, keen cutting edges have adjustable screw lap joints, for accurate alignment. Cushion grip handle is proportional for the applied leverage. Double leaf springs keep the jaws apart. MICRO BEVEL FLUSH CUT ULTRA STYLE OVERALL JAW JAW LENGTH(A) LENGTH(B) WIDTH(C) PJ-140 MICRO BEVEL /3 / 110mm 3 /8 / 10mm 3 /8 / 10mm PJ-141 FLUSH CUT /3 / 110mm 3 /8 / 10mm 3 /8 / 10mm PJ-142 ULTRA /3 / 110mm 3 /8 / 10mm 3 /8 / 10mm PJ-145 ULTRA /3 / 110mm 3 /8 / 10mm 3 /8 / 10mm PJ-150 MICRO BEVEL /16 / 112.5mm 1 /2 / 12.5mm 1 /2 / 12.5mm PJ-151 FLUSH CUT /16 / 112.5mm 1 /2 / 12.5mm 1 /2 / 12.5mm PJ-155 ULTRA /16 / 112.5mm 1 /2 / 12.5mm 1 /2 / 12.5mm PJ-160 MICRO BEVEL / 125mm 5 /8 / 16mm 5 /8 / 16mm 2. Lindstrom Pliers (White Handle) Made of the finest Swedish steel, these high quality pliers are compact due to their close fitting box joints. All have double leaf springs and comfort styled handles for ease of working over long periods. STYLE 7490 STYLE 7892 STYLE 7893 STYLE 7590 STYLE 7890 STYLE OVERALL JAW JAW LENGTH LENGTH WIDTH PJ-189 MICRO CUTTER /3 / 110mm 3 /8 / 10mm 3 /8 / 10mm PJ-190 FLAT NOSE /4 / 120mm 3 /4 / 20mm 3 /8 / 9mm PJ-191 CURVE NOSE /4 / 130mm 1 1 /8 / 28mm 3 /8 / 9mm PJ-193 SHORT CHAIN NOSE /4 / 120mm 3 /4 / 20mm 3 /8 / 9mm PJ-195 ROUND NOSE /4 / 120mm 3 /4 / 20mm 3 /8 / 9mm PJ-198 LONG CHAIN NOSE /4 / 130mm 1 1 /4 / 32mm 3 /8 / 9mm 146

128 PLIERS & SHEARS 3. Lindstrom Bio-Spring Pliers-Rx Series A new concept in pliers, the bio-spring system adjusts to give the correct feel when crafting jewelry. Precision box joint, super smooth pivot movement, combined with an ergonomic handle design make it the best plier for professional jewelers. PJ-200 STYLE OVERALL JAW LENGTH JAW WIDTH FLAT NOSE RX /4 /146.5mm 3 /4 /20mm 3 /8 /9mm PJ-201 STYLE OVERALL JAW LENGTH JAW WIDTH ROUND NOSE RX /4 /146.5mm 3 /4 /20mm 3 /8 /9mm PJ-202 STYLE OVERALL JAW LENGTH JAW WIDTH CHAIN NOSE RX /4 /158.5mm 1 1 /4 /32mm 3 /8 /9mm 4. Superlight Pliers-4 1 /2 Made of good quality steel with forged handles for a comfortable grip. Designed for delicate work, these precision pliers have box joints to ensure perfect alignment. All pliers have double leaf springs. Use for forming and shaping thin gauge wire and metal sheet. PJ-203 STYLE OVERALL JAW LENGTH JAW WIDTH C/BENT NOSE RX /8 /155.5mm 1 1 /8 /28mm 3 /8 /9mm PJ-204 STYLE OVERALL JAW LENGTH JAW WIDTH CHAIN NOSE RX /4 /132mm 1 1 /4 /32mm 3 /8 /9mm PJ-301 CHAIN NOSE PJ-302 ROUND NOSE PJ-303 FLAT NOSE PJ-304 SIDE CUTTER 147

129 PLIERS & SHEARS 5. Y2K Series Pliers & Cutters -4 1 /2 These box joint, double leaf spring pliers are precision finished to ease working in special applications. Pivots are close fitting to ensure accurate nose alignment. Several different combinations of nose shapes allow the user to form metal in custom designs. LENGTH PJ-051 CHAIN NOSE 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-054 SIDE CUTTER 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-057 OBLIQ. CUTTER 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-052 ROUND NOSE 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-055 CH. NOSE BENT 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-058 ROUND/FLAT 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-053 FLAT NOSE 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-056 END CUTTER 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-059 HALF RND/FLAT 4 1 /2 /115mm 148

130 6. Slim-Line Pliers- German Slender box joint pliers, made of the finest steel, all with double leaf springs. Features close fitting joints and PVC coated handles for precision and durability. Preferred for use in all types of bench work. PLIERS & SHEARS LENGTH PJ-703 FLAT NOSE 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-706 END CUTTER 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-701 CHAIN NOSE 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-704 SEMI FLUSH CUT 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-707 OBLIQUE CUTTER 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-702 ROUND NOSE 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-705 CH. NOSE BENT 4 1 /2 /115mm LENGTH PJ-708 SIDE CUTTER FLUSH 4 1 /2 /115mm 7. Nylon Pliers LENGTH PJ-310 FLAT NOSE 5 1 /2 /140mm 2 NYLON JAWS PJ-313 REPLACEMENT NYLON JAW LENGTH PJ-311 FLAT/ROUND 5 1 /2 /140mm 1 NYLON JAW PJ-314 REPLACEMENT NYLON JAW LENGTH PJ /2 ROUND/ FLAT 5 1 /2 /140mm 1 NYLON JAW PJ-315 REPLACEMENT NYLON JAW 149

131 PLIERS & SHEARS 8. Regular Pliers-5 German Superior quality pliers with precision fit and accurate alignment. Specially shaped nose forms, smooth and polish finished, all fitted with double leaf spring. Handles are red PVC dipped for a comfortable non-slip grip. Very useful for all types of bench work. PJ-715 CHAIN BENT NOSE PJ-710 PJ-711 CHAIN NOSE SERRATED CHAIN NOSE PJ-713 PJ-722 FLAT NOSE FLAT NOSE SERRATED PJ-716 END CUTTER PJ-712 ROUND NOSE PJ-714 SIDE CUTTER FLUSH PJ-718 S/FLUSH CUTTER RND 9. Economy Pliers & Cutters Well crafted pliers in various nose shapes, all with box joints, double leaf springs and PVC coated handles. A perfect selection for the beginner in fabrication, repairing and bench work. PJ-039 CHAIN NOSE PJ-041 FLAT NOSE PJ-040 ROUND NOSE PJ-042 SIDE CUTTER 150

132 10. Shape Forming Pliers PLIERS & SHEARS 11. Chain Long Nose Plier HALF ROUND AND HOLLOW NOSE Jaws are concave and convex, ideal for use when forming shallow curves in ring finishing. LENGTH PJ-837 GERMAN 5 /130mm PJ-826 ECONO 5 /130mm HALF ROUND AND FLAT NOSE Tapered long nose jaws, to form smooth curves and bends in all sizes. LENGTH PJ-717 CHAIN NOSE 5 1 /2 /140mm 12. Long Flat Nose Plier A semi-circular and flat jaw to hold delicate parts with a firm grip, useful while stretching. LENGTH PJ-839 GERMAN 5 /130mm PJ-825 ECONO 5 /130mm Perfectly matched jaws, double action spring, provide a non-slip grip for almost all bench tasks. LENGTH PJ-723 FLAT NOSE 5 1 /2 /140mm 13. Brass Line Flat Plier Smooth jaw, precisely aligned to bend or hold rings while crafting and fabricating. LENGTH PJ-836 RING BENDING LARGE PLIER 6 /160mm ROUND AND FLAT NOSE Round needle nose and flat anvil, with a double action spring, excellent for fine detail designing. LENGTH PJ-838 GERMAN 5 /130mm PJ-827 ECONO 5 /130mm Soft metal jaws that will not nick or mar. Very essential when working with thin sheet gauge metal. LENGTH PJ-835 BRASS LINE & FLAT 5 /130mm 14. Stone Setting Pliers Quality tool steel box joint pliers with double leaf spring and PVC dipped handles. Grooved jaw locates prong accurately to secure the stone. ROUND NOSE AND HOLLOW PJ-037 PJ-737 Round needle nose and curved anvil, with a double action spring, for special applications. LENGTH PJ-840 GERMAN 5 1 /2 /140mm PJ-829 ECONO 5 1 /2 /140mm LENGTH PJ-737 STONE SETTING PLIER- GERMAN 5 /130mm PJ-037 STONE SETTING-ECONOMY 5 /130mm 151

133 PLIERS & SHEARS 15. Straight and Oblique Cutter 19. Prong Lifting Plier Special pliers, lap joint, double leaf spring, provides gentle pressure on the prong and no pressure on the stone to avoid mar or fracture. One jaw is grooved to hold the prong and the other angled to support the under side and raise prong gently. PJ-740 PJ-741 SWISS OBLIQUE CUTTER-67 SWISS STRAIGHT CUTTER-67B PJ-736 PRONG LIFTING PLIER Ring Holding Plier Made of forged polished steel, with lap joints and large grooved jaws, these pliers are indispensable for holding rings while working on the insides. 16. Loop Closing Plier Hollow, polished jaws, box joints and longer handles provide effortless closing of rings and other oval forms. PJ-738 PJ Wire Bending Plier RING HOLDING PLIER-ECONO RING HOLDING PLIER-GERMAN An ingenious bending plier to create all types of round, undulating, serpentine or special forms in wire or thin gauge metal. Fine screw adjustment provides a convenient stop and assures consistent forms with repeatability. PJ Bow Closing Plier LOOP CLOSING PLIER- GERMAN Designed with a v- groove lower jaw and a curved upper jaw with close fitting box joints. These pliers form curves and v shapes to precise accuracies. PJ-725 WIRE BENDING PLIERS PJ-734 PJ Rosary Plier BOW CLOSING PLIER - GERMAN BOW CLOSING PLIER - ECONO This combination quality tool works both as a round nose plier and a side cutter. Made in hardened steel, with a double spring action, it reduces fatigue and increases production. 22. Solder Cutting Plier Ideal tool for cutting uniform pieces of solder. All steel construction, lapped joints, and plastic coated handles for easy shearing. PJ-735 ROSARY ROUND NOSE PLIER WITH CUTTER LENGTH PJ-038 SOLDER CUTTING PLIER 5 /130mm 152

134 23. Pastorino Sprue Cutter Italian made 9 1 /2 sprue cutter has chrome vanadium steel blades with a locking device. Special shaped hand grips provide effortless cutting in small areas. 27. Compound Cutter PLIERS & SHEARS Heavy duty diagonal cutter with compound leverage for cutting sprues with minimal effort. Overall length is 7 1 /2, and cutting capacity is 3mm. PJ-731 SPRUE CUTTER 24. Bergeon Sprue Cutter Top quality Swiss cutter, with a multiple linkage system, that gives maximum pressure with minimum fatigue. Extra long handles and special shaped jaws allow access to small areas. PJ Swiss Sprue Cutter COMPOUND SPRUE CUTTER- GERMAN Made of premium tool steel, these heavy duty cutters have hardened jaws, precision compound joints and extra long handles to provide leverage. Features angled jaws that align to facilitate the close cutting of sprues. PJ-841 SPRUE CUTTER PJ-848 REPLACEMENT JAW PJ-849 SPRING 25. Bergeon Bracelet Cutter One of the finest heavy duty cutters with a unique compound linkage system to make repeated cuts with less effort. Very good overall fit and finish, hardened cutting edges, with a built-in jaw setting screw. Provides blade protection and increases cutting capability. PJ-846 SWISS SPRUE CUTTER Keiba Cutter with Handle Lock An elegantly designed cutter, with polished hardened cutting edge, and compound action jaws, combines maximum comfort with ease of cutting. Fine setting screw guarantees a clean cut and protects the blade from damage. PJ-847 KEIBA CUTTER WITH HANDLE LOCK PJ Maun Type Cutter BRACELET CUTTER-6496 Medium capacity with spring jaws and lock. Use for cutting sprues of up to 3 mm. Overall length 6 1 /2, with smooth plastic grip handles. 30. Keiba Cutter Cuts sprues up to 3mm with ease, accuracy and repeatability. Compound joint construction, fine finished sharp jaws nip off metal with a flush cut. PJ-843 MAUN TYPE CUTTER WITH SPRING PJ-844 PJ-845 CUTTER FLUSH-CUT 153

135 PLIERS & SHEARS PJ Parallel Pliers- Maun Parallel action pliers provide vise like grip. Handles are anti-rust nickel plated. Jaws remain parallel when in use. PJ-729 PJ-730 LENGTH PJ-727 CHAIN NOSE-PLAIN JAW 5 PJ-729 FLAT WITH GROOVE- SERRATED 5 PJ-730 DIAGONAL CUTTER 5 1 /2 32. Marking Plier Durable stainless steel ring marking plier to stamp the inside of rings as well as other flat surfaces. Plier has adjustable screw to lock different stamps. Individual stamps are available separately. Overall length 5 1 /2. PJ-910 PLIER ONLY PJ-911 MARKING PLIER BOX PJ-912 FLAT AND CURVE ANVIL PJ-913 PLIER WITH 3 STAMPS(10K, 14K, 18K) 33. Pneumatic Sprue Cutter Eliminate manual cutting by using this foot operated, air powered bench sprue cutter. Needs an external air compressor at PSI. Miniature blades access closely spaced sprues. May be hand operated when not on the stand. Complete set includes: nile cutter, point blade, stand, foot pedal and air hose with connections. PJ-942 PJ-943 PJ-941 PJ-942 PJ-943 PJ-944 COMPLETE SET BLUNT BLADE POINT BLADE HOSE GREEN 34. Plier Holding Rack An attractive hardwood, polished stand, with pairs of holes. Lets you keep your pliers handy and easily visible on your work bench. Upright storage eliminates damage to the jaw ends. PJ HOLES- 3 PLIER HOLDER PJ HOLES- 4 PLIER HOLDER PJ HOLES- 5 PLIER HOLDER PJ HOLES- 6 PLIER HOLDER PJ HOLES- 8 PLIER HOLDER PJ HOLES- 10 PLIER HOLDER 35. Wooden Plier Rack Improve your efficiency by increasing work bench space with the addition of this shelf and drawer space saver. Convenient to store small tools, parts and work articles. PJ-936 RACK WITH DRAWER 154

136 36. Shears with Spring Use for cutting templates and patterns from medium heavy metal sheet up to B & S #2 and soft sheet to B & S #1. Available with straight or curved blades. Overall length 7. -German PLIERS & SHEARS SH-700 SH-701 TYPE STRAIGHT CURVED 37. Shears without Spring Made of ground and polished steel, with PVC coated handle, these light duty shears with fine tips are very practical for cutting thin gauge metal. Two blade shapes are available, straight and curved. The curved blade is very useful for cutting smooth contours and circles. - German SH-702 SH-703 TYPE STRAIGHT CURVED 38. Shears with Spring Very efficient light duty shears for cutting patterns in thin gauge metal. Curved handles with coil spring return allow you to work for long periods without fatigue.- French SH-710 SH-711 TYPE STRAIGHT CURVED 39. Shears without Spring Similar to above but with a straight blade and without a spring return, these shears let you cut continuously along the full blade length. Perfect for snip or corner cuts.- French SH-708 SH-709 TYPE STRAIGHT CURVED 40. Shears with Leaf Spring- Solingen Shears with leaf spring and locking system, increases flexibility in cutting chains, solder and thin sheets. Overall length 7. SH-704 DELUXE STRAIGHT 155

137 PLIERS & SHEARS 41. Brown Shears Heavy duty construction, use for making straight cuts. Available for right and left hand operation. Overall length 6 with 1 1 /2 cutting length. SH-705 SH RIGHT HANDED LEFT HANDED 42. Shears Scissor Type Scissor shaped shears made from the finest European steel. The 1 1 /2 blades allow for precise control. Cuts tight patterns, circles and templates. Overall length 7. SH-722 SH-723 SHEAR BLADE-STRAIGHT SHEAR BLADE-CURVED 43. Universal Shears with Spring Easily cuts intricate in and out designs from sheet metal. Blade length 1 3 /4. Overall length 7 1 /2. SH-725 UNIVERSAL SHEARS 44. Portable Ring Shears Easy ring sizing by shearing the exact width that needs to be removed from the ring shank. Install the correct size of cutter, then adjust the die to suit. Place the ring on die and shear with a down stroke. Save the cut piece for future use. Includes four cutters in quarter size increments. SH-712 SH-713 SHEAR WITH CUTTERS SET OF 4 CUTTERS 45. Bench Shears with Long Handle Used for cutting gold, silver, copper, brass and any other metals. The long handle provides leverage for easy cutting. Comes in three sizes. STYLE FLAT BAR ROD SHEET BLADE LGTH. SH-735 4R 2 3 /8 X 5 /32 3 /8 1 /8 4 3 /4 SH-736 5R 2 3 /8 X 3 /16 7 /16 5 / /4 SH-737 6R 2 3 /4 X 1 /4 1 /2 3 /16 8 REPLACEMENT BLADES STYLE BLADE LGTH. SH-738 4R 4 3 /4 SH-739 5R 6 1 /4 SH-740 6R 8 156

138 POLISHING 1. Double End Polisher 1 /4 HP-Single/Double Speed Totally enclosed, continuous rated motor, with pre-lubricated ball bearings and well balanced to eliminate vibration. Right and left hand shaft extensions are 1 /2 diameter. Supplied with tapered spindles. On/off switch enclosed in the base. SPECIFICATION SPEED SHAFT HT. DC V/ 60Hz 3,450/1,725 rpm 6 DC V/ 50Hz 3,450/1,725 rpm 6 DC V/ 60Hz 3,450/1,725 rpm 4 1 /2 DC V/ 50Hz 3,450/1,725 rpm 4 1 /2 DC V/ 60Hz 3,450 rpm 6 DC V/ 50Hz 3,450 rpm 6 2. Single End-Polisher 1 /2HP & 3 /4HP Powerful, continuous duty motor with lubricated sealed bearings. Perfectly stable with vibration free performance that is vital for grinding, polishing and buffing operations. Speed at 3,450 rpm. SPECIFICATION POWER DC V/ 60Hz 1 /2HP DC V/ 50Hz 1 /2HP DC V/ 60Hz 3 /4HP DC V/ 50Hz 3 /4HP 3. Double End Polisher 1 /2HP & 3 /4HP Rugged heavy duty motor, sealed ball bearings, continuous rated for use in production shops. Single speed at 3,450 rpm. Shaft extensions are 1 /2 diameter. Supplied with two threaded tapered spindles. Shaft height 6. Suitable for wheels or buffs up to 8 diameter. SPECIFICATION POWER DC V/ 60Hz 1 /2 HP DC V/ 50Hz 1 /2 HP DC V/ 60Hz 3 /4 HP DC V/ 50Hz 3 /4 HP 4. Mini Bench Grinder/Polisher- 1 /6 HP A versatile machine, ideal for small shops. May be used as a bench grinder, polisher, drill and carver. Compact 1 /6 HP motor, suitable for continuous operation. Solid state, high torque, variable speed from 1,500 to 4,000 rpm. 5. Tapered Spindles for Straight Shaft DC-001 DC-002 Converts straight shafts to tapered ends, that are needed to mount all types of buff wheels. Select according to motor shaft diameter and right or left taper. Locks on to the shaft by a set screw. SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz 6. Tapered Spindle for Tapered Shaft Especially for Baldor polishing motors. Designed with a shallow internal taper, these spindles eliminate wobble and ensure very true running of tapered spindles. DIA. /LG DC-054 RIGHT 1 /2 X 2 5 /8 DC-055 LEFT 1 /2 X 2 5 /8 DC-056 RIGHT 5 /8 X 2 5 /8 DC-057 LEFT 5 /8 X 2 5 /8 DIA. DC-048 THREADED-RIGHT 5 /8 DC-053 THREADED-COMBO 5 /8 DC-059 BRASS LEFT 3 /8 DC-060 BRASS RIGHT 3 /8 158

139 7. Single Spindle Polisher/Dust Collector This compact unit is useful in small shops with limited space, and features an all steel enclosure with a 1 /2HP single end polisher, speed 3,450 rpm and 1 /2 tapered spindle. The dust collector has a 1 /2HP suction motor, and replaceable filters. Dimensions 15 X 17 X 10. POLISHING 8. Double Shaft Polisher/Dust Collector DC-014 DC-015 DC Heavy Duty Double Shaft Polisher /Dust Collector SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz REPLACEMENT FILTER Compact, medium sized double spindle polisher has 1 /2HP totally enclosed motor, pre-lubricated sealed ball bearings and 5 /8 tapered spindles at both ends. Built into a steel enclosure it includes a squirrel cage suction motor with replaceable fiberglass filters. Dimensions 22 X 19 X 12. DC-016 DC-017 DC-012 A wide body design, double spindle polisher has a totally enclosed 1 /2HP motor, pre-lubricated sealed ball bearings and 5 /8 tapered spindles at both ends. Built into a steel enclosure it includes a powerful squirrel cage suction motor, with replaceable fiberglass filters. Hood has a clear plastic shield for eye protection. Dimensions 32 X 22 X Dust Collectors DC-018 DC-020 DC-013 SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz REPLACEMENT FILTER SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz REPLACEMENT FILTER It is of prime importance to work in a clean air environment. Therefore all grinders and polishers must be connected to a dust collector. Select the model suitable for your shop. Features include a powerful motor blower system, maintenance friendly design, filter cleaning in seconds, and a quick easy slide out tray for recovery of precious metals. CSA approved, CE Mark. 1 MODEL PORTS AIR FLOW* SUCTION** POWER DIMENSION DC-280 DC CFM 5136FPM 110V/ 60Hz 16 H X 14 W X 19.5 L DC-281 DC CFM 5136FPM 220V/ 50Hz 16 H X 14 W X 19.5 L DC-286 AIR FILTER FOR DC DC-282 DC CFM 5136FPM 110V/ 60Hz 17 H X 14 W X 20 L DC-283 DC CFM 5136FPM 220V/ 60Hz 17 H X 14 W X 20 L DC-287 AIR FILTER FOR DC DC-284 DC CFM 4252FPM 110V/ 60Hz 23 H X 18 W X 25.5 L DC-285 DC CFM 4252FPM 220V/ 50Hz 23 H X 18 W X 25.5 L DC-288 AIR FILTER FOR DC * FREE AIR ** SUCTION PER PORT 159

140 POLISHING 11. Compact Dust Collector Single station unit designed to be mounted beneath the work bench. Effective dust and precious metal retention. Brushless motor makes it extremely quiet. Quick and easy pull-out tray captures large particles. Maintenance friendly design. Filters easily replaceable. Dimensions is 22 L X 11 W X 15 Ht. 13. Arbors Used for mounting on motor shafts, to fit grinding or buffing wheels. Available as straight threaded (RH / LH). Select according to the internal diameter to suit motor shaft. DC-081 DC-082 DC-083 SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz FILTERS SIZE DC-040 LEFT 1 /2 1 X 4 1 /4 DC-041 RIGHT 1 /2 1 X 4 1 /4 DC-042 LEFT 5 /8 1 1 /2 X 6 DC-043 RIGHT 5 /8 1 1 /2 X Arbor with Bur Chuck Suitable to mount on motor shafts, either 1 /2 or 5 /8 diameter. This arbor has a keyless Jacob 3-jaw chuck to hold shanks up to 1 /4 diameter. Available for right hand use only. 12. Double End Polisher/Dust Collector A larger unit, all steel enclosure, floor model that has ample room for sit down operation. Includes powerful polisher 1 /2HP, speed 3,450 rpm, and extended tapered shafts 5 /8 diameter at both ends. Additionally provided with a suction motor and replaceable cloth filter bags. Each end is protected with a polishing hood to entrap dust particles. DC Mounted Screw Mandrel ARBOR CHUCK-4 LONG Screw mandrel mounted on hardwood, makes it easy to mount on bench polishers. Useful to hold wheels with 1 /16 hole. HO Split Wood Mandrel MTD SCREW MANDREL Hardwood mandrels, with internal taper, that fit on the tapered ends of polishing spindles. Use with abrasive cloth rolls for internal finishing operations. AT-181 AT-183 SPECIFICATION DC V/ 60Hz DC V/ 50Hz DC-080 FILTER /4 X 11 3 /4 DC-039 DC-026 DC AT-181 AT Dust Collector Hood STRAIGHT TAPERED Made in fiberglass, these protection hoods are easy to install with most bench polishers. Built in suction inlet needs to be connected to an external dust collector. DC-025 DUST COLLECTOR HOOD DC-026 LIGHT SOCKET DC-027 HOOD SHIELD DC-039 FILTER FOR HOOD DC-027

141 18. Rouge Cloths A short nap cloth, treated with rouge. Cloth feels like felt, but removes tarnish and fine scratch marks to leave a bright attractive finish on jewelry. 19. Super Fine Chamois Cloths A medium density cloth with the texture of soft leather. The surface is cushion-like and polishes jewelry without leaving any residue. SIZE PC X 11 SIZE PC X 4 3 /4 POLISHING 20. Selvyt Cloths High quality, long lasting, lint free cloth, leaves a shine on articles of jewelry, watches, silverware and crystal M Scotch Brite Cloths An extraordinary cloth that has oil or water absorbing qualities. Lifts out liquids, greases and dirt particles, without leaving any smear or residue. Very durable wipes that can be machine washed in clod water then air dried. (Do not bleach) 22. Lint Free Cloths Non- abrasive, lint free cleaning cloths restore luster and brilliance to articles of jewelry and precious stones. Scratch proof cleaning action is gentle and reliable. Size 9 X Jewelry Wipes A moist cloth that removes dirt and tarnish from gold, silver and all non-ferrous metals. Will not scratch or mar the surfaces of fine articles of jewelry. Each dispenser contains 25 dry wipes. SIZE PC X 5 PC X 10 PC X 14 PC X 17 PC X 21 PC X /2 X 14 1 /2 6 X 7 1 /2 COLOR PC-740 PC-746 WHITE PC-741 PC-747 BLUE PC-742 PC-748 GREEN PC-743 PC-749 YELLOW PC-744 PC-750 RED PC-754 PC-755 PC-757 COLOR WHITE- FOR PEARL BLUE- FOR DIAMOND JEWELRY WIPES 24. 3M Safety Goggles Impact resistant eye shields offer vital protection during bench work, carving, grinding and buffing. Large clear lenses allow a wide field of view. LS-391 SILVER GLASS LS-393 CLEAR GLASS 161

142 POLISHING 25. Split Lapping Machine -Floor Model A sturdy machine mounted on a steel table. Powered by a totally enclosed ball bearing motor 1 /2hp speed 3450 rpm with ports for connection to a dust collector. This machine is ideal for finishing flat or contoured surfaces, and provides the operator with a clear view. Includes a tapered mandrel and a work light. Suitable for 6, 7 and 8 felt split laps. BF-353 BF-354 SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz 26. Split Lapping Machine- Benchtop Model Similar to the above model but portable so as to be mounted on a bench. Unit is complete with motor switch, grounded connecting cord and an adjustable work light. BF-350 BF-352 SPECIFICATION 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz 27. Finger Guard Safety Tape An alternative to finger guards, protection tape readily adheres and is easy to apply and remove. Made of surgical grade gauze, it conforms to the contours of the finger. Ideal protection from the hazards of sharp edges and hot surfaces. Size 3 /4 wide X 9 length. 16 pcs in a roll. 30. Suede Finger Guard Made of soft leather, for comfort, it protects fingers from burns or abrasion during grinding, polishing and finishing operations. PC-699 SAFETY TAPE 28. 3M Vetrap Tapes Natural rubber latex, light and durable, this new nonadhesive wrap sticks to itself, but not to the skin. Protects fingers and wrists. All are 2 wide X 5 length. PC-700 PC-701 PC-702 PC-703 MEDIUM-OPEN END LARGE--OPEN END MEDIUM-CLOSED END LARGE-CLOSED END PC-704 PC-705 PC-706 PC-707 PC-708 COLOR WHITE PINK RED GREEN BLUE 31. Rubber Finger Cots Superior quality rubber, provides a comfortable grip and protects finger tips during grinding and polishing. 29. Inspection Cotton Gloves An absolute necessity that needs to be worn when handling precious metal and stones. Made of special cotton fabric, it is invaluable while inspecting jewelry. PC-800 PC-801 COTTON GLOVE-LARGE COTTON GLOVE-SMALL PC-676 PC-677 PC-678 PC /2 - SMALL 12- MEDIUM 13- LARGE 14- EX- LARGE 162

143 32. Initial Polishing Compounds POLISHING These compounds are used for the initial preparation of metal surfaces, as they have a blend of mild abrasive in a carrier of waxes. This graded abrasive may be applied to any muslin or treated buff wheel. It improves the surface as cast, to a dull satin matt finish. Bobbing Compounds A fast cutting medium that smoothes gold, silver or other non-ferrous alloys. Adheres well to buffs or laps. Brown Tripoli Standard brown colored compound that reduces scratch or filing marks to a dull satin finish. 4X White Diamond A medium cutting compound that is less aggressive and is preferred for soft metal alloys, gold and silver. Gray Star A free cutting abrasive of fine particle size that leaves a soft bright pre-finish on platinum and palladium. 33. Soft Polishing Compounds PC-037 PC-035 PC-044 PC-039 PC-040 PC lb 1 lb 1 lb WATER SOLUBLE 1 lb STANDARD 1 lb PREMIUM 1 lb After initial polishing, the next stage is to enhance the surface of materials from a dull satin to a medium bright finish. At this point, the surface of the metal and alloys improves appreciably, as fine hair line scratches are virtually non-existent, and the surface exhibits a medium luster. These compounds may be used on tight muslin wheels or buffs. Zam A crocus compound that produces scratch free surfaces on all precious metals. May also be used for polishing soft semiprecious stones. Leaves a bright mirror finish on the surface. PC lb -GREEN Fabuluster A soft polishing compound formulated for working on plastics, fiberglass or soft metals. Very adaptable for use with flannel or chamois wheels. 34. Rouge Polishing Compounds PC lb -WHITE Rouge polishing is the ultimate step to achieve maximum luster. A superfine polishing compound that is well accepted for use on muslin, flannel, or chamois wheels. Has an extremely light cutting action to impart a mirror finish on all precious metals. Red: High luster, final polish for gold, silver and other soft non-ferrous metals. PC-011 PC-012 PC lb BAR 1 /2 lb BAR 1 /4 lb BAR Green: A special rouge polishing compound for chrome, stainless steel, white gold and platinum. PC-015 PC-016 PC lb BAR 1 /2 lb BAR 1 /4 lb BAR Black: Very effective rouge compound for silver and silver alloys. PC /4 lb ROUND Yellow: A premium quality rouge that works extremely well on yellow gold and other non-ferrous metals, except silver. PC-029 PC lb BAR 1 /2 lb BAR White: Recommended as the best polishing rouge for an ultra shine on white gold, platinum and palladium. PC /4 lb ROUND 163

144 POLISHING 35. Dialux Polishing Compounds A select type of super soft abrasive, uniformly blended with a carrier wax. These compounds have special features that allow good adhesion to the fibers of brushes, buffs or felts. Only minimal quantities need to be used. Bar size 4 x 1 1 /4 x 1 1 /8 Red Dialux: Produces a brilliant shine on yellow gold, but may also be used for silver. Green Dialux: All purpose medium for hard alloys such as chromium, cobalt and stainless steel. White Dialux: For reflective polishing of silver and silver alloys. Blue Dialux: A general compound that may be used for all metals. Orange Dialux: Produces a high luster on soft metals. Yellow Dialux: Gives a bright finish to soft brass, bronze and copper. Gray Dialux: Best for producing reflective surfaces on stainless steel. COLOR PC-050 RED PC-051 GREEN PC-052 WHITE PC-053 BLUE PC-054 PC-055 PC-056 COLOR ORANGE YELLOW GRAY 36. Menzerna Rouge A unique type of rouge formulated with a blend of soft abrasives and a bonding agent. Generates a balanced cutting action and extends well, so that just a little compound is needed. Green Rouge: For a bright finish on chrome, white gold and stainless steel. Blue Rouge: A medium finish polishing compound for almost all metals. Red Rouge: Achieves a brilliant shine on gold and silver. Brown Rouge: Typical tripoli pre-polish. An aggressive compound which is best for removing scratches from soft metals and alloys. Yellow Rouge: More of a bobbing compound often used in place of the brown rouge. Platinum Compound: Imparts a very high quality surface finish on platinum. COLOR WT. PC-070 GREEN 250g PC-071 BLUE 250g PC-072 RED 250g PC-073 BROWN 250g PC-074 YELLOW 250g PC-075 CARROT PLATINUM 100g COLOR WT. PC-063 GREEN 1.3Kg PC-064 BLUE 1.2Kg PC-065 RED 1.3Kg PC-066 BROWN 1.2Kg PC-067 YELLOW 1.2Kg PC-068 CARROT PLATINUM 200g KOYO Premium Platinum Rouge A finishing compound, manufactured from carefully graded abrasives, blended with additives to give high reflective surfaces to non-ferrous metals and stainless steels. K-1 Green Rouge: General purpose for preliminary finishing applications. K-2 Green Rouge: Intermediate stage finishing compound. Alox-5 White: For final finish, to achieve a distinctive luster. 38. Platinum Rouge- Japan COLOR WT. PC-059 K-1 GREEN 1lb PC-061 K-2 GREEN 1 /4lb PC-060 ALOX 5-WHITE 1 /4lb-355g PC-062 ALOX 5-WHITE 1lb-90g A selected grade of polishing compound formulated for ultra bright finishing of platinum. Uniformly blended and manufactured under strict quality control. Exceptional adherence to buffs, brushes or felts. Five different grades to achieve surfaces from matt to super shine. First Cut Rouge- 800: For initial smoothing of waviness and roughness. Medium Cut Rouge-1500: For removal of light scratch marks. Fine Cut Rouge- 4000: To further improve the surface prior to final finishing. Extra Shine Rouge- 6000: Enhances the surface to exhibit a bright finish. Super Shine Rouge- 8000: Provides a very high luster and leaves a mirror bright finish. Picca Blue: Ultra bright finish for platinum and gold. COLOR WT. PC-080 GRAY-800 1lb PC-081 WHITE lb PC-082 WHITE /2lb PC-083 WHITE /2lb PC-084 WHITE /2lb PC-085 PICCA-BLUE 1 /4lb

145 RING TOOLS 1. Kagan Wedding Ring Sizer Easy to use for all rings without stone settings. This sturdy unit bolts to the work bench, is a down stroke model that operates with minimal effort. Enlarge or reduce rings with this combination machine. Accepts all ring sizes up to #14 and widths up to 12mm. The reducing die is reversible and has 12 different ring dies for reductions. Sizer is built horizontal so that the user has more control while sizing rings. 4. Ring Stretcher with Reducer A heavy duty upright model that bolts to the work bench. Very even expansion for reduction of ring bands up to size #15 and widths up to 12 mm. Six leaf expansion mandrel is calibrated for approximate ring size. The reduction die is reversible. Not for use on stone set rings. RI-127 RI-128 KAGAN RING SIZER REPLACEMENT SPLINE RI-131 RI Bracelet Stretcher The sturdy cast iron base encloses the gear mechanism that spreads the leaf springs on the down stroke and retracts on the up stroke. Compact space saving unit may be bolted to the work bench. A quick way to enlarge bracelets up to 3 in diameter. Do not use for stone set bracelets. RI-130 RI-129 RI-131 RI-132 TWO CONES AND REDUCER SPLINE FOR RI-130 STRETCHER WITH REDUCER SPLINE FOR RI-131 RI-125 RI-126 BRACELET STRETCHER REPLACEMENT SPLINE 5. Ergonomic Ring Stretcher Premium quality, space saving design. Made in stainless steel. Comfortable non-slip grip. Smooth rotary action controls gradual expansion of a four leaf mandrel to enlarge rings. Calibrated for all sizes. Do not use for stone set rings. 3. Electronic Ring Stretcher An advanced design for sizing rings effortlessly. Power operated stretching device smoothly expands rings to the required size. Tapered sleeve is graduated for easy calibration of all ring sizes. Operates on 8 AAA batteries (not included). An adaptor is available for operation on 110/220 V. RI-136 RING SIZE #(3-13) RI-137 ADAPTOR 110/ 220V RI-135 RING SIZE #(3-13) 6. Ring Shank Bender A robust tool with stepped eccentric bending die and matched die blocks. A very useful tool to bend and shape flat, oval or engraved strip material. Large lever handle provides effortless working on even the hardest materials. RI-134 RING SHANK BENDER 166

146 7. Kagan Ring Roller For enlarging stone set rings without disturbing the head. May be used as miniature rolling mill for gold or copper wire when furish with optional handle. This sizer is equipped with 8 rollers for knife edge, oval, half-round and flat shanks. 10. Ring Setters RING TOOLS A universal tool that allows all around accessibility for setting. Nine nylon inserts cover the entire range of ring sizes from #2-13. The head unscrews for alternative mounting in a vise. RI-150 RI-149 RI-112 RI-113 RING ROLLER REPLACEMENT HANDLE AN-417 RI-149 RI-150 AN-417 SETTERS CLAMP INSERTS FOR RI-149 BENCH PIN FOR RI Stone Ring Stretcher A well made bench unit that is very necessary for enlarging all stone set rings. It rolls out the shank, stretches the metal to expand, without loosening prongs or stressing the stone settings. A set of 17 polished rollers are included to accommodate all ring sizes. 11. Power Hand Ring Stretcher An easy to operate gadget, that is compact yet powerful, for enlarging rings. The ring sits on the tapered expander, and increase in size is effected by turning the screw mechanism. Expansion is gradual and accurately controlled. Do not use for stone set rings. RI-119 RI-120 STONE RING STRETCHER REPLACEMENT ROLLS 9. Econo Ring Stretcher A well made stretcher, used to enlarge rings of all sizes up to #14. Unit has a stable base with smooth polished splines to prevent marring. Effortless movement by a lever contributes to gradual enlargement of rings to calibrated sizes. RI Rathburn Ring Stretcher POWER HANDER Stretch rings economically with this easy to use fixture. Suitable for ring sizes #6 and larger. Ring is placed over the multi stepped collet and stretching is accomplished by gently tapping the tapered steel plug. Not for use with stone set rings. RI-133 RING STRETCHER RI-138 RATHBURN RING STRETCHER 167

147 RING TOOLS F4 F6 F8 F9 F10 F12 F14 F16 M4 M6 M8 M9 M10 M12 M14 K1 CM13 R1 R2 R3 CF7 CF10 Female Male 13. MILLrite - Millgrain Machine This unique device has all the features needed to create professional decorative designs on rings, sizes #2-13. A sturdy machine that includes a work holding device, a tool clamp, and an ingenious tool feed mechanism. All moving parts are ground for a precision fit. Easy to operate with minimal effort. Imprinted designs exhibit a high degree of brilliance. Use with lathe millgrain tools. MG-350 MG-351 MG-352 MG-353 MG-354 MG-355 MG-356 MG-357 MG-358 MG-359 MG-360 MG-361 MG-345 MG Lathe Millgrain MILLGRAIN MACHINE COMPLETE SET OF 9 COLLETS Emboss decorative designs on the edges of rings and bracelets. Embossing wheels are 6 mm in diameter mounted on square tool shanks that fit on a millgrain machine or lathe. Wheels are hardened and tempered to ensure long tool life. Select from a variety of patterns to suit individual creations. M4 MALE F4 FEMALE M6 MALE F6 FEMALE M8 MALE F8 FEMALE M9 MALE F9 FEMALE M10 MALE F10 FEMALE M12 MALE F12 FEMALE MG-362 M14 MALE MG-363 F14 FEMALE MG-364 R1 ROPE MG-365 R2 ROPE MG-366 R3 ROPE MG-367 K1 COIN EDGE MG-368 CM13 DIAMOND MG-369 CM15 DIAMOND MG-370 HB DESIGN MG-371 F16 FEMALE MG-372 CF 7 MG-373 CF Ring Cutter Sure grip handle, all nickel plated tool. Extremely safe to use, while cutting rings on fingers. Safety guard slides between ring and finger when saw blade cuts through shank. 16. Mark A Size Reducing ring size is simplified by Mark A Size ring gauge. Has quarter size increments from 1 /4 to 3 full sizes. 17. Display Rings Use for displaying precious color stones. Squeeze shanks sides together and prongs slide apart to hold the stone. PJ-900 RING CUTTER DELUXE RI-109 PJ-901 SPARE BLADE 18. Ring Guards RING MARK A SIZE RD-171 RD-172 RD-173 RD-174 CHROME SMALL CHROME LARGE GOLD SMALL GOLD LARGE Accurate marking eliminates guess work when rings are to be resized. A complete set of gauges in tempered steel, with quarter size increments up to three full sizes. 168 RG-001 YELLOW LADIES RG-002 YELLOW GENTS RG-003 YELLOW GIANT RG-004 YELLOW JUMBO RG-005 WHITE LADIES RG-006 WHITE GENTS RG-007 WHITE GIANT RG-008 WHITE JUMBO

148 SAFETY 1. Lightweight Face Shield Provides complete face and neck protection from grits of grinding, polishing and drilling. Made of impact resistant clear view material, it must be worn over spectacles or goggles. Fits easily with an adjustable headband. LS-392 FACE SHIELD 6. 3M Vetrap Tapes Natural rubber latex, light and durable, this new non-adhesive wrap sticks to itself, but not to the skin. Protects fingers and wrists. Size 2 wide X 5 length. COLOR PC-704 WHITE PC-705 PINK PC-706 RED PC-707 GREEN PC-708 BLUE 7. 3M Dust Mask Complete protection from toxic dust and other harmful airborne particles. The mask is comfortable, filters air and does not interfere with breathing. A necessity when drilling, grinding and finishing. 2. Leather Finger Cots Soft leather guard necessary for use in protecting fingers from compounds, heat and abrasion during grinding and finishing. SA-001 SA-002 PC-680 SMALL- #2 PC-681 LARGE- #6 3. Suede Finger Guard Made of soft leather, for comfort, it protects fingers from burns or abrasion during grinding, polishing and finishing operations. SA-001 SA-002 DUST MASK DUST MIST RESPIRATOR 8. Ventilated Safety Goggles Inexpensive, impact resistant goggles, provide complete eye protection from sparks and debris during grinding and polishing. Ventilated side guards provide comfort and reduce fogging. Fits over spectacles. One size suits all. Meets ANSI specifications. PC-700 PC-701 PC-702 PC Rubber Finger Cots MEDIUM-OPEN END LARGE-OPEN END MEDIUM-CLOSED END LARGE-CLOSED END Superior quality rubber provides a comfortable grip and protects finger tips during grinding and polishing. LS-390 SAFETY GOGGLES 9. Safety Goggles for Platinum Light plastic wrap-around frames with safety colored lenses protect eyes when melting metal, soldering or brazing. PC-676 PC-677 PC-678 PC Safety Apron 11 1 /2 - SMALL 12- MEDIUM 13- LARGE 14- EX- LARGE Durable tie-back denim apron protects clothing at the work place from grime, molten metal and sparks. Provided with easy accessible pockets for small tools. SHADE LS LS M Safety Goggles Impact resistant eye shields offer vital protection during bench work, carving, grinding and buffing. Large clear lenses allow a wide field of view. LS-391 LS-393 SA WORK APRON LS-391 LS-393 SILVER GLASS CLEAR GLASS

149 SAW FRAMES & SAWBLADES SF Adjustable Saw Frames-Econo Made of the finest materials, this adjustable sawframe is well balanced and has a comfortable hand grip. SF-600 SF-788 SF Saw Frame- Swiss SF-101 OSCAR SF-201 ECONO 3 This sawframe is adjustable, ultra-light, and perfectly balanced. Ergonomic handle reduces fatigue. Made of quality steel with a non-glare finish. SIZE SF Adjustable Saw Frame - France Special rectangular profile 5 X 7mm contributes to extra rigidity of the saw frame. Quick tension system by a quarter turn of the tightening lever holds blade taut. Size 80 X 130mm SF-600 SF-601 THUMB LOCK REGULAR 172 SF Adjustable Saw Frames- German Forged and hardened tool steel with adjustable frame and serrated clamps to hold the blade firmly. Even accommodates broken blades. SIZE SF /2 SF SF SF SF SF SF-761 WING NUTS 5. Deluxe Saw Frames -France An excellent saw with a stainless steel frame and black varnished wooden handle. Perfect blade alignment is assured by smooth sliding head. Jaws are case hardened tempered steel. SIZE NO SF mm 0 SF mm 1 SF mm 2 SF mm 3 SF mm 4 SF mm 5 6. Saw Frames with Tension Screw Forged hardened tool steel adjustable frame with a serrated clamp to hold the blade firmly. Alignment is accurate and a tensioning screw is provided to eliminate blade wobble. SIZE SF /4 SF /4 SF SF-785 5

150 7. Gems Sawblades Swiss made, high quality, long lasting tempered steel resists breakage and drifting when cutting. Packed in one gross (144 blades). SIZE SIZE SB-100 #0 SB-101 #1 SB-102 #2 SB-103 #3 SB-104 #4 SB-105 #5 8. Antilope Sawblades SB-120 #2/0 SB-130 #3/0 SB-140 #4/0 SB-150 #5/0 SB-160 #6/0 German made sawblades recognized and accepted by jewelers worldwide. Packed in one gross (144 blades). SIZE SB-161 #1 SB-162 #2 SB-163 #3 SB-164 #4 SB-165 #5 9. Herkules Sawblades SIZE SB-220 #2/0 SB-230 #3/0 SB-240 #4/0 SB-250 #5/0 SB-251 #6/0 Herkules sawblades are world renowned. Made of special alloy steel, uniformly tempered. Packed in one gross (144 blades). SIZE SB-260 #0 SB-261 #1 SB-262 #2 SB-263 #3 SB-264 #4 SB-265 #5 10. Econo Sawblades SIZE SB-320 #2/0 SB-330 #3/0 SB-340 #4/0 SB-350 #5/0 SB-360 #6/0 A good quality sawblade at a very affordable price. Made in India. Packed in one gross (144 blades). SIZE SIZE SB-400 #0 SB-420 #2/0 SB-401 #1 SB-430 #3/0 SB-402 #2 SB-440 #4/0 SB-403 #3 SB-450 #5/0 SB-404 #4 SB-460 #6/0 SB-405 #5 11. Pike Sawblades Swiss made high quality sawblades useful for accurate and precise work. Packed in one gross (144 blades). SIZE SB-500 #0 SB-501 #1 SB-502 #2 SB-503 #3 SB-504 #4 SB-505 #5 SIZE SB-520 #2/0 SB-530 #3/0 SB-540 #4/0 SB-550 #5/0 SB-560 #6/0 SB-570 #7/0 SAW FRAMES & SAWBLADES 173

151 SAW FRAMES & SAWBLADES 12. Flash Sawblades The finest Swiss sawblade. Known in the industry for its exceptional flexibility. Packed in one gross (144 blades). SIZE SB-600 #0 SB-601 #1 SB-602 #2 SB-603 #3 SB-604 #4 SB-605 #5 SIZE SB-620 #2/0 SB-630 #3/0 SB-640 #4/0 SB-650 #5/0 SB-660 #6/0 SB-670 #7/0 SB-680 #8/0 13. Spiral Sawblades Special form sawblades to cut rubber, plastic, wax, plaster and other hardened materials. Allows cuts to be made in any direction. Packed in one gross (144 blades). SIZE SB-800 #0 SB-801 #1 SB-802 #2 SIZE SB-803 #3 SB-820 #2/0 SB-830 #3/0 14. Bench Mounted Saw Table Made of satin chrome brass, this saw table may be fastened to your work bench. The device permits linear or multi-contoured cuts to be easily made as it allows free movement in all directions. Even thin sheet can be sawed with almost no vibration. SB-001 SAW TABLE 15. Tube Cutter Cut rods or tubing up to 1 /8 diameter with precision. This jig is made of steel and is provided with a wooden handle. An adjustable stop allows you to make repeated cuts to accurate lengths. SH-730 TUBE CUTTER 16. Bur Lube A carefully formulated compound that provides optimum balance of cooling and lubrication. Reduces friction and heat build up, thereby extending tool life. Essential to use when drilling, cutting or grinding. BR-700 BR-701 BR-702 BUR LUBE 2 oz BUR LUBE LIQUID 4 oz BUR LUBE PASTE 4 oz T TEETH PER INCH. SIZE T D T. P. I # # # # # #1/ #2/ #3/ #4/ #5/ #6/ #7/ #8/ D 174

152 SCALES Tanita Scales 1. Tanita Model 1210 Mini Scale weighs in carat, troy ounce, grain and gram. Three-LR44 watch batteries included. Specifications Capacity Readability Carat 0-50 ct ct. Troy oz ozt ozt. Grain gr 0.05 gr Gram 0-10 g g Dimension 6 X 4 1 /2 X 1 SC-481 SC CT 100 CT 2. Model 1220-P Gram and pennyweight scale. Two-5004LC batteries included. Specifications Capacity Readability Gram g 0.1 g Pennyweight 64 dwt 0.1 dwt Dimension 2 3 /4 X 4 1 /8 X 3 /8 MODEL SC-420 # Model 1475 Weighs in gram. Three-LR44 batteries included. Specifications Capacity 1000g Readability 1g- 0~500g, 2g-500~1000g Dimension 3 1 /2 X 5 3 /4 X 3 /4 MODEL SC-475 # Model 1212 Weighs in pennyweight and gram. Four-AAA batteries included. Specifications Capacity Capacity 300g Readability 0.1g-0~150, 0.2g-150~300g Pennyweight 0.1 dwt-0~100 dwt, 0.2 dwt -100~193 dwt Dimension 6 3 /8 X 3 5 /8 X 3 /4 MODEL SC-472 # Model 1475T Weighs in gram. Three-LR44 batteries included. Specifications Capacity 1200g Readability 1g-0~600g, 2g-600~1200 Dimension 3 1 /2 X 5 3 /4 X 3 /4 MODEL SC-474 #1475T 6. Model 1477 Weighs in pennyweight and gram. Three-LR44 batteries included. Specifications Capacity 100g Readability 0.1g-0~50 g, 0.2g-50~100 g Pennyweight 0.1 dwt-0~32 dwt, 0.2 dwt-32~64 dwt Dimension 6 X 3 X 5 /8 MODEL SC-477 #

153 Tanita Scales SCALES 7. Model TPK-100 Weighs in pennyweight and gram. Solar powered. Specifications Capacity Accuracy 100g 0.1g-0~50 g, 0.2 g-50~100 g SC-451 MODEL #TPK Model 7020 Weighs in pennyweight and gram. Four-AAA batteries included. Comes with calculator. Specifications Capacity 100g Readability 0.1g-0~50 g, 0.2g-50~100 g Troy oz / /0.01 ozt. Ounce 0-1.6/ /0.01 oz. Pennyweight 0-32 /0.1 dwt /0.2 dwt Dimension 6 1 /8 X 3 3 /4 X 3 /4 MODEL SC-480 # Model 1140 Scale Weighs in grams and ounce only. Four-R03 or AAA batteries included. Specifications Capacity 1000g Readability 1g-0~500g, 2g-500~1000g Dimension 8 X 5 3 /4 X 1 1 /2 MODEL SC-452 # Model KP-Series Scale Weighs in grams, ounce, troy ounce and pennyweight. 5004LC batteries included. Specifications Capacity 400g Readability 0.1g-0~200g, 0.2g-200~400g Ounce oz oz oz 0.01 oz Troy oz ozt ozt 0.01 Pennyweight dwt 0.1 dwt dwt 0.2 dwt Dimension 5 1 /8 X 7 1 /8 X 1 /2 RANGE SC-486 KP g SC-488 KP g 11. Model 1479V Scale Weighs in grams only. Alkaline batteries included. Specifications Capacity Readability Gram g 0.1 g Dimension 3 X 6 1 /8 X 5 /8 MODEL SC-473 #1479V 177

154 SCALES 12. Ohaus Compact Jewelry Scale Portable, and simple to set up, it is perfectly compatible for weighing jewelry. Highly accurate and reliable, it features an easy to read display, a large weighing surface and an auto power shut off. Powered by 3 -AA Alkaline batteries included. 15. Ohaus Scout II An easy to operate balance for jewelry and laboratory weighing. The sealed front panel has a molded spill ring. Features include high contrast LCD display with weighing modes, parts counting and other applications. Code SC-007 / CS-200J Capacity(g) X Readability 200g X 0.1g 7.05oz X 0.01 oz dwt X 0.1 dwt 6.43 ozt X 0.01 ozt Weighing Unit g, oz, oz troy, and dwt Pan Size 5 3 /4 X 5 1 /4 Dimensions 8 X 5 1 /2 X 1 1 /2 13. Ohaus Dial-O-Gram Balance The Dial-O-Gram provides the durability and versatility for weighing solids, liquids and powders. Features a removable stainless steel platform, spring loaded zero adjustor and dial operation for speed and convenience. Code-110V/ 60 Hz SC-001 SC-003 SC-008 SC-005 Code-220V/ 50 Hz SC-002 SC-004 SC-009 SC-006 Model SC2020 SC4010 SC4020 SC6010 Capacity(g) 200g 400g 400g 600g Readability Weighing Modes g, oz, lb, oz troy, dwt and parts counting Pan Size 4 DIA. 5 X 5 3 /4 5 X 5 3 /4 Dimensions 6 3 /4 X 2 3 /8 X 8 1 /4 16. Ohaus Navigator Legal-for-Trade Navigator offers 12 weighing modes and counting features. Sealed front for protection from liquid spillage. LCD has large 6 digit, 7 segment display. A/C power or batteries. Code SC-012 / Capacity(g) X Readability 610g / 2610g X 0.1g Pan Size (Dia. X Depth) 6 X 0.8 Dimensions 18 X 12 X Ohaus Triple Beam Balance The triple beam balance is well equipped to handle any weighing job, solids, liquids or powders. Features a stainless steel pan, three notched, tiered beams with center reading and a spring loaded zero adjust compensator. Code SC-010 / 610g Capacity(g) X Readability 610g X 0.1g Weighing Unit g, oz, lb, oz troy, and dwt Pan Size 4 3 /4 DIAMETER Dimensions 7 1 /4 X 10 1 /2 X 2 1 /4 17. Ohaus Diamond MCT500 A rugged dependable balance that combines unsurpassed value with solid reliability. Features a die cast metal base, tare key and an ergonomic LCD display. Easy access and total environmental protection by a three door draft shield. Code SC-013 / 750-SO Capacity(g) X Readability 610g / 2610g X 0.1g Pan Size (Dia. X Depth) 6 X 0.8 Dimensions 18 X 12 X Code SC-011 / MCT500 Capacity(g) X Readability 500 ct/ 0.001ct Weighing Unit ct, grains, dwt, oz troy, g, tacl(3) Pan Size 3 1 /2 DIA. Dimensions 8 1 /2 X 14 1 /3 X 13 1 /2

155 18. Mettler Toledo Scales Legal-for-Trade World renowned Mettler scales manufactured and tested to ISO 9001 standards. Designed specifically with advanced digital technology to guarantee accuracy and reliable performance. Simple switch over for weighing in different units such as g, kg, lb, oz, ozt, dwt, ct, GN, tl and mommes. Clear key marking, simple functions and wide angle back-lit LCD display for error free reading. All glass shield offers good access and view. Weighing pan of a special chrome steel alloy for protection against scratches. Optional features: Battery pack for 10 hours portable operation. Computer printer interface (RS232C). Secondary displays for easy customer viewing. Model CB203/ A Model CB603/ A Model CB1503/ DR-A Code 110V/ 60Hz SC-020 SC-021 SC-022 Max. Capacity 210 ct / 610 ct 610 ct 500 ct / 1600 ct Readability ct / 0.01 ct ct ct / 0.01 ct Taring range ct/ ct ct ct Repeatability ct / ct ct ct / ct Pan Size Ø 80mm Ø 80mm Ø 80mm Dimensions (W X D X H) 190 X 290 X 252mm 190 X 290 X 252mm 190 X 290 X 339mm High Performance Gold Scales Legal-for-Trade A compact elegant balance specially developed for weighing of gold and jewelry. Error-free instant results, LCD display with quick change from gram to pennyweight to troy ounce and more. Special scratch resistant chrome alloy steel pan optimized for everyday use. Model GB1501/ A Model GB3001/ A Code 110V/ 60Hz SC-025 SC-026 Max. Capacity 1510g 3100g Readability 0.1g 0.1g Taring range g g Repeatability 0.05g 0.05g Pan Size 180 X 166mm 180 X 166mm Dimensions (W X D X H) 190 X 290 X 62mm 190 X 290 X 62mm Sturdily built, all metal housing balance with a state-of -the -art MonoBloc weighing cell that guarantees permanent shock and overload protection. Touch key technology for easy change over from gram to penny weight, troy ounce and more. Model GB6001/ S-A Model GB3002/ DR-A Model GB16001/A Code 110V/ 60Hz SC-027 SC-028 SC-029 Max. Capacity 6100g 600g / 3100g 16100g Readability 0.1g 0.01g / 0.1g 0.1g Taring range g g g Repeatability 0.05g 0.05g 0.5g Pan Size 180 X 166mm 180 X 166mm 349 X 232mm Dimensions (W X D X H) 190 X 290 X 62mm 190 X 290 X 62mm 381 X 321 X 92mm 19. Mettler Toledo PL-S Scales The PL-S precision balances are the ideal equipment for easy weighing tasks. A choice of applications for versatile needs. An extremely compact design and the possibility of battery supply or internal battery charger for convenient portability. Dimensions (W X D X H) 194 X 225 X 67mm Model PL202-S Model PL601-S Model PL1501-S Model PL6000-S Code 110V/ 60Hz SC-040 SC-041 SC-042 SC-043 Max. Capacity 210g 610g g Readability 0.01g 0.01g 0.1g 1g Taring range g g g g Repeatability 0.008g 0.08g 0.08g 0.8g Pan Size Ø 120mm Ø 160mm Ø 160mm Ø 160mm Accessories for Mettler SC-030 BATTERY PACK- FOR CB AND GB SERIES SC-031 INTERFACE CABLE-FOR CB AND GB SERIES SC-032 ANTI-THEFT DEVICE- FOR CB AND GB SERIES SC-033 CARRYING CASE- FOR GB SERIES SC-034 AUXILIARY DISPLAY LC/RS BLD SC-035 IMPACT CALCULATING PRINTER LC-P45 SCALES 179

156 SCALES 20. Sartorius Scales Model GM312 / GM612 Model GM1502/GM1205 Model GM3101 Code SC-230 / SC-231 SC-232 / SC-233 SC-235 Readability 0.01 g 0.01 g/0.05g 0.1 g Capacity 310 g /610 g 1,500 g /1,200 g 3,100 g Response time 1s 1s 1s Mass Units tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola, dwt, bat, k, tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola, dwt, bat, k, tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola, dwt, bat, k, MS, GN, mom, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt MS, GN, mom, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt MS, GN, mom, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt Optional 9V battery 9V battery 9V battery Pan size 180 X 180 mm 174 X 143 mm 174 X 143 mm Dimensions (W X D X H) 204 X 297 X 80 mm 188 X 250 X 70 mm 188 X 250 X 70 mm Model GC503 Model GC1503 Model GC2102 Code SC-210 SC-215 SC-217 Readability ct 0.001/0.01 ct 0.01 ct (0.001 g) Capacity 505 ct 600/1500 ct 2,100 ct (420 g) Response time 1.5s 1.5s 1.5s Mass Units tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola, dwt, bat, k, tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola, dwt, bat, k, tlh, tls, tlt, tlc, ct, tola,dwt, bat, k, MS, GN, mom, g, kg,lb, oz, ozt MS, GN, mom, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt MS, GN, mom, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt Pan size 80 mm 80 mm 115 mm Dimensions (W X D X H) 188 X 250 X 233mm 204 X 270 X 265 mm 204 X 270 X 265 mm 21. Pennyweight/Gram Scale A single pan precision scale that eliminates the need of individual weights. Precision fulcrum ensures accurate weighing. A leveling screw is provided for set up on uneven surfaces. 22. Mini Balance Sensitive (0.01ct) miniature pan balnce to weigh diamonds and presious stones. Select from two different models. Includes twezeer and calibrated weights.come in a polished wooden box with a carrying case. SC-410 SC-450 CAPACITY 10 ct 50 ct SC DWT/ GRAM SCALE Scales are warrantied by the manufacturer. Warranty coverage is voided if the product is tampered with or subjected to misuse in any way. Returns within 5 days after receiving the merchandise must be in the original packaging.

157 SCREWDRIVERS 1. Precision Screwdriver Sets Premium quality precision chrome plated screwdrivers with replacement blades. Anodized brass head freely rotates on ball bearings. Color coded for size. SD-007 SD-007 SD PCS SET (0.6, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.4, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5 AND 3.0mm) WITH 19 BLADES AND 2 SCREWS ROTATING STAND WITH 9 PCS SET 2. Precision Screwdrivers These are chrome plated brass and knurled for a light but sure grip. The head rotates on ball bearings. Color coded for size. SD-009 SIZE(MM) COLOR SD mm GREEN SD mm PINK SD mm YELLOW SD mm BLACK SD mm RED SD mm GRAY SD mm VIOLET SD mm ORANGE SD mm GREEN SD mm BLUE SD mm BROWN 3. Reversible Blade Screwdrivers Precision screwdrivers in straight knurled chromium plated brass. A mini chuck grips the blade at the lower end. Blades are ground on both sides and may be reversed when needed. Overall length 80mm. SD-318 SCREWDRIVER BLADES SIZE(MM) COLOR # SD-310 SD mm VIOLET 10 SD-311 SD mm BLUE 9 SD-312 SD mm WHITE 8 SD-313 SD mm RED 7 SD-314 SD mm BROWN 6 SD-315 SD mm GREEN 5 SD-316 SD mm BLACK 4 SD-317 SD mm YELLOW 3 SD-318 SET OF 6 (#3-#8) 4. Screwdrivers with Fixed Blades High precision screwdrivers in quality tool steel, heat treated for toughness to withstand wear. Bodies are knurled for a non-slip grip. 182 SD-006 SD-008 SD-010 SIZE(MM) COLOR SD mm PINK SD mm YELLOW SD mm BLACK SD mm RED SD mm GRAY SD mm VIOLET SD mm GREEN SD mm BLUE SD mm BROWN SD PCS SET WITH STAND ( mm) SD-008 STAND WITH SHARPENING STONE SD PCS SET ( mm)

158 SETTING TOOLS 1. Burnishers-Steel Polished, straight or curved steel blade, with comfortable hardwood handle. These tools may be used to open or close bezel settings in hard to reach places. Overall length 6 2. Adjustable Scraper DI-100 DI-101 STRAIGHT 1 3 /4 BLADE CURVED 2 BLADE This adjustable scraper has a holder and a lock screw to permit the setting of the hollow tool bit for depth of cut. Useful for fine detail scraping of excess solder. 3. Agate Burnishers 4. Setter s Tube Holder BS-400 SCRAPER 3 1 /2 LONG Made of natural stone. Straight, knife edged or cone pointed, this super polished surface smoothes all marks or other imperfections on jewelry. BR-725 STRAIGHT BR-726 KNIFE EDGE Comfortably shaped wooden handle has reinforced metal threaded spindle with chuck. Accepts interchangeable collets to hold tubes during stone setting. Can hold sizes from 1 /32 to 1 /8. 5. Setter s Hold It HO-017 WITH FOUR COLLETS This metal vise grips any odd shaped object in specially formed jaws. Additional top clamps may be aligned with a key to hold bracelets for stone mounting. Holds up to 12 settings and measures 5 1 /2 overall length. 6. Prong Lifting Pliers HO-020 SETTER S HOLD IT Special lap joint pliers with a double leaf spring. Provides gentle pressure on the prong and no pressure on the stone to avoid mar or fracture. One jaw is grooved to hold the prong and the other angled to support the under side to raise the prong gently. PJ-736 PRONG LIFTING PLIER 5 7. Ring Repair Set An ideal bench set for ring repair. The ring mandrel can be rotated and adjusted to any angle for convenience of working. Set includes ring mandrel with base and a well balanced hammer with changeable heads of steel, aluminum alloy or nylon. RI-114 RI-115 COMPLETE SET HAMMER WITH 3 HEADS 184

159 8. Prong Pusher A quality tool having a comfortable wood shaped handle with a grooved steel end. Use to push prong or crown points with unfailing accuracy. SETTING TOOLS DI-098 PRONG PUSHER 9. Bezel Pusher Square faced, hardened and polished steel pusher, mounted in a hardwood handle. Use for the initial tightening of prongs and beads. DI-099 BEZEL PUSHER 10. Bezel Roller Effortless method for rolling bezels around stones in rings. The semi circular highly polished steel head gently folds the metal over the stone. HO-035 BEZEL ROLLER 11. Bezel Mandrel Quite simply, the fastest way to form bezels in different shapes. May also be used to make decorative wire forms. These mandrels are made of case hardened steel, precision finished and polished. Mandrel portion is approx. 8 long with a 1 /2 to 1 /8 taper. SHAPE LENGTH GM-108 SQUARE 11 GM-109 ROUND 8 GM-110 TRIANGLE 11 GM-111 OVAL 11 GM-112 RECTANGLE 11 GM-113 ROUND Prong Lifter Plus with Bezel Pusher This new design has the advantage for opening cabochon with the additional feature of a prong pusher. Titanium coated is five times harder than steel and has a long life. Comes with a comfortable plastic grip handle. DI-091 DI-097 REGULAR TITANIUM COATED Titanium Coated 13. Prong Lifter- Economy A hardened steel tool that includes precision ground slots to fit all sizes of prongs. Virtually eliminates risk of damage to the stone while mounting, setting or re-tipping. DI-096 PRONG LIFTER 185

160 SETTING TOOLS 14. Ring Setters A universal tool that allows convenient positioning while setting. Nine nylon inserts for ring sizes from #2-13. The head unscrews for alternative mounting in a vise. RI-149 RI-150 SETTER S CLAMP INSERTS FOR RI Special Bench Pin Use this bench pin with the setters inside ring clamp. This fixture provides access to all around workability, contributing to higher productivity. 16. Swiss Beading Tools AN-417 BENCH PIN FOR RI-149 Hardened and polished concave tools for beading. Used to form beads to hold diamonds and other stones in mountings. Overall length 60mm with 2.35mm shank. Ø D(MM) 60MM Ø 2.35MM SIZE/ Ø D(MM) BD-700 #0/0.25 BD-701 #1/0.30 BD-702 #2/0.35 BD-703 #3/0.40 BD-704 #4/0.45 BD-705 #5/0.50 BD-706 #6/0.55 BD-707 #7/0.60 SIZE/ Ø D(MM) BD-708 #8/0.65 BD-709 #9/0.70 BD-710 #10/0.75 BD-711 #11/0.80 BD-712 #12/0.85 BD-713 #13/0.90 BD-714 #14/0.95 BD-715 #15/1.00 SIZE/ Ø D(MM) BD-716 #16/1.05 BD-717 #17/1.10 BD-718 #18/1.15 BD-719 #19/1.20 BD-720 #20/1.25 BD-721 #21/1.30 BD-722 #22/ Beading Tool Sets Steel tool has concave tip that puts beads on prongs to secure stones in mountings. Set of 12 from #5-16 (0.5 to 1.05mm). Set of 23 from #0-22 (0.25 to 1.35mm). All on plastic stands with a handle. BD-628 BD-629 Brass Insert BD-630 BD Beading Blocks 12 PCS 23 PCS BEADING TOOL HOLDER BEADING TOOL CASE Precisely formed round or rectangular shapes in hardened polished tool steel. These blocks are essential to re-shape the ends of the beading tools. BD-622 BD-623 BD-621 BD-624 BD-625 SUNK-ROUND-FRANCE RAISED-ROUND-FRANCE SUNK-RECTANGULAR-FRANCE RAISED-RECTANGULAR-FRANCE 40 HOLES ( mm)-SWISS 186

161 19. Setting Burnisher Sets Multiple uses as setting closers, burnishing or finishing tubes over stones. All sets include a heavy duty handle to secure the respective tool, except BR-733. Choice of five different sets. Set of 12- French BR-730 Dia mm. Set of 18- French BR-731 Dia mm. Set of 24- French BR-732 Dia BR mm. DIA mm mm mm PROGRESSION 0.25mm 0.50mm 1.00mm SETTING TOOLS BR-732 BR-730 Set of 29- German BR-733 Dia mm. Set of 16- Economy BR-734 Dia mm. 20. Final Touch Extremely easy to use for setting stones. Snap in prongs with a single light tap. The polyurethane base has numerous cavities to locate various stone sizes during setting. BR-733 BR Claw Setting Jig A complete set for making four, six or eight large or small prongs. Filing or sawing may be done while the setting is held in the jig. DI-102 FINAL TOUCH 22. Channel Setting Set- for Faro Handpiece #10 Incorporate this precise system to set stones professionally. A complete set that fits to the handpiece and allows you to control the cutting depth for channel set stones. This kit ensures stones are set straight, parallel and firmly in place. RI Ring Setter s Flanges CLAW SETTING A set of brass flanges in pairs to clamp wide or narrow band ring sizes #(1-15) in a vise without any mars. Useful for setting, engraving or repair work. HO-075 COMPLETE SET HO-074 RING SETTER S FLANGES 187

162 SETTING TOOLS 24. Hardwood Shellac Holders Shellac holders are available in round, flat face and rotating types. This hand held accessory holds the work piece while chasing, setting and engraving. Surfaces may be bonded with heated shellac to retain the article. The rotating wheel type may be locked in any position by a wing nut to allow viewing. To remove articles dissolve in denatured alcohol. DI-320 DI-321 DI-323 DI-322 HO-306 DI-320 ROUND 4 - COATED SHELLAC DI-321 ROUND 5 - COATED SHELLAC DI-322 FLAT FACE-1 1 /2 DI-323 FLAT FACE-2 HO-306 ROTATING WHEEL 25. Shellac Flake & Stick Very useful to secure odd shaped articles of jewelry when stone setting. Shellac becomes soft with application of heat, and hardens with cold water. Remove articles by dissolving in denatured alcohol. 27. Stone Setter s Cement Forms an excellent bond for stones when melted and applied to dops. Securely holds the stone for polishing and finishing. 29. Opticon Fracture Sealer A two part epoxy that penetrates hair line cracks, and is very effective for sealing fractures in stones. 8 fl oz sealer, 1 oz hardener. DI-316 DI M Glue & Gel S/ STICK-1 lb BOX (4 PCS.) FLAKES-1 lb A fast curing gel, bonds in a minute, and is very easy to apply. Needle tip dispenser fills small voids and forms a strong bond. Useful to bond jewelry, glass, stone, plastic and wood. SIZE DI X 4 X 5 / Epoxy 330/220 Epoxy 330: A clear epoxy for invisible bonds on glass, stone, or findings. Exhibits a high polish on inlay work. Air curing time approx. 2 hours. Apply light heat to reduce curing time. Epoxy 220: A heat resistant epoxy for bonding findings to stone. Has a higher tensile strength. Air curing time approx. 8 hours. Low heat reduces curing time. EP-009 FRACTURE SEALER 30. Attack Epoxy Solvent A solvent that works on stone, wood or glass to remove excess cured epoxy. EP-001 EP-002 SUPER GLUE GEL-6001 SUPER STRENGTH-6004 EP-007 EPOXY 220 EP-008 EPOXY 330 EP-005 CAPACITY 8 fl oz 188

163 SOLDERING 1. Adjustable Scraper This adjustable scraper has a holder and a lock screw to set the hollow tool bit for depth of cut. Useful for fine detail scraping of excess solder. 4. Titanium Solder Pic Solder will not adhere to this titanium rod fitted with a heat resistant handle. Used to spread solder to the desired area when soldering gold or silver. BS Tungsten Solder Pic SCRAPER 3 1 /2 LONG Made of tungsten, this pick will withstand high temperatures. A good aid for fine detail soldering. Ideal for use on platinum, but may also be used for gold and silver. SP Soldering Tweezers TITANINUM Cross locking stainless steel tweezers with serrated tips and fiber handles, to protect hands from heat when soldering. Overall length 6 3 /4. SP-360 TUNGSTEN 3. Copper Tongs These tongs are suitable to use when immersing articles in pickling or acidic solutions. Will not contaminate nor corrode the solutions. TW-473 TW Solder Cutting Plier BENT STRAIGHT Ideal tool for cutting uniform pieces of solder. All steel construction, lapped joints and plastic coated handles, for easy shearing. Overall length 5 /130mm. TW-444 BENT- 9 TW-445 FISH TAIL- 9 PJ-038 SOLDER CUTTING PLIER 7. Third Hand Round Base Useful accessory that assists positioning of work pieces during soldering. Unit has a stable base, with cross locking tweezers that can be adjusted to the required angle for working. HO-010 HO-011 TW-477 THIRD HAND W/TWEEZERS BASE ONLY CROSS LOCK TWEEZERS 190

164 8. GRS Third Hand Soldering Station The ultimate work station for all your soldering applications. Mounted on a metal base with a replaceable non-asbestos working platform. Chose from two styles; one third hand or two third hands. Hands have spring action grips. Tilts and rotates in any conceivable position. SOLDERING HO-014 HO-015 HO HO HO-016 THIRD HAND ON WEIGHTED BASE DOUBLE STATION SOLDERING BOARD-4 SOLDERING BOARD-6 TC JAWS HO HO-014 HO-015 HO Platinum Soldering Station This soldering station is designed to be used for soldering platinum as it prevents contamination during the process. A complete work station includes carbide tipped tweezers, carbide solder pick, and a replaceable solder board. HO HO HO GRS PLATINUM SOLDERING STATION WITH SO-114 HO GRS SOLDERING PLATFORM -6 SO-114 PLATINUM SOLDERING BOARD -6 X Third Hand Stainless Steel This third hand is distinctly different as it is a stainless steel weighted base unit. Available in two styles: one third hand or two third hand. Reduce soldering set up time with the all around flexibility these third hands supply. They can twist, rotate and bend any desired position. 11. Double Clamp Stand SO-114 Heavy work base with universal adjustment to two spring loaded clips. This fixture increases flexibility and simplifies soldering of multiple pieces. HO-012 DOUBLE CLAMP STAND 12. Ceramic Ring Stand Ceramic tapered rod on a heavy base to suit all ring sizes. Mounted in a universal joint to position the work. Practical to use for all types of assembly and repair. HO HO THIRD HAND S.S- SINGLE THIRD HAND S.S-DOUBLE HO-009 HO-013 HOLDER WITH BASE SPARE CERAMIC ROD 191

165 SOLDERING 13. Rotating Soldering Table Allows convenient positioning in any angle as the table revolves on ball bearings. Low height and special honey comb design provides firm holding of small parts. 5 1 /2 diameter. SO-100 SO-099 SET WITH LAVA DISC REPLACEMENT DISC 14. Ceramic Soldering Blocks Non-asbestos blocks, suitable to withstand high temperatures up to 2000 F/1093 C with little or no thermal expansion. A flat working surface that retains heat and cleans easily. 15. Honeycomb Soldering Blocks Most commonly used ceramic block, that has fine pores to accelerate the heat loss from parts being soldered. Holes may be used to retain fine wire articles or used as anchor points. Asbestos free, these blocks withstand temperatures up to 2000 F. 16. Magnesia Block An economical type block that is porous and fireproof. Lasts longer than charcoal blocks. Soft enough to enable work to be pressed into the surface and steadied while soldering. SO-104 OVAL 6 1 /2 X 3 X 1 SO-105 ROUND 4 X 1 SIZE SO /4 X 5 1 /2 X 1 /2 SO /2 X 7 3 /4 X 1 /2 SIZE SO X 3 X Silica Soldering Board A novel type of board that is soft and flexible, yet will not break if dropped. Useful to hold articles of different types. Withstands temperatures up to 2500 F. SIZE SO X 6 X 1 /2 18. Silquar Hi-Heat Boards A non-asbestos soldering board. Withstands heat to a maximum temperature 2000 F/1093 C. Cleans easily with water. 19. Soldering Boards for Platinum Made of super refractory material, these boards meet the demand of high temperature soldering of platinum. Extremely low thermal conductivity, without loss of strength, these boards are free of any metallic impurities. SIZE SO X 6 X 1 /2 SO X 12 X 1 /2 SO X 12 X 1 /2 SIZE SO X 4 X 1 /2 SO X 6 X 1 /2 192

166 20. Solderite Boards An entirely new material that is asbestos free, flame resistant and non-combustible. These boards have good heat reflection and insulating qualities. In addition, they will not flake or crumble, making it the best all purpose board for soldering. 21. Charcoal Block SIZE SO X 6 X 1 /2 SO X 12 X 1 /2 SO X 12 X 1 /2 Made from selected soft wood. Easy to pin or press work pieces while soldering. Creates a reducing atmosphere and reflects heat back on the article being soldered. SIZE SO /2 X 2 3 /4 X 1 1 /8 SOLDERING 22. Thermic Isolator Grain Granular, irregular shaped grains used to support work pieces during soldering. May be used wet or dry. Indispensable when soldering unusual shapes of jewelry items. SO-121 SOLDERING GRAINS-500g 23. Solder Station with Lighter Handy solder station has a durable non-asbestos solder board with a built-in lighter. Instant ignition, saves gas. Operates on 4-AA batteries. Size 4 X 2 X 10. SO-092 SO-093 COMPLETE UNIT SOLDER BOARD FOR SO Picklers This 14 oz. capacity pickler is safe and effective for removing oxides or fire scale from the surfaces of gold, silver and non-ferrous alloys. Comes with acid resistant retrieval baskets for easy immersion and removal. Constant bath temperature at 140 F/60 C. Provided with polypropylene perforated basket for easy immersion and retrieval of articles of jewelry, while working with hot pickling solutions. PB-210 PB-211 PB oz 110V/ 60Hz 14 oz 220V/ 50Hz BASKET 25. Sparex Pickling Compound Non-flammable, granular dry acid compound, for use in Picklers. Cleans and removes surface oxidation and fire scale discoloration, on gold, silver and non-ferrous alloys. Works efficiently at a constant temperature of 140 F/60 C. SO-129 SO-128 SO COMPOUND 10 oz COMPOUND 2 1 /2 lb COMPOUND 45 lb DRUM 193

167 SOLDERING 26. Needle Tip Flux Dispenser Eliminate messy flux brushes by using this squeeze bottle dispenser. Spot dispensing puts the flux exactly where required. Keeps flux free of dust and other contaminants. CAPACITY SO oz 27. Pump Flux Dispenser Durable plastic bottle. Easy to refill with flux. Dispenses a limited amount of flux or other liquid into a reservoir. Very useful for brush application. CAPACITY SO oz 28. Tix Solder A specially prepared solder that adheres easily to all solderable materials. Melts at 275 F. It has extraordinary bonding strength, stays bright and will not tarnish. Package of 20 rods 3 length. SO-122 TIX SOLDER 29. Tix Flux A liquid non-corrosive flux, harmless to hands or clothing. Compatible with most soft solders to increase fluidity. Washes away with water, even after drying. SO-126 TIX FLUX- 1 /2 oz 30. Anti-Tix Flux A liquid mask that when brushed on will prevent solder flow to unwanted areas. May be used for hard or soft solders. SO-127 ANTI-TIX FLUX- 1 /2 oz 31. Stay Bright Soldering Set Slightly higher temperature bearing solder, melts at 450 F. May be used with a soldering torch or gun. Use Stay Clean flux to achieve good flow characteristics. Includes 1 /2 oz. of solder and 1 /2 fl oz. of Stay Clean flux. SO-350 STAY BRIGHT SET 32. Hard Soldering Flux A different kind of flux that has self pickling and adhesive qualities. Holds solder bits in place and preserves the color and temper of the material. Suitable for metals with high melting points. SO-360 SO-361 CAPACITY 1 qt 1 gal 194

168 33. Dandix Paste Flux A paste flux for low temperature soldering. Contains no fluoride and prevents discoloration or oxide buildup. Apply with a brush where needed to assist solder flow. SO /2 oz. (44 ml) JAR SO oz. (237 ml) JAR SO oz. (473 ml) JAR 34. Solder Paste Ready to use, pre-mixed alloy and flux in a dispensable syringe. Eliminates waste by spot application. Select from color matches with the base material to give a professional appearance. 35. Cool Paste Frequently used, non-toxic, non-asbestos, paste for localized protection from heat damage during soldering and brazing. Effective up to 2000 F. Easily cleansed by water. SO-138 YELLOW EASY 10K/ 1240 F SO-139 YELLOW EASY 14K/ 1290 F SO-140 SILVER EASY/ 1205 F SO-120 CAPACITY 4 oz SOLDERING 36. Cold Shield A non-toxic, non-corrosive, paste that protects stones, plastics, and precious metals from damage by heat while soldering or brazing. Withstands heat up to 3000 F. Cleans away easily with water. SO-119 SO oz JAR 32 oz JAR 37. Handy Flux An economical long lasting paste flux that sustains prolonged heating. Contains fluoride, potassium and hydroxides. Widely used by silversmiths for soldering gold, silver, brass and non-ferrous metals. CAPACITY SO oz SO lb SO lb 38. Borax Powder Makes paste by the addition of water. When applied, acts as a flux and allows solder to flow. Best used to line the insides of crucibles, as it helps extend crucible life. 39. Boric Acid Powder SO-102 SO lb JAR POWDER CONE Dissolve in denatured spirit, in a glass container, to make a liquid flux. Recommended for general soldering tasks. Keep covered as it evaporates easily. SO /2 lb JAR 195

169 SOLDERING 40. Binding Wire-Iron & Copper Pure Copper wire, soft and pliable, for suspending articles of jewelry in plating baths. Do not use for rhodium or electro stripping. Iron Wire for binding various items together, may be used during soldering. GAUGE INCH TYPE PE lb COPPER PE lb COPPER PE lb COPPER PE lb COPPER GAUGE INCH TYPE PE oz IRON PE oz IRON PE oz IRON PE oz IRON 41. Sheet Repair Solders- Cadmium Free Solder in sheet form for the identical color match to the carat of the piece to be soldered. All free flowing to provide a strong permanent joint. Available in three grades. Sold one dwt (1.555g). White Gold Solder GRADE FLOW TEMP F SO-146 6W EASY 1390 SO W EASY 1365 SO W MEDIUM 1425 SO W HARD 1550 SO W EASY 1380 SO W MEDIUM 1440 SO W HARD 1570 SO W EASY 1465 SO W MEDIUM 1495 SO W HARD 1590 Yellow Gold Solder GRADE FLOW TEMP F SO-166 6Y EASY 1345 SO-168 8Y EASY 1350 SO Y EASY 1340 SO Y MEDIUM 1395 SO Y HARD 1475 SO Y EASY 1395 SO Y MEDIUM 1380 SO Y HARD 1471 SO Y EASY 1425 SO Y MEDIUM 1495 SO Y HARD Plumb Solders- Cadmium Free High quality solders manufactured to stringent standards for uniformity and color. Guaranteed flow temperature for each grade. Available in three grades. Sold one dwt (1.555g). White Gold Solder GRADE FLOW TEMP F SO-188 8K WP EASY 1420 SO K WP EASY 1390 SO K WP MEDIUM 1435 SO K WP HARD 1570 SO K WP EASY 1390 SO K WP MEDIUM 1450 SO K WP HARD 1570 SO K WP EASY 1460 SO K WP HARD 1610 Yellow Gold Solder GRADE FLOW TEMP F SO-206 6K YP EASY 1350 SO-208 8K YP EASY 1360 SO K YP EASY 1375 SO K YP MEDIUM 1400 SO K YP HARD 1475 SO K YP EASY 1340 SO K YP MEDIUM 1390 SO K YP HARD 1480 SO K YP EASY 1430 SO K YP MEDIUM 1475 SO K YP HARD Platinum Solders- Cadmium Free A perfect solder for platinum to avoid problems of porosity and color match. Available in three different grades. Sold one dwt (1.555g). 44. Silver Solders Manufactured to exacting quality control standards with consistency of melting and flow point. Available in sheet. Sold in dwt. % PT. MELT. TEMP F SO % EASY 1400 SO % MEDIUM 1475 SO % HARD 1550 GRADE FLOW MELT. POINT F POINT F SO-235 EASY SO-236 MEDIUM SO-237 HARD

170 STAMPING 1. Precision Ring Stamps Steel stamps, with precision cut, available in two height sizes. Stamps are square body. Size #2 =( 1 /32, 0.8mm), Size#3=( 1 /45, 0.6mm). These stamps may be used on a stamping machine. 18K 0.8mm 14K #2 #3 0.6mm Bent IMPRESSION #2 #3 9K PU-209 PU K PU-210 PU K PU-212 PU K PU-214 PU KP PU-220 PU K PU-218 PU K PU-221 PU K PU-222 PU K PU-224 PU PU-228 PU PU-229 PU-428 PU-230 PU-402 Sterling PU-240 PU-403 Platinum PU-250 PU-404 PLAT PU-249 PU-398 STER PU-257 PU PU-317 PU PU-358 PU PU-375 PU PU-387 PU PU-391 PU PU-393 PU PU-392 PU PU-390 PU-427 SS PU-225 PU-261 9CT PU-251 PU CT PU-252 PU CT PU-253 PU CT PU-254 PU CT PU-255 PU-266 SIL PU-256 PU K 0.8mm 14K #2 #3 0.6mm Straight IMPRESSION #2 #3 9K PU-109 PU K PU-110 PU K PU-112 PU K PU-114 PU KP PU-115 PU K PU-118 PU K PU-121 PU K PU-122 PU K PU-124 PU PU-128 PU PU-129 PU-024 PU-130 PU-025 Sterling PU-140 PU-026 Platinum PU-150 PU-032 PLAT PU-149 PU-031 STER PU-151 PU PU-141 PU PU-158 PU PU-175 PU PU-187 PU PU-191 PU PU PU PU-192 PU PU-193 PU-029 SS PU-194 PU CT PU-195 PU CT PU-196 PU CT PU-197 PU SIL PU-198 PU Deluxe Ring Stamp Set- Bent PU-509 SET OF 10 PCS (0-9) #3 PU-510 SET OF 10 PCS (0-9) #2 PU-527 SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z) #2 PU-530 SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z) #3 Deluxe Ring Stamp Set- Straight PU-275 SET OF 10 PCS (0-9) #2 PU-276 SET OF 10 PCS (0-9) #3 PU-286 SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z) #2 PU-287 SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z) #3 2. Ring Stamping Machine A new cam operated stamping machine that lets you accomplish precision marking on the inside of all ladies and gents rings. Rings are positioned precisely in non marring jigs and impressions can be controlled with a smooth acting hand lever. Additional jig converts for flat surface marking as well. Clear top view technique allows you to mark with ease and confidence. PU-001 RING STAMPING MACHINE 198

171 3. Marking Plier Durable stainless steel ring marking plier to stamp the inside of rings as well as other flat surfaces. Plier has adjustable screw to lock different stamps. Individual stamps are available separately. Overall length 5 1 /2 long. PJ-910 PLIER ONLY PJ-911 MARKING PLIER BOX ONLY PJ-912 FLAT AND RADIUS ANVIL FOR PLIER PJ-913 PLIER WITH 3 STAMPS (10K, 14K, 18K) STAMPING 7 4. Stamps for Marking Plier Steel stamps of the finest quality, made in round shanks, and suitable for use in the marking plier. Impressions are available in radius or flat. Impression height Size #2 =( 1 /32, 0.8mm), Size#3=( 1 /45, 0.6mm). Radius IMPRESSION #2 #3 9K PU-409 PU K PU-410 PU K PU-412 PU K PU-414 PU KP PU-415 PU K PU-418 PU K PU K PU-421 PU K PU-422 PU K PU-424 PU PU-499 PU PU-500 PU-545 PU-430 PU-546 Sterling PU-440 PU-547 Platinum PU-450 PU-548 PLAT PU-448 PU-549 STER PU-449 PU PU-451 PU PU-458 PU PU-475 PU PU-455 PU PU-491 PU PU PU PU-492 PU PU-495 PU-558 SS PU-496 PU-559 9CT PU-497 PU CT PU-498 PU CT PU-501 PU-562 SIL PU-502 PU Ring Stamping Device Standard square body stamps may be used on the machine to eliminate holding of the ring by one hand and stamping with the other. Ring may be positioned in soft nylon anvil to eliminate mars on the surface. Flat stamping can also be done by use of a flat anvil. Stamps must be ordered separately. Marking Plier Set 18K 0.8mm 14K 11 #2 #3 0.6mm PU-511 SET OF 10 PCS (0-9).#2 PU-512 SET OF 10 PCS (0-9) #3 PU-513 SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z).#2 PU-514 SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z) # Flat 5. Stamping Anvil IMPRESSION #2 #3 9K PU-567 PU K PU-568 PU K PU-569 PU K PU-570 PU KP PU-571 PU K PU-572 PU K PU-573 PU K PU-574 PU K PU-575 PU PU-576 PU PU-577 PU-610 PU-578 PU-611 Sterling PU-579 PU-612 Platinum PU-580 PU-613 PLAT PU-581 PU-614 STER PU-582 PU PU-583 PU PU-584 PU PU-585 PU PU-586 PU PU-587 PU PU-588 PU PU-589 PU PU-590 PU-623 SS PU-591 PU-624 9CT PU-592 PU CT PU-593 PU CT PU-594 PU-627 SIL PU-595 PU-628 This brass anvil secures ring bands in the cavity during stamping. Grooves are designed for different ring size shanks. One side is for ladies rings and the other side is for men s rings PU-015 RING STAMPING DEVICE PU-010 PU-012 PU-014 MALE FEMALE COMBO 199

172 STAMPING 6. Ring Stamps- Imported High quality steel square body stamps, used to stamp impression on metal surfaces. Very clear and precise marking on the inside of rings. Bent 18K 1mm IMPRESSION 1MM Letter Height 9K PU K PU K PU K PU K PU K PU K PU PU-642 PU-643 STERLING PU-644 PLATINUM PU-645 PT PU PU PU PU PU-654 PU PU-655 SS PU-656 Straight IMPRESSION 1MM 9K PU K PU K PU K PU K PU K PU K PU PU-702 PU-703 STERLING PU-704 PLATINUM PU-705 PT PU PU PU PU PU PU-715 SS PU Stamp Sets- Imported Steel stamp set for manual marking of alphabet and numbers. Note, in the number set #6 is also used as #9. PU-531 PU-531 PU-532 PU-533 PU-534 PU Economy Stamp Sets PU-532 SET OF 9 PCS (0-9)-STRAIGHT SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z)-STRAIGHT SET OF 9 PCS (0-9)-BENT SET OF 27 PCS (A-Z)-BENT Steel stamp set for marking impression on metal surfaces. Character height 1 /16. Note, in the number set #6 is also used as #9. Sets are organized on a hardwood stand. Letter set has A-Z and period. PU-529 PU-528 PU-528 PU-529 STAMP SET OF 9 PCS(0-9) STAMP SET OF 27 PCS(A-Z) PU-525 PU Automatic Center Punch Mark on all metals without using a hammer. This compact tool delivers pin point impressions with a simple depression of the hand. The impression depth may be varied by adjusting the knurled screw head. Very useful for layout work. PU-524 CENTER PUNCH & SCRIBER PU-525 GERMAN PU-526 PU-526 STARRETT-USA 200 For custom orders of stamps and logos please specify the following: Type of stamp (straight, bent or plier) Letter height and style Art work of your logo

173 SURFACE FINISHING 1. Vibratory Tumbler -TV-5 A light duty tumbler, with a pre-set amplitude, this machine is best suited for small batches of up to 25 ladies average sized rings. Complete with bowl and cover, it is just 9 in height. May be used with all types of media, plastic, shell or hardwood. Cannot be used with a flow through (FT) system. 4. Vibratory Tumbler TD-40 These tumblers have eccentric weights, to adjust the amplitude of the bowl from a gentle wave to an aggressive motion. Bowls are made of cross linked polyethylene suitable for all general media. Shot bowl must be used when changing media to steel shot. Bowls are hinged to swing over for easy discharge of parts on to a separating screen. 2. Vibratory Tumbler-TV-10 TB-019 TB-024 TB-003 TV-5 110V/ 60Hz TV-5 220V/ 50Hz B-5 SPARE BOWL A medium duty tumbler, of fixed amplitude, but with a larger bowl capacity of up to 50 average size ladies rings. Use with all types of media, except steel shot. May be run wet or dry. A drain connection allows you to use the flow through (FT) system. Overall height is 16 approx. TB-022 TB-023 TB-027 TD V/ 60Hz TD V/ 50Hz B-40 SPARE BOWL 5. Vibratory Tumbler TD-75 Powerful robust machine for processing large quantities of parts, either de-buring or finishing. Generates an identical surface finish in minimum time. Holds up to 350 average sized ladies rings. Hinged bowl 21 dia. facilitates easy removal of parts and media. Bowl must be replaced with shot bowl to use steel shot media. Designed for flow through (FT) system. Overall height 28. TB-001 TB-002 TB TV V/ 60Hz TV V/ 50Hz B-10 SPARE BOWL TB-016 TB-017 TB-015 TD V/ 60Hz TD V/ 50Hz B-75 SPARE BOWL 3. Vibratory Tumbler- TV-18 Large capacity, heavy duty tumbler, that will process up to 90 average size ladies rings. Recommended for small to mid-level production. Tumble finish with all types of media, except steel shot. May be run wet or dry. Use the flow through (FT) method to keep parts bright and clean. Overall height 17 approx. 6. Adjusta-Vibe 25SS Designed for vibratory finishing with steel shot media up to 50 lbs. Large bowl on a suspension system with a heavy duty drive provides the amplitude for tumbling of rough cast parts. Bowl is 14 dia. and has a side drain to remove parts and media. Designed for flow through (FT) system. Overall height is 17 approx. 202 TB-004 TB-005 TB-006 TV V/ 60Hz TV V/ 50Hz B-18 SPARE BOWL/ DRAIN TB-007 TB-008 TB SS 110V/ 60Hz 25SS 220V/ 50Hz BS-20 SPARE BOWL

174 7. Adjusta-Vibe 40SS Large capacity, for use with steel shot media up to 100 lbs. Engineered to withstand the most aggressive vibratory amplitudes. Well supported suspension with a direct drive system. This unit is ideal for mass production and is recommended for finishing parts from rough castings in minimum time. Side drain contributes to ease of removal of parts and media. Bowl is 16 dia. Designed for flow through (FT) system. Height is 20 approx. SURFACE FINISHING 10. Flow Thru System Upgrade vibratory finishing by integrating this system for automatic flow of fluid. Keeps the media and parts cool and lubricated, by a steady drip of water and compound, to improve the quality of finish. Constructed of heavy gauge steel, the base has a vertical support for the upper container, for gravity feed of the fluid and a lower container for spent solution. System includes two containers, adjustable flow valve, 0-5 hr. timer and an electrical plug in for the tumbler. Use Model FT-20 for TV-10 & TV-18 Use Model FT-25 for TD-75, AV-25SS, AV-40SS, AV-40 & AV-75. TB-010 TB-011 TB SS 110V/ 60Hz 40SS 220V/ 50Hz BS-33 SPARE BOWL TB-020 TB-021 FT-20 W/TIMER 110V/ 60Hz FT-25 W/TIMER 220V/ 50Hz 8. Adjusta-Vibe 40 Medium sized vibrator finisher with a capacity of 200 average ladies sized rings. Variable amplitude to do de-burring or polishing. This model has a 17 diameter bowl, hinged for forward tilting. Accepts all types of ceramic, plastic, shell or hardwood media, and may be run wet or dry. It is equipped for use with the flow through (FT) system. Overall height is 24 approx. TB-025 TB-026 TB-027 AV40 110V/ 60Hz AV40 220V/ 50Hz B-40 SPARE BOWL 11. Vibratory Tumblers Designed for mass finishing with ceramic, plastic or synthetic media. Achieve consistent finishes with minimum down time. Bowls are large heavy polyethylene, reinforced for durability, and provided with easily removable covers for in process inspection. All models have ball bearing motors, with thermal overload protection, and valves with a strainer for fitment to an optional flow through (FT) system. 9. Adjusta-Vibe 75 This version is similar to the above model #40, but has a large 20 diameter bowl that will tumble finish 375 ladies rings. Compatible with all types of media, except steel shot. Designed for use with a flow through(ft) system that delivers pieces with a consistent bright finish. Overall height is 28 approx. TB-013 TB-014 TB-015 AV75 110V/ 60Hz AV75 220V/ 50Hz B-75 SPARE BOWL CAPACITY WORK PIECES 3 qt 50 RINGS 6 qt 100 RINGS 4 3 /4 gal 300 RINGS CAPACITY DIMENSION MAX. LOAD POWER TB qt FT 10 X 4 10 lbs 110V/ 60Hz TB qt 10 X 4 10 lbs 110V/ 60Hz TB qt 10 X 4 10 lbs 220V/ 50Hz TB qt FT 11 1 /2 X lbs 220V/ 50Hz TB qt FT 11 1 /2 X lbs 110V/ 60Hz TB qt 11 1 /2 X lbs 220V/ 50Hz TB qt 11 1 /2 X lbs 110V/ 60Hz TB /4 gal FT 17 X 7 57 lbs 110V/ 60Hz TB /4 gal FT 17 X 7 57 lbs 220V/ 50Hz TB-209 ULTRA VIBER MOTOR 203

175 SURFACE FINISHING 12. Magnetic Finishers An ingenious, new approach to the mass finishing of work pieces that have cuts, slots, recesses and filigree. Achieve excellent results with freely moving micro stainless steel pins and balls, that create numerous impacts by centrifugal motion. Features fixed or variable speeds, manual or programmable. All models have see through bowls with a cover for easy loading. Complete instructions included. All programmable finishers have a variable speed control and a forward/reverse switch selector. PINS RING BOWL VOLTS CAPACITY CAPACITY DIA. TIMER HZ/HP TB g 12 4 /100mm MECHANICAL 110V/ 60Hz 1 /32 TB g 12 4 /100mm MECHANICAL 220V/ 50Hz 1 /32 TB g 30 6 /150mm PROGRAMMABLE 110V/ 60Hz 1 /12 TB g 30 6 /150mm PROGRAMMABLE 220V/ 50Hz 1 /12 TB g /230mm PROGRAMMABLE 110V/ 60Hz 1 /3 TB g /230mm PROGRAMMABLE 220V/ 50Hz 1 /3 TB Kg /300mm PROGRAMMABLE 110V/ 60Hz 1 /3 TB Kg /300mm PROGRAMMABLE 220V/ 50Hz 1 /3 Spares for Magnetic Tumblers MOTOR ARMATURE FOR TB-081 TB-102 TB-064 TB-082 TB-103 TB-065 TB-083 TB-104 TB-066 TB-084 TB-105 TB-067 TB-085 TB-106 TB-068 TB-086 TB-107 TB-069 TB-087 TB-108 TB-070 TB-088 TB-109 TB-071 TB-075 TB-076 TB-077 TB-078 TB-091 TB-092 BOWL DIA. 4 /100mm 6 /150mm 9 /230mm 12 /300mm CIRCUIT BOARD 115/ 60Hz 230/ 50Hz TB-110 TB-111 TIMER MECHANICAL PROGRAMMABLE TB-098 TB-099 TB-100 TB-101 CARBON BRUSHES 100mm 150mm 230mm 300mm 13. S/Steel Magnetic Pins & Balls Made of quality material, these micro pins and balls must be used with a small amount of burnishing compound and mild detergent in magnetic finishers. For finishing delicate jewelry, use steel balls that rotate gently within the bowl. 14. Magnetic Separators Separate media from parts with this trigger activated accessory. Fast, simple hold and release action, easy to stir in the bowl and discharge the media into the plastic container. Media can then be stored and reused. TB-400 TB-401 TB X 5mm 250g - PIN 0.3 X 5mm 250g - PIN 1.2mm 200g - BALL TB-079 TB-080 SMALL LARGE 204

176 15. Rotary Tumblers Rotary tumblers are stable well balanced units that are capable of processing larger work pieces with heavier media. Process times are longer than vibratory finishing, but a distinct advantage is that the surface of work pieces get work hardened. Barrels are multi sided, made of tough polycarbonate, leak proof and will not corrode or rust. Use with all types of media including steel shot. Addition of burnishing compound and detergent, keeps parts cool and avoids drag during tumbling. Features include variable speed, a programmable timer, forward/reverse and auto shut off with buzzer. BOWL DIMENSION POWER TB-049 ROTATING TUMBLER 1 kg 5 1 /2 X 4 220V/ 50Hz TB-050 ROTATING TUMBLER 1 kg 5 1 /2 X 4 110V/ 60Hz TB-051 ROTATING TUMBLER 2 kg 7 1 /2 X 5 1 /2 110V/ 60Hz TB-052 ROTATING TUMBLER 2 kg 7 1 /2 X 5 1 /2 220V/ 50Hz TB-053 ROTATING TUMBLER 7 kg 11 1 /2 X 4 1 /2 110V/ 60Hz TB-054 ROTATING TUMBLER 7 kg 11 1 /2 X 4 1 /2 220V/ 50Hz SURFACE FINISHING Spares for Rotary Tumbler 1 KG 2 KG 7 KG MOTOR TB-043 TB-044 TB-045 BELT FOR BARREL TB-046 TB-047 TB-048 MOTOR BELT TB-056 TB-057 TB-058 REPLACEMENT BARREL TB-061 TB-059 TB-060 CARBON BRUSH TB-062 TB-063 TB Selection Chart MODEL TB-049/050 TB-051/052 TB-053/054 VARIABLE SPEED YES YES YES PROGRAMMABLE TIMER YES YES YES PROG. FORWARD/REVERSE YES YES YES EASY LOAD/UNLOAD YES YES YES BOWL DIMENSIONS 5 1 /2 X /2 X 5 1 / /2 X 4 1 /2 CAPACITY 1 kg 2 kg 7 kg Important: General rule of thumb is to fill chamber to 50% of capacity (parts and media) 16. Gems Rotary Tumblers Professional, more powerful, heavy duty tumbler. Belt driven by a continuous fan cooled motor. All steel construction, hexagonal rubber lined barrel with a leak proof cover. All rotating parts have permanently lubricated non-metallic bearings for efficient and quiet operation. Machine is complete with motor overload protection. All types of media including steel shot may be used. Slight wetting of burnishing media with detergent is recommended. CAPACITY POWER TB /4 gal 110V/ 60 Hz TB /4 gal 220V/ 50 Hz Spares for Rotary Tumbler TB-301 BARREL & LINER TB-304 BELT TB-305 DRIVE SHAFT TB-306 IDLER SHAFT TB-307 SPARE BARREL ONLY TB-310 MOTOR 205

177 SURFACE FINISHING 17. Steel Shot & Stainless Steel Shot Steel Shot: Made of carbon steel in various shapes, but uniform in size. Fine shot is the ideal choice of media for burnishing. It is a proven fact that the addition of tumbling powder, moistened with burnishing compound, helps to prevent rust on the steel shot. The tempered steel shot will impart a uniform, scratch free, work hardened surface on all metals. After use, carbon steel shot must be rinsed clean and stored in a rust preventive solution. Stainless Steel Shot: Unlike carbon steel, this media needs no rust protection. Heavier in weight and corrosion resistant, these shot may be safely used with acid soap solutions. Selection of the shape is determined by the form of the work pieces. Pins are the ideal choice for finishing intricate cavities and filigree. This media must be cleansed in water, then dried and stored. 18. Ceramic Media Ceramic bonded aluminum oxide is the recommended break-in media for initial rough finishing on raw casting or hard metals. The heavy or medium cut is a reflection of the particle size of the abrasive. Triangular media eliminates jamming and is designed to reach into grooves, corners or shallow contours. Cylinder shapes with their gentle rolling motion may be used in a secondary operation to smooth the surface. Keep the media moist during tumbling by addition of a burnishing or a light soapy compound. TRIANGLE PINS A X B X C X D SHAPE TB /8 X 3 /8 X 3 /8 X 3 /8 TRIANGLE-GRAY TB /8 X 3 /8 X 3 /8 X 9 /16 TRIANGLE-GRAY TB /4 X 5 /8 CYLINDER-GRAY TB-314 POLYHEDRON 19. Plastic Media BALLS BALL CONES DIAGONALS MIXED SHOT CYLINDER Plastic bonded abrasive pellets are an excellent choice for providing a uniform finish on medium hard or soft metal. Improve surface finish gradually from coarse to fine. Brown pyramids are best for the initial stage, followed by green pyramids that leave a smooth matte finish. White pyramids will impart an extra shine, prior to final polishing. SIZE/SHAPE CARBON S/SHOT S.S/SHOT 1 /8 ECLIPSE -NOT SHOWN TB-329 TB /16 ECLIPSE-NOT SHOWN TB-330 TB /8 BALLS TB-331 TB /16 BALLS TB-332 TB /8 BALL CONES TB-334 TB /16 BALL CONES TB-335 TB /16 X 9 /32 PINS TB-336 TB /8 X 3 /8 PINS TB-337 TB /8 DIAGONALS TB-338 TB-348 MIXED SHOT TB-350 TB Porcelain Balls This micro abrasive media will cut, clean and leave an extremely smooth surface that is bright, but not reflective. Easier to maintain than steel shot, the tumbling action of this media will reach into small cavities without getting entrapped. Use with a soapy liquid detergent to generate improved surfaces. A mix of ball sizes in a single charge will produce more refined surface quality. 21. Screens TB-322 TB-323 TB-324 TB-325 TB SIZE 1mm 2mm 3mm 4mm 6mm Made of high impact polymer, these screens are approx 14 in diameter, one piece molded and stackable for storage. Various screen sizes are available for manual separation of parts from media. TB-317 TB-318 TB-319 TB-320 TB-321 SIZE/SHAPE 1 /4 PYRAMIDS-BROWN 1 /4 PYRAMIDS-GREEN 1 /4 PYRAMIDS-WHITE 1 /2 V CUT CYLINDER 9 /16 CONES X-FINE HOLE SIZE TB TB /4 TB /2 TB /8 TB /4 TB-037 BUCKET WITH 5 SCREENS 206

178 22. Steel Shot- Balls Hardened polished balls may be used for very light de-buring. Due to their minute size, a high degree of polish is achieved by a strong peening action. Recommended for use in rotary tumblers with the addition of burnishing compound. A complement of mixed sizes will generate excellent results on almost all metals. TB-403 TB-405 TB-404 TB Corn Cob SIZE 1mm 1.4mm 1.2mm 1.6mm Finely ground corn cob is an ideal absorbent for drying articles of jewelry. Additionally, it removes water stains, finger prints, or residue left after tumbling with dry media. 25. Walnut Shell SURFACE FINISHING Granulated walnut shell is a natural carrier for dry tumbling or barrel finishing operations. When charged with polishing oxides, either rouge or chrome, a surface of high luster is achieved. TB-365 TB Dry Shine WEIGHT 5 lb 50 lb Dry Shine I: A ready to use polishing agent made of pulverized walnut shell charged with red rouge. This media leaves a mirror finish on gold and other precious metals. Dry run in a vibrating tumbler at an intense amplitude for hours. TB-363 TB-364 WEIGHT 5 lb 50 lb 24. Tumbling Compounds 750- Compound: Use for all metals. Cleans steel shot and is a rust inhibitor. Provides mild cutting action with ceramic, plastic or synthetic media. Mix 2-4 oz. of powder with 1 gallon of water Compound: Use for gold, brass, bronze and copper. Works with steel shot and porcelain media, to give a bright finish. Mix 1-3 oz. of powder with 1 gallon of water Compound: Use for platinum, white gold and silver burnishing. Works with steel shot or porcelain media. Mix 1-2 oz. of powder with 1 gallon of water. Dry Shine III: Formulated from pulverized corn cob and blended with a fine particle size of red rouge, this media will impart a tarnish free, superior bright luster on gold and other metals. Normally run dry in a vibratory tumbler for hours, it gives a high brilliance to metal surfaces. TB-315 TB-316 DRY SHINE I DRY SHINE III 27. Liquid Compounds Detergent Compound: For cleaning and fast cutting in tumbling operation. Use for all metals including white metal. Works with ceramic, plastic and synthetic media. Mix 1 fluid oz. to 1 gallon of water. Burnishing Compound: Use for vibratory and tumbling operation. Low level ph, best for use with steel shot. Cleans all precious metals, brass, bronze and copper. Mix 1 fluid oz. to 1 gallon of water. COMPOUND CONTENTS TB lb TB lb TB lb TB lb TB lb TB lb COMPOUND CONTENTS TB-358 DETERGENT 1 gallon TB-359 DETERGENT 1 qt. TB-360 BURNISHING 1 gallon TB-361 BURNISHING 1 qt. 207

179 SURFACE FINISHING 28. Sand Blaster Sturdy stainless steel bench model sand blaster with well sealed exterior to eliminate leakage. Illuminated glass viewing area. Pencil style tungsten nozzle blasts a steady stream of media. Nozzle may be used in a fixed mount or free hand. Large side openings with built-in heavy duty rubber gloves. Media is recyclable and pressure is adjustable, high volume for aggressive blasting and low volume for satin finishes. Unit has front loading and discharge port for media. Dust particles are removed by an attached filter system for safe, efficient and clean working. Filters are replaceable. Control panel has power switch, pressure regulator and gauge. Operates on 110V/220V with an air pressure PSI. Dimensions 18 L X 14 W X 16 Ht. UL-044 UL-045 SAND BLASTER SAND BLASTER WITH COMPRESSOR 29. EZ Sand Blasters The sand blaster is an air tight steel cabinet within which an air jet forces blasting media, either glass beads or aluminum oxide, on to the article to remove hardened investment or to generate a smooth surface. The cabinet is one piece molded and resistant to rust or leakage. Blasting media is automatically recirculated. An air pressure regulator allows variation in the applied blasting force. The blaster includes a convenient easy viewing glass with the additional benefit of an internal light. A double filter system eliminates the dust particles from contaminating the environment. Operates on PSI. (Compressor not included). SPECIFICATION UL V/ 60 Hz ONE HAND UL V/ 50 Hz ONE HAND UL V/ 60 Hz TWO HANDS UL V/ 50 Hz TWO HANDS 30. Mini Sand Blaster A handy light weight unit that is ideal for preparing work for final polishing. Use it for removing oxide heat marks and smoothing surfaces of casting. A lighted interior and a clear viewing window helps visibility. Lever control air gun provides a pin point jet. Includes tubing, air gun, neoprene glove, light bulb, and 5 lb. blasting media. Operates on PSI. (Compressor not included). SPECIFICATION UL V/ 60 Hz ONE HAND UL V/ 50 Hz ONE HAND 31. Blasting Media Surface preparation is of vital importance before polishing, burnishing and plating. Surface roughness may be improved by blasting with media, either abrasives or glass beads. Different surface finishes may be generated by varying the parameters of the micron size of abrasives and air pressure. The degree of matte to satin finish depends on the hardness of the material being finished. Glass Beads - 5 lb GRADE MICRON UL-048 EX-FINE 20 UL-049 FINE 60 UL-050 MEDIUM 100 UL-051 COARSE 240 Aluminum Oxide - 5 lb GRADE MICRON UL-053 FINE 80 UL-054 MEDIUM 100 UL-055 COARSE 180 Ruby - 5 lb GRADE MICRON UL-060 FINE

180 TAGS 1. String Tags A basic necessity for every jewelry business, these all purpose string tags are available in plastic or paper, and are ideal for use in organizing, labeling or pricing. Plastic tags are tear resistant PVC, with rounded edges and strung with attractive gold string. Paper tags are made of heavyweight white quality paper and strung with durable white string. Both types of tags will accept marking with an indelible pen. Box of 1000 approx. SIZE COLOR TA X 16mm WHITE TA X 16mm GOLD TA X 16mm SILVER TA X 16mm PAPER TA X 20mm WHITE TA X 20mm GOLD TA X 20mm SILVER TA X 20mm PAPER SIZE COLOR TA X 22mm WHITE TA X 22mm GOLD TA X 22mm SILVER TA X 22mm PAPER TA X 25mm WHITE TA X 25mm GOLD TA X 25mm SILVER TA X 25mm PAPER SIZE COLOR TA X 25mm WHITE TA X 25mm GOLD TA X 25mm SILVER TA X 25mm PAPER TA X 28mm WHITE TA X 28mm GOLD TA X 28mm SILVER TA X 28mm PAPER 2. Jewelry Tags A complete range of elegant jewelry tags in different shapes to suit all applications. Made in ultrasonic compatible PVC, tags are available in frosted white, gold and silver, with transparent press on buttons. Write or mark with an indelible pen. Box of 1000 approx. SHAPE COLOR TA-700 SMALL ROUND WHITE TA-702 SMALL ROUND GOLD TA-703 SMALL ROUND SILVER TA-705 LARGE ROUND WHITE TA-706 LARGE ROUND GOLD TA-707 LARGE ROUND SILVER SHAPE COLOR TA-709 SINGLE END RND WHITE TA-710 SINGLE END RND GOLD TA-711 SINGLE END RND SILVER TA-713 SINGLE END OVAL WHITE TA-714 SINGLE END OVAL GOLD TA-715 SINGLE END OVAL SILVER SHAPE COLOR TA-717 SINGLE END RECT WHITE TA-718 SINGLE END RECT GOLD TA-719 SINGLE END RECT SILVER TA-721 SMALL LONG WHITE TA-722 SMALL LONG GOLD TA-723 SMALL LONG SILVER 3. Plastic Tags Hard PVC, ultrasonic compatible, these tags will not tear or smudge. Special sizes for various articles of jewelry. Identifying marks may be written on with a permanent indelible pen. Box of 1000 approx. 4. Adjustable PVC Tags This tag saves time. Simply slip the end thru and it locks around the article. Made of soft PVC in three colors, these tags retain their shape and color during ultrasonic or steam cleaning. Box of 1000 approx. SIZE TA-730 EARRING TAG 13 X 17mm TA-731 BRACELET TAG 13 X 17mm TA-732 MEDAL TAG 15 X 18mm TA-733 LARGE MEDAL TAG 17 X 22mm TA-734 EARRING AND BRACELET 17 X 22mm SIZE COLOR TA X 10mm WHITE TA X 10mm GOLD TA X 10mm SILVER TA X 16mm WHITE TA X 16mm GOLD TA X 16mm SILVER TA X 19mm WHITE TA X 19mm GOLD TA X 19mm SILVER 210

181 5. Ring Tags TAGS Attractive and functional, these ring tags are made in super strong Tyvek material. Solution resistant to withstand repeated ultrasonic or steam cleaning. Tags have pressure sensitive backing with an adhesive free center for easy application. Choose from a wide selection of five colors and shapes. Comes in packs with an indelible ink marker. A B C D E STYLE/ PKG. WHITE GOLD SILVER BLUE YELLOW A. PACK OF 1000 TA-101 TA-102 TA-103 TA-104 TA-105 B. PACK OF 500 TA TA-204 TA-205 C. PACK OF 1000 TA TA-304 TA-305 D. PACK OF 500 TA TA-404 TA-405 E. PACK OF 500 TA TA Ring Tags for Dot Matrix Printer Durable, rip proof tags in four colors that will withstand ultrasonic or steam cleaning. Print professional quality details using indelible ink ribbon on your dot matrix printer or typewriter. PACKAGE WHITE GOLD SILVER YELLOW PACK OF 1000 TA-501 TA-502 TA-503 TA-505 PACK OF 10,000 TA-515 TA-525 TA-535 TA String Tags for Dot Matrix Printer Ready to use tear resistant tags, for instant identification. Ultrasonic and steam cleaner safe. Available in white, gold or silver in case lots. PACKAGE WHITE GOLD SILVER PACK OF 500 TA-601 TA-602 TA-603 PACK OF 5000 TA-615 TA-625 TA Repair Envelopes with Lay Away Neatly printed envelopes let you organize repair jobs efficiently. Three detachable parts preprinted and progressively numbered will give your company the potential to gain customer confidence. Printed with Lay Away for easy processing. Pkg TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA TA ,000 TA-060 REPAIR ENVELOPE HOLDER 211

182 TAGS 9. Brown Kraft Coin Envelopes Small open end envelopes made to the quality standards of dependability and durability. Economical for storing small parts, coins or jewelry. Easy to write on or affix labels. Box of 500. STYLE SIZE TA-061 #1 3 1 /2 X 2 1 /4 TA-062 #3 4 1 /4 X 2 1 /2 TA-063 #4 4 1 /2 X 3 TA-064 #5 5 1 /2 X 3 1 /8 TA-065 #6 6 X 3 1 /2 10. Zip Lock Bags Clear, transparent, tough poly bags for instant identification of items in every shop or store. Long lasting reinforced zip for added security and strength for use and reuse. In addition, the interlock seal protects the contents from moisture and grime. BLOCK PLAIN SIZE QTY/CASE TA-066 TA /2 X 2 20,000 TA-067 TA /2 X 1 1 /2 20,000 TA-068 TA /4 X 1 1 /4 20,000 TA-070 TA X 2 20,000 TA-071 TA X 3 20,000 TA-072 TA X 3 12,000 TA-073 TA X 4 10,000 BLOCK PLAIN SIZE QTY/CASE TA-074 TA X 5 10,000 TA-075 TA X 6 4,000 TA-076 TA X 6 4,000 TA-077 TA X 9 2,000 TA-078 TA X 10 2,000 TA-089 TA X 12 2, PVC Recloseable Bags Completely clear, thick poly bags in popular sizes, for multiple uses around the store or shop. Simple press to seal secures the contents. Very useful for storing customer parts, samples, findings, and other items. Pkg Gift Bags Trendy gift bags, in an exquisite rose design, to gain your clients admiration. Available in two background colors silver or gold. Four different sizes in case lots. SIZE TA X 2 TA X 3 TA X 3 TA X Anti-Tarnish Tissue Made of the finest quality white bleached tissue. Available in rolls for wrapping of silverware, jewelry and other gift articles. Provides excellent protection from tarnish. PA /8 WIDTH X 1000 SILVER GOLD SIZE QTY/CASE PA-021 PA X 6 5,000 PA-023 PA X 7 5,000 PA-025 PA X 9 6,000 PA-027 PA /2 X 11 2, Turn Table An attractive, low level, platform top display table that adds splendor to jewelry creations. Quiet smooth movement provides all around viewing. Comes in two colors, silver or gold. 13. Paper Cutter A practical stand for dispensing tissue paper rolls. Has a drop leaf steel blade that allows clean tear away of any required length without the use of scissors. May be fitted on the table top for convenience. PA FOR 7 3 /8 ROLL TA-650 TA-651 TA-654 TA-655 TA-659 TA X 2 1 /2 - SILVER 5 X 2 1 /2 - GOLD 7 X 2 1 /2 - SILVER 7 X 2 1 /2 - GOLD 12 X 2 1 /2 - SILVER 12 X 2 1 /2 - GOLD

183 TESTING 1. Test Stones Best quality natural black hard Arkansas gold testing stone. Available with or without durable cedar wood box. TS-089 TS-090 TS-091 TS-093 TS-094 TS Gold Test Kits 40 X 35 X 6mm 50 X 35 X 6mm 50 X 40 X 6mm 6 X 2 X 1 /2 NATURAL 6 X 2 1 /2 X 1 /2 NATURAL 8 X 3 X 1 /2 NATURAL TS-096 TS-097 TS-098 TS-099 TS-100 TS-101 Traditional kits used worldwide for testing gold, silver and platinum. 3 X 1 1 /2 X 1 /2 BOXED 6 X 3 X 1 /2 NATURAL 8 X 2 X 1 /2 BOXED 2 X 1 1 /2 X 1 /2 BOXED 6 X 2 X 1 /2 BOXED 3 X 1 1 /2 X 1 /2 BLACK 2. Gold Testing Acid This solution helps test silver and the carat value of gold. Come in plastic bottles with secure color coded caps. Contents 1 /2 oz. 3. Needle Tester TYPE COLOR TS K YELLOW TS K GREEN TS K WHITE TS K BLUE TS-024 PLATINUM WHITE TS-029 SILVER RED Each gold tipped needle point is marked with its carat value. Available in five different sets. CARAT TS POINTS 10, 14, 18 TS POINTS 10, 14, 18, (SILVER) TS POINTS 8, 10, 12, 14, 18 TS POINTS 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20 TS-110 H.K 14, 18, 21, 22 TS-030 KIT: BOX, STONE, ACID WITH TS-103 TS-034 KIT: BOX, STONE, ACID WITH TS-104 TS-035 KIT: BOX, STONE, ACID WITH TS-105 TS COMPARTMENT WOODEN BOX TS COMPARTMENT WOODEN BOX TS-085 GOLD TEST GLASS STONE 2 X 2 X 1 /4 5. Presidium Gem Tester TS-085 A gem tester that identifies precious stones using thermal and electrical conductivity. Tests all mounted and unmounted stones up to the smallest size of 0.02 carat. Detects simulants from diamond. 6. Garrett Metal Detector GTAx: An affordable high performance mid range detector with microprocessor graphics target analyzer. Easy to operate by beginners and professionals. Has continuous instant display system. Target with pin point accuracy to a 20% greater depth than most other detectors. Features different modes, search aids, and settings. Scanner: A popular hand held detector to identify even the smallest metal object. Operates an a low frequency range. Completely safe. Battery operated by standard 9v. or rechargeable battery 7.2V (Ni-Mh). TS-199 GEM TESTER TS-127 TS-128 GTAx-1250 BODY SCANNER 214

184 TORCHES 1. with one Tip A basic Little Torch Kit with precision flame. Includes a torch handpiece, one #4 tip, 6' of covered hoses for fuel and oxygen, standard B ( 9 /16 ) hose fittings and complete instructions. ST-104 ONE TIP TORCH WITH 6 HOSE 2. with 5 Tips In a Box This small multi purpose torch is engineered to braze, weld, or melt metals. Includes hand held torch with five interchangeable tips, 6' of covered hoses, and complete instructions. Kit has standard B( 9 /16 ) hose fittings. ST-105 L.T WITH FIVE CURVED TIPS #(2-6) & 6 HOSE- (ACTY) ST-142 L.T WITH FIVE CURVED TIPS #(3-7) & 6 HOSE- (PROPANE) ST-107 L.T WITH BRITISH HOSE CONNECTION WITH TIPS #(2-6) (FUEL 3 /8-19, BSPF-LH, OXY 3 /8-19, BSPF-RH) ST-108 L.T WITH EUROPEAN HOSE CONNECTION WITH TIPS #(2-6) (FUEL 3 /8-19, BSPF-LH, OXY 1 /4-19, BSPF-RH) ST-109 L.T WITH AUSTRALIAN HOSE CONNECTION WITH TIPS #(2-6) (FUEL 5 /8-18LH, BSPF-LH, OXY 5 /8-18RH) 3. with 5 Tips Carded Precision well balanced and light weight torch handpiece with five curved tips, 6 & 12' of covered hoses for fuel and oxygen, fittings and complete instructions. ST-106 ST-140 ST-141 L.T WITH FIVE CURVED TIPS #(2-6) & 6 HOSE L.T WITH FIVE CURVED TIPS #(2-6) & 12 HOSE L.T WITH PROPANE KIT TIPS #(3-7) & 12 HOSE 4. with Regulator for Disposable Tank This kit is designed for use with 14 oz. propane and oxygen disposable tanks (not included). Set includes torch handpiece, one #4 tip, 6' of covered hoses for fuel and oxygen, regulators and complete instructions. May also be used with 16 oz. disposable Mapp gas tank. ST-110 L.T WITH REGULATORS 216

185 TORCHES 5. Oxy/Fuel Kit with Regulators For all brazing, welding and melting applications. Set includes torch, 5 tips, 6' of covered hoses for fuel and oxygen, two precision regulators and complete instructions. ST-111 ST-112 ST-113 KIT FOR B TANK- ACETYLENE/OXYGEN KIT FOR PROPANE/OXYGEN KIT FOR MC TANK- ACETYLENE/OXYGEN 6. Acetylene/ Oxygen Caddy Kit Equip your shop for any soldering, brazing and melting tasks. This compact unit includes an empty MC acetylene tank and an empty oxygen tank in a tough plastic carrier. Regulate the flame with fine controls for pressure and flow. Includes Little Torch handpieces, tips #(2-6), 6' of covered hoses, and regulators with safety reverse flow, check valves. Complete with instructions. ST-100 ACETYLENE CADDY COMPLETE KIT 7. Propane Oxygen Caddy Kit It's a handy, self contained unit. Is a convenient and easy to use system. Includes empty oxygen tank and 5 lb. propane tank, Little Torch handpiece, tips #(3-7), 6' of covered hoses, propane regulator, oxygen regulator, and instruction manual. Safety reverse flow check valves are included. ST-101 PROPANE/OXYGEN CADDY KIT COMPLETE 8. Cylinders These tanks are standard for most jewelry manufacturers. All tanks are tested, but sold empty due to federal regulations. Tanks may be filled by your local gas or welding supply company CAPACITY HEIGHT/ DIA. ST-417 OXYGEN 20 cu.ft 17 3 /4 / 5 1 /4 ST-418 ACETYLENE- MC 10 cu.ft 14 1 /2 / 4 1 /8 ST-419 PROPANE 5 lb 16 3 /4 / 6 1 /8 ST-420 ACETYLENE- B 40 cu.ft 22 1 /2 / 6 1 /4 9. Caddy Carriers (not Shown) ST-423 ST-424 PLATED STEEL FOR ST-101 MOLDED PLASTIC FOR ST

186 TORCHES 10. Regulators- USA These high precision regulators are UL listed, 100% tested, made of solid brass for single torch use. Available as single or dual stage, regulators offer a means of providing a dependable control of fuel and oxygen. Units have corrosion resistant brass gauges and shatter proof polycarbonate lenses. Single Stage Regulator GASES CYLINDER OUTLET UL LISTED MAX USED TYPE PRESSURE INLET PRESSURE ST-115 OXYGEN ALL INDUSTRIAL 0-20 PSI 3000 PSI ST-116 LP & ACETYLENE ALL LP & LRG ACET PSI 400 PSI ST-117 ACETYLENE B TANK (40 cu ft) 0-15 PSI 400 PSI ST-118 ACETYLENE MC TANK (10 cu ft) 0-15 PSI 400 PSI ST-119 HYDROGEN INDUSTRIAL 0-15 PSI 3000 PSI Single Cylinder & Line (Manifold) Regulators ST-124 ACETYLENE MC TANK (10 cu ft) 0-15 PSI 400 PSI ST-125 LP & ACETYLENE ALL LP & LRG ACET PSI 400 PSI ST-126 ACETYLENE B TANK (40 cu ft) 0-15 PSI 400 PSI ST-127 COMPRESSED AIR LINE REGULATOR PSI 300 PSI ST-128 OXYGEN LINE REGULATOR PSI 200 PSI ST-129 ACETYLENE/LP GAS LINE REGULATOR 0-15 PSI 100 PSI Heavy Duty Two Stage Regulator ST-120 OXYGEN INDUSTRIAL 0-30 PSI 3000 PSI ST-121 ACETYLENE INDUSTRIAL 0-15 PSI 400 PSI ST-122 LP INDUSTRIAL 0-50 PSI 400 PSI ST-123 HYDROGEN INDUSTRIAL 0-30 PSI 3000 PSI 11. Check Valves A device that primarily controls the flow direction of fuel or oxygen. In line connection is recommended for safety. ST-135 OXYGEN ST-136 FUEL 12. Regulators for Disposable Tank These regulators may be used on disposable tanks and are designed to provide dependable control for fuel and oxygen delivery. Do not use these regulators on full size tanks. ST-130 ST-131 OXYGEN MAPP /PROPANE 13. Flashback Arrestors Work safely, do not neglect to use this protective device when working with torches. Always place a flashback arrestor between a regulator and a torch. This helps prevent the flame from reaching back into the tank and causing an explosion. Flashback arrestors are UL listed. ST-132 ST-133 ST-134 OXYGEN FUEL SET(OXYGEN & FUEL) 14. Two Hose Manifolds Allows you to operate one or two torches from a single tank. Separate manifolds must be used for fuel and oxygen. Gas flow is controlled by individual needle valves. ST-145 ST Torch Mate Electric Lighter 16. Torch Lighter & Flint OXYGEN FUEL/PROPANE A convenient table top model widely used by professional jewelers. Battery operated electronic circuitry provides instant ignition. ST-091 A safe means to produce a quick spark, to ignite gas torches, without the hazard of an open flame. ST-092 ELECTRIC LIGHTER LIGHTER & FLINT 218

187 TORCHES 17. Tips Enjoy the extraordinary benefits of these curved or straight tips, that have #(2-3) sizes, with orifices in synthetic sapphire. Guaranteed needle point flame to do intricate work. Available in tip sizes #(2-7). SIZE CURVED STRAIGHT TWIN FLAME USE WITH GAS PRESSURE OXYGEN FUEL #2 ST-202 ST-212 ST-222 OXY & HYDROGEN ONLY 2 2 #3 ST-203 ST-213 ST-223 OXY & ACETYLENE OR HYDROGEN 4 4 #4 ST-204 ST-214 ST-224 OXY & MAPP OR PROPANE 4 4 #5 ST-205 ST-215 ST-225 OXY & PROPYLENE 6 6 #6 ST-206 ST-216 ST-226 OXY & PROPANE 6 6 #7 ST-207 ST-217 NA OXY & OTHER GASES Tip Extensions- Flexible These fittings attach to your Little Torch to give you an extended reach to work in difficult areas. ST-245 ST-247 LENGTH ST ST Valve Assemblies Replacement valve assemblies are available for the Little Torch. The green is for the oxygen port and the red is for the fuel port. Do not interchange these assemblies. 21. Heating Tips These are special purpose multiple orifice tips designed to form a larger heating zone. May be used for melting up to 3 oz. of gold or silver. Maximum temperature 5400 F for propane and 6000 F for acetylene. FUEL GAS PRESSURE(PSI) LENGTH FUEL OXYGEN ST-245 ACETYLENE, ST-246 HYDROGEN, MAPP ST-247 PROPANE 5,000 BTU NATURAL GAS 2,400 BTU ST-511 ST-510 ST-510 OXYGEN VALVE GREEN-7345 ST-511 FUEL VALVE RED Hoses A wide range of hose types all with coupled B ( 9 /16 ) fittings. Color coded green or red for easy identification. Complete with installation instructions. Important Note for Gas Safety Consult your gas supplier before setting up the tank and torch system. Ensure that the installation conforms to state and local regulations. Secure fuel tanks to reduce risk of damage from falling or explosion. Take professional help for all gas fittings and maintenance. Purge fuel and oxygen lines and shut off main tanks daily after use. Always use eye protection and work in a well ventilated area. 22. Hose Connection Solid, one piece brass connections with nozzle to fit the respective hose size. Separate thread connections for fuel and oxygen. Hose inside dia. 1 /8. FUEL LENGTH ST-266 GAS 6 -RED ST-267 OXYGEN 6 -GREEN ST-268 GAS 12 -RED ST-269 OXYGEN 12 -GREEN ST-257 ST-258 FOR OXYGEN FOR FUEL 219

188 TORCHES 23. Acetylene Air Kit A mid sized kit for all jewelry soldering, brazing, annealing and small melting jobs. No oxygen needed. Kit includes torch handpiece, super fine tip, 6 of covered hose and regulator with gauge. Produces 1500 C flame temperature. Tank is not included, but is available separately. 24. Propane Air Kit A small portable kit for silversmiths and craftsmen. This kit uses a 14 oz. disposable propane cylinder (not included in kit). Single knob on/off adjustment and control provides an effective way for soft soldering and annealing. Includes torch handpiece, extra fine tip, 6 of covered hose and preset regulator. Produces 1300 C flame temperature. ST-399 ST-261 ACETYLENE KIT ACETYLENE/SINGLE HOSE10 (B-B FITTING) ST-398 ST-262 PROPANE KIT PROPANE/SINGLE T GRADE HOSE10 (B-B FITTING) 25. Air Fuel Torch Tips- USA Reliable, precision threaded, interchangeable tips for various applications. Different orifices for fine soldering or melting. Tips are 100% flame tested and UL listed. Acetylene # ST FLAME OPENING 00 ST FLAME OPENING 0 ST FLAME OPENING 1 ST /16 FLAME OPENING 2 ST /4 FLAME OPENING 3 ST /8 FLAME OPENING Silver Smith Torch Body This Silver Smith torch body is for air/fuel use. Crafted in all metal construction with long wearing precision brass parts that are nickel plated for heat resistance and durability. Propane TYPE # ST ,000 BTU GIANT 61 ST ,000 BTU LARGE 41 ST ,200 BTU SMALL 21 ST ,000 BTU FINE 11 ST-411 5,600 BTU X-FINE Bench Torch Holder Two types of torch holders, one clamps and the other screws on to the work bench. ST-400 TORCH BODY HO-401 HO-402 CLAMP TYPE SCREW TYPE 27. Magnetic Torch Stand A metal weighted base with holes to store tips #(2-7) and a magnetic mount to securely hold your Little Torch. Torch and tips are not included. ST-103 TIP ORGANIZER 29. Safety Goggles for Platinum Light plastic wrap-around frames safety colored lenses protect eyes when melting metal, soldering or brazing. LS-401 LS POWER 7X 10X 220

189 30. HOKE-JEWEL Torch & Adapter Kits A professional jewelers torch for all soldering, brazing, welding and melting tasks. Forged solid brass body with seamless tubing, all nickel plated for long lasting service. Conveniently positioned finger tip control of valves for precision mixing of gases. Model with pilot lamp allows continuous flow of gas for instant ignition. Spare Adapter Tips: Tips are of special design to give a non-oxidizing flame for cleaner soldering and brazing. Excellent for intricate work on chains, rings, pendants and delicate jewelry. Tips are not recommended for use with acetylene. TORCHES PILOT TIPS ST-302 OXYGEN & ACETYLENE NO 4 ST-303 OXYGEN & ARTIFICIAL GAS YES 4 ST-304 OXYGEN & BUTANE OR PROPANE NO 4 ST-305 OXYGEN & NATURAL GAS NO 3 ST-306 SET OF SIX ADAPTER TIPS 31. Harris Melting Torch An ideal melting torch for large amounts of gold, silver and other alloys, but only small quantities of platinum. Heavy duty, all brass body, has a check valve safety feature to prevent reverse flow or mixing of gases. Leak proof valves for safety and durability. Supplied with one large single orifice melting tip, 100% flame tested and inspected. All torches are UL listed. ST-520 HARRIS MELTING TORCH ST-521 REPLACEMENT TIP NO Butane Torches Solid state, trigger ignition melter uses clean burning fuel for on-the-spot work. Adjustable flame temperature up to 2500 F. Ideal for heating wax working tools and smoothing wax models. Unit may be refilled. 34. Gasaver Eliminates gas wastage during torch start up/shut down and between flame applications. Ideal for brazing and welding production applications. UL listed. ST-089 ST-090 ST-089 ST-090 ST-093 CAPACITY 26 g FUEL 14 g FUEL BUTANE REFILL 9 oz 33. Leak Detector Solution ST-093 After every assembly, check connections for leaks. A simple test will help ensure your safety. Just apply solution with the provided applicator. Solution will bubble in 5 seconds if there is a leak. Oxygen compatible. ST-515 ST Combustible Gas Alarm MODEL WDW101 WDW104 Small compact electronic sensor that needs to be placed near the source of a potential gas leak. Detects combustible gases; natural, LP, propane and butane. Audible alarm similar to smoke buzzer. Size 4 1 /2 X 3 1 /4 X1 5 /8. ST oz. BOX OF 12 ST oz ST-259 POWER 110V 221

190 TORCHES 36. Smith Melting Torch Powerful, heavy duty torch is designed to reach flame temperatures of 5400 F quickly. Prevents platinum becoming brittle when casting. Torch body is made of nickel plated solid brass, with stainless steel ball valves for positive sealing and precision control. Tip is of heavy copper with a single orifice for platinum melting. Multi flame rose bud tips are designed from heavy wall copper. Excellent for melting gold and silver. Includes one tip head and 12 of covered dual hose. It is highly recommended to use flashback arrestors for melting operations. These arrestors mount directly into the threaded ends of the torch body. Torch handle MW5 is suitable for all flame tips. ST-500 ST-501 ST-502 ST-503 ST-504 ST-504 ST-505 TORCH HANDLE-MW5 (LIFE TIME WARRANTY) FLASHBACK ARRESTOR FOR OXYGEN/ FUEL GAS Spare Tips APPLICATION GASES PRESSURE MELTING CAPACITY OXY/FUEL ST-500 MULTI-FLAME ROSE BUD CASTING GOLD OR SILVER 8 oz OXY/ ACETYLENE 10/10 MT603 ST-501 LG, MULTI-FLAME ROSE BUD CASTING GOLD OR SILVER 12 oz OXY/ ACETYLENE 10/10 MT605 ST-502 SINGLE-FLAME TIP CASTING PLATINUM 3 oz OXY/ HYDROGEN 11/11 MW210 GOLD OR SILVER 5OZ OXY/ ACETYLENE 11/11 ST-503 SINGLE-FLAME TIP CASTING PLATINUM 3 oz OXY/ PROPANE 11/11 MW411 RECESSED ORIFICE GOLD OR SILVER 5 oz OXY/ PROPANE 11/11 ST-505 Dual Hose-12 1 /2 length, 3 /16 Inside diameter FUEL FITTING ST-262 T GRADE LP HOSE B-B ST-263 ACETYLENE/ OXYGEN B-B ST-264 ACETYLENE/ OXYGEN A-B ST-265 PROPANE/ OXYGEN B-B 37. HydroGem A state-of-the-art system. The HydroGem is a very safe machine, as there is no stored gas. These machines use electricity to break down distilled water to create a clean fuel source. HydroGem comes complete with one torch and tip set, flexible hose, atomizer and necessary gauges. The needle tip torch flame may be used for soldering, brazing, welding or melting. Flame temperatures from C. Working delivery pressure is low and the built-in flashback arrestor is designed to help stop any accidental burning of the gas back down the tube to the machine. Manufactured from the finest materials to stringent standards for long lasting service. Operational instructions are included. Meets all current CE requirements. ST-525 HYDROGEM COMPLETE SET 222

191 TWEEZERS 1. General Purpose Tweezers Stainless steel, non magnetic, satin finish tweezers for handling all miniature parts. They have tapered shanks, beveled edges and matched points that have been honed. STYLE TW-801 #1 SWISS S.S TW-101 #1 ECONO S.S TW-803 #3 SWISS S.S TW-103 #3 ECONO S.S TW-805 #5 SWISS S.S TW-105 #5 ECONO S.S TW-807 #7 SWISS S.S TW-107 #7 ECONO S.S TW-809 #3 SWISS TI. 2. Economy Diamond Tweezers Made of the finest materials. Very functional for sorting, inspecting, and handling of diamonds. Features locking and non-locking, various types of points, fine to large, in attractive finishes of matt or black. TYPE FINISH LOCK TW-401 FINE MATT NO TW-402 MEDIUM MATT NO TW-403 LARGE MATT NO TW-404 EX-LONG MATT NO TW-421 FINE BLACK NO TW-422 MEDIUM BLACK NO TW-423 LARGE BLACK NO TW-400 MEDIUM MATT YES TW-420 MEDIUM BLACK YES TW-406 GROOVED MATT NO TW-405 SHOVEL MATT NO 224

192 3. Pearl Holding Tweezers Made of carbon steel, nickel plated, with special shaped cup ends coated with teflon for protection while handling precious pearls. TW-960 TEFLON TIPS 4. Ceramic Tweezers High quality, non-magnetic, anti-static, light weight aluminum body tweezers. Indispensable when soldering or working with platinum jewelry. TW-820 TW-821 CERAMIC TWEEZERS CERAMIC TIP TWEEZERS 5. Head & Shank Tweezers Made of stainless steel with a serrated base and slide lock. Ideal for holding shanks and settings in position when soldering. TW-970 TW-472 DELUXE-S.S ECONO-S.S 6. Boley Style Tweezers Premium quality tweezers. Made of stainless steel. Useful for handling very fine parts. AA and MM are for general use. GG - pointed indented shank. RR -wide shank. STYLE TW-810 AA SWISS STAINLESS TW-110 AA ECONO STAINLESS TW-811 AA SWISS NICKEL PLATED TW-111 AA ECONO NICKEL PLATED TW-814 MM SWISS STAINLESS TW-114 MM ECONO STAINLESS TW-815 MM SWISS NICKEL PLATED TW-113 MM ECONO NICKEL PLATED TW-116 RR ECONO STAINLESS TW-115 RR ECONO NICKEL PLATED TW-118 GG ECONO STAINLESS TW-117 GG ECONO NICKEL PLATED 225

193 TWEEZERS 7. Diamond Tweezers Absolutely the best and the finest made tweezers specifically for the professional jeweler. Perfectly aligned hardened tips, in all point sizes. For DiamondTweezers Page Ring Holding Tweezers Secures rings from the inside to enable soldering of the shank ends. Also useful for holding two rings to solder. 8. Cyber-therm Tweezers Unique tungsten steel alloy withstands temperature up to 3000 C for 5-10 minutes. Handles protected by insulating sleeves of heat resistant rubber. TW-201 STRAIGHT 145mm 9. Solder Free Tweezers Swiss made, anti-magnetic, acid resistant tweezers that can be dipped in flux. Solder will not adhere to the ends. LENGTH TW /8 12. Spring Grip Tweezers Spring grip brass tweezers are useful for sand blasting, pen plating and inspection. Made of solid brass with rubber coating. Points are bent to secure work. LENGTH TW /2 10. Soldering Tweezers Cross locking stainless steel tweezers with serrated tips and fiber handles, to protect hands from heat when soldering. Overall length 6 3 /4. LENGTH TW /2 13. Cross Lock Tweezers Self locking tweezers that are ideal for use in the Third Hand for soldering. Different types of jaws to suit special applications. TW-473 TW STRAIGHT BENT TW-475 POINTED -4 3 /4 TW-476 POINTED -6 1 /2 TW-477 BLUNT -6 1 /2 TW-478 FREE STANDING -6 1 /4

194 VISES 1. Swivel Head Pin Vise Reversible collet in one pin vise with a screw chuck. 7. Wood handle Pin Vise Economical steel pin vise chuck with hardwood fluted handle. PV /8 CAPACITY -3 1 /2 LONG 2. Sliding Pin Vise Slide lock pin vise is easy to operate with one hand. CAPACITY LENGTH PV mm 102mm 8. Steel Hand Vise Spring action serrated jaws work by turning a wing screw. PV-406 VISE OPENING MM 3. Double-Ended Pin Vise Hexagon head vise with reversible steel collets in each end. CAPACITY LENGTH PV /2 4. Double-Ended Pin Vise with Four Collets Pin vise with steel collets of different size mounted at both ends. LENGTH JAW WIDTH PV mm 36mm 9. Wing Nut Hand Vise Serrated, grooved, spring action jaws, with a wing nut and hollow handle. CAPACITY LENGTH PV mm 110mm 5. Square Chuck Pin Vise Vise with two steel chucks and a spare chuck held in hollow brass handle. LENGTH JAW WIDTH PV mm 16mm PV mm 8mm 10. Graver Holders with Chucks Durable graver holder with fine finished hardwood handles designed for comfort. Capacity 0-3mm. HO-203 HO-201 HO-202 HO-204 LENGTH JAW OPENS PV mm mm PV mm mm PV mm mm PV mm mm PV mm mm 6. Lowell Pattern Hand Vise Hollow handle and grooved corrugated jaws that open and close by turning the handle. Holds long wire pieces. Width of jaws 1 /2. HO-201 HO-202 HO-203 HO Hand Vise Plier ROUND MUSHROOM PEAR TAPERED SPINDLE Hardened steel, serrated jaw vise with a quick lock system by hand grip. Jaw size 1 X 5 /8 Max. Opening 5 /8. PV LENGTH 4 3 /4 (120mm) LENGTH PV /2

195 WATCH TOOLS 1. Case Press with Nylon / Aluminum Dies A lightweight, inexpensive case press made in a one piece cast metal design. Easy location of watch cases in a set of mar resistant nylon dies for all different watch sizes. Complete die sets, hollow and flat, fit easily by a simple snap on/off operation. Alignment is accurate and the operator has clear WA-011 visibility of the case being closed. WA CASE PRESS WITH NYLON DIES CASE PRESS WITH ALUM. DIES 2. Waterproof Case Wrench-Jaxa Type A world famous wrench, of exceptional value, that meets the highest standards of quality. Comes complete with a full set of pins for positive location of any shape of watch case back. Wrench and spare pins are neatly packed in a hardwood box. 3. L-G OpenAll Case Wrench This sturdy cast frame press clamps in your bench vise. Close fitting precision screw for fine adjustment, with an additional torque bar that provides the extra pressure to remove the more difficult cases. The case opener may also be used with an adjustable case wrench. The base accommodates a set of six inserts sizes 18.5, 20.2, 22.5, 26.5, 28.3, and 29.5mm. 4. L-G Master Case Opener Tool that enables opening and closing all sizes and shapes of waterproof watches. Includes four sets of pins for notches, holes, pins or polygons. Comfortable knurled handle with fine adjustment to fit case backs for easy unscrewing without mar or damage. WA-001 WA-002 WA-005 WA-008 WA-009 WA WA WA WA WA WA WA WA-006 WA CASE WRENCH CASE WRENCH WITH BOX WOOD BOX CASE WRENCH W/BASE CASE WRENCH REPLACEMENT RING 18.5mm REPLACEMENT RING 20.2mm REPLACEMENT RING 22.5mm REPLACEMENT RING 26.5mm REPLACEMENT RING 28.3mm REPLACEMENT RING 29.5mm BASE ONLY MASTER CASE OPENER 12 PCS PIN SET 5. Movement Holder with Four Pins Unique metal holder with a delicate screw grip and adjustable jaws. Four round shaped non mar nylon pins located in spaced jaw holes to adjust all types of movements. WA-017 MOVEMENT HOLDER Movement Holder Bench Type An attractive metal holder for every watch repairer that easily clamps to the edge of your work bench. Specially shaped non-mar sliding jaws move smoothly on guides by means of a fine pitch screw knob. Suitable for all sizes of movements. 7. Screw Link Bracelet Opener WA-015 BENCH TYPE HOLDER Table top screw tool to unmount bracelets with screw links. This tool comes with a set of six screwdriver blades for different bracelets. A very practical tool for watchmakers. WA-026 BRACELET OPENER

196 8. Bracelet Holder An essential fixture for difficult to hold watch bracelets while removing or fitting pins and screws. This stable base block has slots of varying widths to handle different thickness of watch straps or bracelets. Additionally, there are holes in the base to allow the pins to pop out without damage. Comes with two punches. 12. Rolex-Style Opener WATCH TOOLS A special case opener for oyster shaped cases of Rolex watches. This tool includes a wrench type handle with a set of dies. Six metal die sizes 18.5, 20.2, 22.5, 26.5, 28.3 and 29.5mm. WA Spring Bar Tools BRACELET HOLDER This tool is ideal for changing spring bars of watches. A round point and forked tip at either end suits most of the routine operations. WA-007 WA-018 WA Crystal Fitting Tool OPENER - ECONO OPENER - BERGEON Plier style tool that comes with three mobile dies. Parallel plier jaws have circular rubber padded hinged discs. WA WA-007 WA WA WA WA ECONO SPRING BAR TOOL STANDARD POINT BAR TOOL FINE POINT BAR TOOL STANDARD POINT TIP FINE POINT TIP WA WA Watch Opener and Pin Remover CRYSTAL FITTING TOOL Well constructed watch opening tool. Also removes pins from watchbracelets. Holds the watch securely. Tool ends are hardened for long life. 10. Link Pin Remover A tool that has a two fold use: pin removal or insertion. This compact tool has extra spacers to adjust to all bracelet sizes. Made of non-mar material it will protect precious metals from scratch marks. The pusher pin is hardened and moves by a fine feed screw. WA-024 WATCH OPENER & PIN REMOVER WA-025 LINK PIN REMOVER 15. Lever Type Case Press Easy lever operated hand press, to close watches with snap backs. Comes with five nylon dies and two additional spindles for screw-on dies. 11. Link Pin Remover for Bracelet Convenient tool for removing pins from different types of bracelet link bands. High impact nylon pads will not scratch or mar the metal. Pin is made of hardened tool steel. WA-012 LINK PIN REMOVER WA CASE PRESS 231

197 WATCH TOOLS 16. Snap-Back Case Knife- Swiss A Swiss made, curved shaped tool to open all snap type watch case backs. Gentle leverage removes even the most difficult cases. 20. Universal Case Holder A handy adjustable metal bar type case opener that has quadrant locks to fit in case cover slots. Comfortable cushion hand grips provide ample torque to open the most stubborn case backs. 17. Crab Opener WA-022 CASE KNIFE A compact and convenient wrench, this tool has a knurled screw to adjust the pins to suit different watch case backs. Pins are tempered and fine finished to grip the notches for easy removal and replacement of screw case covers. WA-016 CASE HOLDER/ KEY 21. Crystal Remover and Inserter A safe and easy way to remove unbreakable watch crystals without dismantling the watch. The jaws open from 12 to 37mm and are designed for both ladies and men s watches. Supplied complete with baseplate. SIZE WA /8 X 1 1 /8 WA-014 CRYSTAL REMOVER/ BASE 18. Hand Remover Two different extraction tools for easy removal of delicate watch or instrument hands. Simple push down on plunger will extract hands. The center post acts as a guide and retains the hand. WA Hand Jig with Dies A bench styled jig that may be held in a vise. Gentle pressure applied by a central fine pitch screw to properly close case backs. Jig includes a set of nylon dies so that no mars may occur. WA-021 WA-019 WA-021 PRESTO TYPE PLUNGER TYPE WA-020 HAND JIG WITH DIES 19. Moebius Oils Specially formulated high purity oils that retain fluidity over a wide temperature range. Time tested and proven to be the ideal lubricants for all watch movements and delicate micro mechanisms. 23. Vise for Waterproof Watches An ingenious hand held vise that has an instant locking system. Plastic protected working surface to avoid scratch marks or mar. 232 WA-030 WA-031 WA-032 SYNTHETIC OIL QUARTZ OIL NATURAL OIL WA-023 VISE FOR WATCHES

198 WAXES 2. Ferris -Pellet Injection Waxes 1. Castaldo Supercera Injection Wax Specifically formulated waxes made from non-toxic natural ingredients. Positively clean burn out is assured without any ash residue. Built-in release agent allows ease of extraction from the mold. Select from various types to suit your application. Available in block form packaging- 50 lb. COLOR FEATURES INJECT. TEMP CW-016 AQUA VERY FLEXIBLE 140 F/60 C CW-017 ORANGE FLEXIBLE 155 F/68 C CW-018 RED GENERAL PURPOSE 165 F/74 C CW-019 GOLD HARD 170 F/76 C CW-020 GREEN MINIMAL SHRINKAGE 150 F/65 C Waxes in pallets manufactured from high grade raw materials and formulated for exceptional and consistent quality. These fine injection waxes are suitable for special applications according to their properties. All wax types have built-in relese agents that help for easy extraction. Turquoise A general purpose, tough, medium hard wax suitable for thin or thick sections. Self releasing from the mold. Injection Temp. 155 F/68 C CW lb Red A special feature of this medium hard wax is its fluidity that contributes towards excellent memory and readability. Injection Temp. 160 F/71 C. CW lb Blue A tough, hard wax that is ideally suited for molds with difficult draws. Easy clean extraction for intricate patterns. Injection Temp. 155 F/68 C. CW lb NYC-Blue Similar characteristics as the turquoise, but the brighter hue allows for more clear definition. Tough with regular hardness. Injection Temp. 155 F/68 C. CW lb Aqua An all purpose medium hard tough wax that is well suited for small to large molds. Inherent properties are good for fine details. Injection Temp. 160 F/71 C. CW lb Magna Pink A fast melting fluid specialty wax that combines hardness and toughness. Minimal shrinkage reproduces fine detail work. Injection Temp. 155 F/68 C. CW lb 3. Ferris Platinum Injection Wax 4. Plast-O-Wax Lavender A low temperature injection wax of outstanding durability and strength. Good flow characteristics give crisp details. Formulated for extended shelf life. Minimal shrinkage with flexibility. Injection Temp. 160 F/71 C. CW lb Light Green Good fluidity and excellent reproduction. Injection Temp. 155 F/68 C. CW lb Dark Blue A frequently used plastic wax in darker shades for easy readability. Renders a good smooth surface with minimal shrinkage. May be steam de-waxed. Ideal for detail work. Medium plasticity. Injection Temp. 155 F/68 C. CW lb Purple Higher Plasticity. Injection Temp.160 F/71 C. CW lb 234

199 5. Ferris File-A-Wax WAXES This wax is most suited to produce a variety of finely detailed shapes. Very compatible for creating designs, as it can be sawn, carved and shaped either by hand or machine. A clean burn out from the mold is guaranteed, however it cannot be injected or steam de-waxed. Identifiable colors indicate the characteristics. Available as basic kit, in bar, block or slices. COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN CHARACTERISTICS Most flexible with regular hardness Medium hard, with limited flexibility Hard, with no flexibility, good for fine detail work. File-A-Wax Slices-BSL Size 1 7 /16 h X 3 5 /8 w in assorted thickness 3 /16 to 1. Pack contains 16 pcs. 1 pc. of 1, 3 pcs. of and 4 pcs. each 0.280, 0.190, thick. File-A-Wax Slices-ASL Size 1 7 /16 h X 3 5 /8 w and assorted thickness 1 /8 to 1 /4. Pack contains 18 pieces. 6 pieces each 0.280, and thick. COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN 1 /2 LB CW-335 CW-336 CW-337 COLOR 1 LB BLUE CW-338 PURPLE CW-339 GREEN CW-340 File-A-Wax Bar Size 1 3 /16 X 1 3 /16 X 3 3 /4-3 pieces of one color. File-A-Wax Basic Kit Size 1 3 /16 X 1 3 /16 X 3 3 /4-3 pieces. CW-381 COLOR BLUE/PURPLE/GREEN- 1 EA CW-383 CW-384 CW-382 COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN File-A-Wax Block Size 3 1 /2 X 3 1 /2 X 1 1 /8-1 /2 lb Size 3 5 /8 X 6 X 1 1 /2-1 lb File-A-Wax Assortment Various shapes and blue, purple, green colors in all three hardnesses. COLOR 1 /2 LB 1 LB BLUE CW-329 CW-332 PURPLE CW-330 CW-333 GREEN CW-331 CW-334 CW-410 CW-411 QTY 14 PCS -PROFESSIONAL 11 PCS -JUNIOR 235

200 WAXES D 6. Ferris File-A-Wax Designer Shape Designer shapes offer a selection of basic pieces in individual shapes. Ideally suited for large custom design work. Increases productivity while reducing both the carving time and waste. It is the preferred choice when working on special creations as it may be worked both by hand or machine. All shapes are available in three grades of hardness. Packaging 1 lb. B COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN CHARACTERISTICS Most flexible with regular hardness Medium hard, with limited flexibility Hard, with no flexibility, good for fine detail work A B. Square- Assorted SIZE COLOR 3 9 /16 SQ (22 PCS) BLUE CW-240 PURPLE CW-241 GREEN CW-242 C A. Round: CW-222, 223, ea. all other round sizes are 1 ea. SIZE (D X L) SIZE (D X L) SIZE (D X L) SIZE (D X L) SIZE (D X L) COLOR 1 5 /16 X 11 1 /4 1 3 /4 X 12 1 /8 2 1 /4 X 7 1 /2 2 5 /8 X 5 1 /2 3 1 /16 X 4 1 /16 BLUE CW-222 CW-225 CW-228 CW-231 CW-234 PURPLE CW-223 CW-226 CW-229 CW-232 CW-235 GREEN CW-224 CW-227 CW-230 CW-233 CW-236 C. Square- Block D. Oval COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN SIZE 3 9 /16 SQ X 2 3 /8 H CW-237 CW-238 CW-239 SIZE(D X d X L) SIZE(D X d X L) COLOR 3 1 /8 X 2 5 /8 X 4 5 /8 3 5 /8 X 2 3 /4 X 3 5 /8 BLUE CW-243 CW-246 PURPLE CW-244 CW-247 GREEN CW-245 CW-248 Pack contains 22 pcs. 5 pcs. each 7 /8, 5 /8, 3 /8, 1 /4 and 2 pcs. of 3 /16 thick. B-1062 T-1062 T-1062E B Ferris Wax Ring Tubes These preformed tubes and bars provide an intelligent approach when designing rings, cuff links, small jewelry and other art pieces. They respond quickly to creative inspirations. Ready to use, in three grades of hardness, that may be either hand or machine worked. All ring tubes and bars are 6 long. T-150 T-100 T-250 T-200 T-875 Tube with Center Hole Round Bar Flat Sided Tube Tube with Hole / Ecc Flat Hole / Ecc COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN BLUE PURPLE GREEN BLUE PURPLE GREEN BLUE PURPLE GREEN SIZE 1 1 /8 X 1 5 /8 hole/ecc T /16 X 1 3 /16 5 /8 hole/ecc T /8 X 1 1 /8 5 /8 hole/ecc T X 1 5 /8 hole T-150 CW-250 CW-251 CW-252 CW-253 CW-254 CW-255 CW-256 CW-257 CW-258 CW-324 CW-325 CW-326 COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN BLUE PURPLE GREEN BLUE PURPLE GREEN Round Tube SIZE 7 /8 dia. 5 /8 hole T /16 dia. 5 /8 hole/ecc T-1062E 1 1 /16 dia. 5 /8 hole T-1062 CW-306 CW-307 CW-308 CW-309 CW-310 CW-311 CW-312 CW-313 CW-314 COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN BLUE PURPLE GREEN Round Bar SIZE 7 /8 dia. B /16 dia. B-1062 CW-300 CW-301 CW-302 CW-303 CW-304 CW

201 8. Red Utility Wax Sheet An all purpose wax that may be used for filling small imperfections and applying sprue to sprue bases. Melts at 173 F/78 C and has plastic quality at room temperature. Pkg 1 /2 lb. 12. Flexible Wax Sheet WAXES These high grade sheets are used by designers for a wide variety of applications, drawing, layout, or tracings. Of even thickness and pliable at room temperature, these sheets can be cut and formed as desired. Wax sheets easily burn out from molds. Green- Firm. Pink- Soft. Size 4 square 32 sheets in a pack. CW-414 REGULAR SHEET 3 X 6 X 1 /8 9. Yellow Sticky Wax A fast sticky wax for joining different waxes together. Melting temperature at F/ C. CW-415 CW Inlay Wax STICK 1 /4 D X 4 L 1 oz BEADS 1 lb A wax for filling voids, building, and repairing wax patterns. Can be carved without chipping or breaking. Melting temperature 163 F/73 C. GAUGE IN MM GREEN PINK CW-363 CW CW-364 CW CW-365 CW CW-366 CW CW-367 CW CW-368 CW CW-369 CW-376 Wax Sheet Assortment A collection of wax sheets in all different gauge sizes. Size 4 sq. 32 sheets. Pack contains 4 sheets of 16 & 18G, and 6 sheets of 20, 22, 24, 26G each. CW-377 CW-378 COLOR PINK GREEN 13. Mold-A-Wax A durable wax form that works like clay and blends with other waxes at room temperature. Take advantage of this special feature to free form sculptures, leaves and flowers. Black- Medium pliability. Red- Soft and more pliable.pkg. 1 lb. CW-418 STICKS 1 /4 D X 4 L 1 oz BLUE REGULAR CW-419 STICKS 1 /4 D X 4 L 1 oz GREEN REGULAR CW-420 CHUNKS 1 lb BLUE REGULAR CW-421 CHUNKS 1 lb GREEN REGULAR 11. Sprue Wax Rods These rods are refined to eliminate impurities and guaranteed to burn out quickly without expansion or residue. Perfect for use in a sprue building system. Available in different diameters and lengths to suit every demanding application. Red- Flexible and in regular hardness. Green- More pliable and medium hard. CW-408 CW-409 COLOR BLACK RED 14. Disclosing Wax A creamy type soft wax for repair of superficial imperfections in wax patterns. This wax helps detect high spots or cavities. Easy to apply with finger or a spatula. Softens at 98 F/37 C, and flows at 173 F/78 C. DIA. X L GREEN RED 1 /4 X 6 CW-024 CW /8 X 6 CW-025 CW /8 X 24 CW-026 CW-029 CW-440 COLOR DISCLOSING WAX 20 oz 237

202 WAXES 15. Wax Wire- Spool Pliable wax wire in gauge sizes, strong enough to be twisted, bent or formed to any shape without cracking or breaking. Suitable for applications such as clasps, prongs, retention or sprues. Pkg. 1 /4 lb GAUGE INCH MM ROUND HALF ROUND CW CW CW-343 CW CW-344 CW CW-345 CW CW CW CW Wax Wire Assortment Wax wire in 4 lengths. Round- 10, 14 & 18G Half Round- 6, 8, 12 & 14G Half Pear- 6G. CW-360 ASSORTED 16. Kerr -Injection Waxes-Flakes Injection waxes, in flakes, having exceptional flow and flexibility for molds of intricate details. Characteristics include a built-in release agent for clean extraction from the mold. Six grades to select from, depending on individual requirements. NYC- Pink Super Pink Excellent flow and flexibility. Reproduces detail designs and filigree with ease of extraction from mold. Injection Temp. 155 F/68 C. CW lb Accu Ruby Red Preferable for the injection of medium sized molds. Less flexible, but has good readability with minimal shrinkage. Injection Temp. 150 F/65 C. CW lb Tuffy Green A very tough and flexible wax specifically suited to large molds. Easy to work without fear of damage or distortion. Injection Temp.165 F/73 C. CW lb A free flowing rapid cooling wax that is easy to extract from molds. Deep hue color contributes to increased readability. Injection Temp. 150 F/65 C. CW lb Aqua Green General purpose wax for injection in medium to large molds. Flow and flexibility adapted for detail design work. Injection Temp. 150 F/65 C. CW lb Flexplast A deep blue, extremely flexible, free flowing wax that reproduces sharp detail designs. Tough but easy to extract from the mold. Injection Temp. 155 F/68 C. CW lb 17. Kerr Pearl Injection Wax Once liquefied at 155 F/68 C, a low injection pressure of 3-10 PSI minimizes pattern shrinkage. Features a uniform thickness, satin smooth surface, and practically no distortion. Extracts from mold easily and burns out cleanly without any residual ash. Three colors for easy pattern reading. Sapphire Pearls CW lb Blue Zircon Pearls CW lb Pink Tourmaline Pearls CW lb 238

203 18. Matt Wax Bars & Slices Matt carving waxes are formulated for professional carvers. Waxes are available in three grades with varying degrees of flexiblity. Waxes are compounded to avoid contamination, flaws or porosity. Select from bars, blocks or slices. Matt Bar Kit Contains three 1 /6 lb bars; one each of blue, purple and green. Size 1 7 /8 X 1 1 /8 X 3 1 /8. Pkg. 1 /2 lb. COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN Matt Wax Bar Contains three 1 /6 lb bars of one color. Size 1 7 /16 X 1 1 /8 X 3 1 /8. Pkg. 1 /2 lb. WAXES CHARACTERISTICS MELTING TEMP Flexible and easily bent to shapes 200 F / 93 C Medium hard, good for carving 225 F / 104 C Rigid, useful for milling and machining 230 F / 110 C Matt Wax Block Size 1 7 /16 X 3 1 /8 X 3 3 /8 1 /2 lb. Size 1 7 /16 X 3 1 /8 X 6 1 /2 1 lb. MATT# CW Matt Wax Slices -Thick Size 1 7 /16 x 3 1 /8 assorted thickness from 1 /8 to 1. Pkg. 1 lb. COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN MATT# CW CW CW Matt Wax Slices -Thin Size 1 7 /16 x 3 1 /8 assorted thickness from 1 /8 to 1 /2. Pkg. 1 /2 lb. 1 /2 LB MATT# 1 LB MATT# CW CW CW CW CW CW Matt Bracelet Wax Blank Create your own designs in a variety of shapes. Round, oval or square 6 long. COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN MATT# CW CW CW COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN MATT# CW CW CW COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN MATT# CW CW CW Matt Smooth Wax Tablets These innovations provides jewelry designers and model makers with large, flat, very smooth surfaces for designing jewelry directly on to carving wax. Tablet size is 6 X 2 5 /8. Set A 6PCS: 3 tablets 4.5mm, 1 tablet 6mm, 1 tablet 8mm & 1 tablet 10.5mm. Set B 7PCS: 4 tablets 4.5mm & 3 tablets 6mm. Matt Wax Routing Bur A carbide bur for routing designs directly in matt wax tablets. To be used on the matt trimmer. Size 2.3mm diameter and 15mm cutting edge. CW CARBIDE BUR 19. Matt Miter Box Set A fixture for sawing wax bars, tubes, and rods to precise lengths. Set consists of aluminum miter box, steel hand saw, and stop lock. COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN SET A MATT# SET B MATT# CW CW CW CW CW CW CW MATT MITER BOX SET 239

204 WAXES 20. Matt Wax Ring Tubes Pre-formed special profile wax tubes, in various sizes, get you started quickly on creations with intricate designs. Available in solid round, tube, or flat side tube, these can be easily cut to exact lengths using the Matt miter box. One per package. COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN CHARACTERISTICS MELTING TEMP Flexible and easily bent to shapes. 200 F / 93 C Medium hard, good for carving. 225 F / 104 C Rigid, useful for milling and machining. 230 F / 110 C Flat Sided with Hole Solid Round Bar Round with Hole COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN BLUE PURPLE GREEN BLUE PURPLE GREEN SIZE 1 X 1 1 /8 5 /8 hole 1 1 /8 X 1 1 /8 5 /8 hole 1 1 /4 X 1 1 /4 5 /8 hole MATT# CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW SIZE 7 /8 dia. 1 1 /16 dia. 1 5 /16 dia. MATT# CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW SIZE 7 /8 dia. 5 /8 hole 1 1 /16 dia. 5 /8 hole 1 5 /16 dia. 5 /8 hole MATT# CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN SIZE 1 1 /16 DIA. 5 /8 hole/ecc Off Center Hole MATT# CW CW CW Matt Wax Ring Tube Kit CW ASSORTED WAX TUBE TWO IN EACH COLOR 2 ROUND/4 FLAT SIDE-12PCS. 21. Matt Wax Gun Kit A unique precision controlled method to transform pellets into extrusions of different profiles. Different design methods are possible; free form on mandrels, on water, and weaving. Kit contains, gun, two brass tips, wrench, three colors of wax and an instruction book. Blue Pellets: For designing on a mandrel or without a support. Green Pellets: For creating graceful models in water. Red Pellets: For producing flexible threads for weaving. Kit contains: Gun, two brass tips, wrench, three colors of wax, and 113 page book. 22. Matt Wax Pellets for Matt Gun These wax pellets load directly into the Matt gun. Blue: for mandrel work. Green: for use on water. Red: for weaving. COLOR MATT# PACK OF 20 MATT# PACK OF 130 BLUE 951/1 CW /6 CW-141 GREEN 951/2 CW /7 CW-142 RED 951/5 CW /8 CW Matt Ring Tube Sizer Enlarge the finger size of wax models evenly and accurately. Slide this tool through the hole in the wax ring tube and rotate clockwise. The embedded steel blade will scrape the inner wall to enlarge the hole. Size CW-144 CW-145 CW-138 CW GUN KIT 110V 955/220 GUN KIT 220V CA951/3 MATT EXTRA TIP-SMALL CA951/4 MATT EXTRA TIP-LARGE CW-122 CW E EURO SCALE 2890 US SCALE 240

205 24. Matt Creative Setting Kit Jewelry designer Adolfo Mattielo in his book How to create settings in Metal Wire and Wax illustrates a step by step guideline with drawings explaining the process. The 8 x 11 plastic laminated book has 32 pages with 250 detailed illustrations. Additionally, the templates provided enhance your stone setting and positioning ability. CW-115 BK-422 CW-117 CW CREATIVE SETTING KIT (INCLUDES BOOK AND TWO TEMPLATES) 2851 BOOK- HOW TO CREATE SETTINGS 2853 SPARE TEMPLATE FOR ROUND SETTING 2554 SPARE TEMPLATE FOR OVAL, PEAR AND MARQUISE SETTINGS WAXES 25. Techniques of Jewelry Design A full color 152 page book presents a comprehensive resource for designers and model makers. Each chapter explains projects with clear illustrations, color rendering and gem stone setting by professional jewelers. CW-160 BK-427 CW BOOK AND SET OF FIVE TEMPLATES 1522 BOOK- TECHNIQUES OF JEWELRY 5110 SET OF FIVE TEMPLATES ONLY 26. Matt Wax Modeling - Video A professional VHS Video, demonstrating the correct techniques when working with modeling wax. Explicit details guide you each step of the way to perfection. Time-16 min. CW VHS VIDEO 27. Matt Designer Templates for Jewelry CW-153 CW-155 Made in unbreakable light green plastic, these templates eliminate the time consuming process of drawing. Different cut out shapes for ladies or gents patterns have all sizes clearly calibrated. Suitable for brilliant, oval, pear and marquise shapes, in both metric and carat equivalents. CW-152 CW-154 CW-156 CW-152 CW-153 CW-154 CW-155 CW Matt Ring Templates # STONES # SIGNET RING # BALLERINA RINGS # FANCY RING # RING SIDE VIEW Easy to use when designing the outlines of ring sizes for ladies or gents. Made in unbreakable plastic, it includes 18 of the most popular to unusual designs. Includes instructions. 29. Matt Bracelet Templates Enables layout with accuracy and symmetry. Made in durable plastic with precise milled shapes, it is easy to trace round, oval or square bracelets in all sizes. Includes instructions. CW RING TEMPLATE CW BRACELET TEMPLATE 241

206 WAXES 30. Matt Mini Lathe with Gauge A hand held versatile lathe. Assembles directly to your Foredom handpiece #30 for all types of turning and milling. You can easily produce bands, bezels, or settings with the tools provided. A stop gauge lets you achieve exact measurements on thickness and diameters. Kit includes lathe, collets, cutting tools, wax rods, wrench and 32 page booklet. 32. Matt Shaper Made of aluminum, with a steel support table, this accessory fits directly on to your handpiece.the table provides support for large or small workpieces and is adjustable for cuts at all angles. A removeable fence regulates the depth of cut ensuring a smooth safe operation. Kit contains accessory with rotary files, template wrench, and instruction booklet. CW MATT MINI LATHE KIT Spare Tools for Matt Mini Lathe CW GAUGE ONLY CW S.S. BLADES SET OF 3 CW HOLDING COLLET CW MILLING TABLE ONLY CW-149 CA2845 TOOL SQUARE END CW CENTERING TOOL 33. Matt Wax Rods CW-124 CW MATT SHAPER 2886 ROTARY FILE Matt wax rods for use in the Matt Mini lathe. All rods have 1 /4 centering holes for holding collet. Four pieces 1 1 /2 long per color. 31. Matt Trimmer Enables you to precisely file shapes, flat or curved at various angles. Fits to your Foredom handpiece #30 with an adjustable work platform. This feature is designed to simplify the operation while improving performance. Ideal for creating channels. Kit includes rotary files, ring templates, color waxes and an instruction manual. COLOR BLUE PURPLE GREEN Ø 1 5 /16 MATT# Ø 1 3 /32 MATT# Ø 7 /8 MATT# CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW CW Matt Gold Collector Made of high impact plastic, with a removable plexiglass shield, to provide a convenient enclosure for working of precious metals. Collects particles of gold and other precious metals for easy retrieval. Also protects eyes, skin and clothing while drilling, grinding and brushing. CW MATT GOLD COLLECTOR CW MATT TRIMMER-KIT CW Mandrel Tapered/Stepped Smooth polished mandrels, tapered and stepped are mounted on a sturdy steel base. Mandrel rotates for easy creation of wax wire designs. Suitable for ring sizes CS-204 CW-100 CS-204 TAPERED MANDREL STEPPED MANDREL

207 36. Precision Speedy Wax Tool A high quality wax tool for wax modeling. This compact unit has a rheostat control for various temperature settings. The pen type handpiece is designed to dissipate heat. It also contains a slide switch for convenience. The tool tip is easily interchanged. Ideal for carving, shaping and quick touch ups. WAXES 37. Wax Worker A versatile tool with excellent wax control for pattern making, repairing and spruing. Variable temperature settings suitable for different wax types. Ergonomic handpiece has instant heat up. Replaceable tips, with a single set screw. May also be used for carving, smoothing and texturing. 38. Precision Waxer Heavy duty industrial waxer for wax modeling, carving, shaping or sizing. Accurate temperature control with nine different settings. Slim, lightweight handpiece with changeable tips for the most challenging work. Features include pilot light, on/off switch, handpiece and three assorted tips. Spare Tips for Precision Waxer CI-005 CI-006 CI-007 YELLOW WIDE GROOVE BLUE NARROW BEND ORANGE FLAT 39. Kerr Ultra Waxer CI-012 CI-013 CI-001 CI-002 CI CI CI-004 CI-003 CI CI-008 CI-009 CI-010 CI-011 SPECIFICATIONS 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz 110V USA W/ONE TIP 220V USA W/ONE TIP EXTRA HANDPIECE EXTRA TIP ONLY 100V USA 220V USA EXTRA HANDPIECE GREEN NEEDLE BLACK SPRUE BURNING RED WIDE CORD & HANDLE This premium quality electronic waxer includes a control unit and the ultra-spatula, one heating tip, holder for the ultra-spatula and extra heating tips with a clear protective cover and complete operating instructions. Features : Four programmable temperature presets. Quick heat cycle for rapid heating of tips. Temperature range 100 F/60 C to 700 F/370 C. Selectable F or C temp. display. CE Marked. 40. Speedy Wax Pen Handy, cordless pocket tool for extra convenience. Finds use in nearly every wax modeling task, carving, shaping and quick touch ups. General wire form tip for all wax applications. 1.5V, AA alkaline batteries (included). Two different temperature pens high or low. Also available is a three piece accessory tip set. CI-260 CI-261 CI-272 BUILT-IN /110V SM PKT BUILT-IN /220V SM PKT ULTRA SPATULA HANDLE A B C D E F G H I J CI-262 A. SM PKT CI-263 B LG PKT CI-264 C. BEAVERTAIL CI-265 D. SM #7 CI-266 E. LG #7 CI-267 F. NEEDLE CI-268 G. 1 /2 HOLLENBACK CI-269 H. SM DENTURE CI-270 I. LG DENTURE CI-271 J. DENTURE SPOON CI-024 HIGH TEMP. WAX PEN CI-026 ONE TIP REGULATOR CI-025 LOW TEMP. WAX PEN CI-027 WAX PEN TIP- SET OF 3 243

208 WAXES #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 41. Wax Carvers Tools Set The most complete set of carvers for the professional wax modeler. Seven well balanced, polished and tempered steel tools for creative carving and design versatility. All tools are 6 long and organized on a hardwood stand which has a sharpening stone. Carvers are also available individually. CS-156 Spare Carvers SET #1-7 W/ STAND CS-111 CARVER #1 CS-112 CARVER #2 CS-113 CARVER #3 CS-114 CARVER #4 CS-115 CARVER #5 CS-116 CARVER #6 CS-117 CARVER #7 CS-118 SPATULA 42. Wax Heating Tray The wax tray keeps three different waxes melted in separate compartments, two small and one large. Features include a hinged cover, thermostat dial control and pilot lamp. Temperature is adjustable to a maximum of 280 F. Useful for the model maker while assembling trees. 43. Kerr Jewelers Wax Kit A wax assortment which includes round, half round, rectangular and square ring tubes. In addition, it also includes build up wax, sprue wax and sticky wax. This makes it a perfect set for wax modelers. CW-014 CW Deluxe Wax Mandrel SPECIFICATIONS 110V/ 60Hz 220V/ 50Hz A versatile tool to make wax patterns for rings, bracelets and findings. Includes a set of full sleeve sizes 4-13 that rotate 360 and are easily mounted or removed. CW-441 WAX KIT CS-205 COMPLETE SET 44. Alcohol Lamp Glass bowl lamp with a wick and a safety cap. Bowl holds 4 oz. of fuel. Faceted sides of the bowl allow it to be inclined to an angular position. 46. Smoothy Flameless-Wax Finisher Pencil point torch of heated air. Ideal for blending uneven surfaces without actually touching the wax. Uses butane fuel. UL registered. When the tip is removed it may be used as a mini torch for light soldering and repair work. Temp F/1260 C. LM-130 LM-131 LM-132 ADJUSTABLE WICK LARGE WICK REPLACEABLE WICK CW-442 MINI TORCH 244

209 47. Wax Burs These are special burs for carving wax models. Widely spaced flutes provide smooth cutting and will not clog like standard burs. Available individually or in a set of 6 shapes. Shank size 3 / Double-End Vulcanite File WAXES Double end wax files have tooth forms especially designed for use on wax, plastics and other soft materials. One file has both coarse and fine cuts. BR-484 BR-486 BR-485 BR-487 BR-488 BR-489 BR Kerr Debubblizer 016-HELIX 018-ROUND 023-HELIX 023-ROUND 030-ROUND 050-ROUND 6 PCS- (2 HELIX, 4 ROUND) A surface tension reducing agent that enables investment to flow uniformly and fill all portions of the wax pattern. 51. Kerr Vacufilm FL WAX FILE- DELUXE FL WAX FILE- ECONOMY Reduces surface tension specifically for investing under vacuum. CR-920 CR-921 CONTENTS 8 oz 32 oz CR-930 CR Kerr Solitine CONTENTS 8 oz 32 oz A clean up and finishing solvent. Ideal to even out and smooth the surfaces of wax patterns. 49. Kerr Microfilm An oily, but water soluble die lubricant, that aids release of wax patterns from molds without distortion. CR-940 CONTENTS 8 oz CR-910 CR-911 CONTENTS 8 oz 32 oz 53. Wax-o-Film To improve investment adhesion, wax patterns may be dipped or coated with this solution to avoid distortion and air bubbles in casting. CW-165 CONTENTS 1 gallon Comparitive Weights Coin Silver times as heavy as Fine Silver times as heavy as Sterling Gold 10k times as heavy as Sterling Silver times as heavy as 14k Yellow Gold times as heavy as 18k Yellow Gold Gold 14k times as heavy as Sterling Silver times as heavy as 18k Yellow Gold times as heavy as 10k Yellow Gold Gold 18k times as heavy as Sterling Silver times as heavy as 14k Yellow Gold times as heavy as Platinum 54. Wax Kleen An easy to rub on organic solution that gives wax patterns a very smooth surface before casting. Experience high quality finish on cast products. CW-168 CW-169 CONTENTS 8 oz 4 oz 245

210 BOOKS 1. Jewelry Making For Schools, Tradesmen, Craftsmen (Revised Edition) by Murray Bovin; Revised by Peter M. Bovin A comprehensive, well-illustrated, easyto-follow reference guide for the beginner and advanced craftsman. Covers practical and contemporary methods of jewelry making such as casting, stone setting, jewelry construction and decorative processes. BK-401 (Spiral bound 288 pages) 2. Jewelry: Concepts and Technology by Oppi Untracht The most thorough reference book available on traditional and innovative jewelry-making techniques. Features contemporary works from over 300 jewelers. 900 photos, 377 illustrations, step-by-step instructions, comprehensive glossary and a detailed index. A must-have book. BK-402 (Hardcover 840 pages) 3. The Art of Jewelry Making Classic & Original Designs by Alan Revere Learn to craft a wide assortment of original designer jewelry using projects from many contemporary artisans. Contains detailed instructions, an introduction to tools, and techniques such as engraving, forging, soldering, enameling and more. BK-403 (Hardcover 144 pages) 6. The Complete Metalsmith by Tim McCreight A handy bench reference that clearly explains shaping, forging, raising, mechanisms, casting and reticulation. This easy-to-use book describes everything from the use of tools to metals and their properties. BK-406 (Spiral bound 150 pages) 7. Professional Goldsmithing A Contemporary Guide to Traditional Jewelry Techniques by Alan Revere An indispensable reference guide to the art of handcrafting fine jewelry for both beginners and professionals. Combines over 400 color photos and 140 illustrations with charts, tables and step-by-step projects. Learn how to make rings, bracelets, chains, clasps, earrings and necklaces. BK-407 (Hardcover 226 pages) 8. The Design and Creation of Jewelry by Robert Von Neumann A complete reference guide showing traditional and contemporary methods and materials of jewelry making. Learn basic and specialized metalworking, shaping and decorative techniques. Covers cutting, stamping, pickling, coloring, polishing and design transfer methods. BK-408 (Softcover 321 pages) 4. Jewelry: Contemporary Design and Technique by Chuck Evans Solid introduction to creating handmade jewelry and other metal objects. Clear demonstrations of over 65 metalworking techniques. 365 photos and illustrations. Learn standard techniques, as well as specialized tasks including anodizing aluminum and titanium. BK-404 (Hardcover 267 pages) 9. Jewelry Two Books in One by Madeline Coles A unique instructional book with die-cut pages devoted to 23 outstanding projects. The top of each page illustrates each project and the bottom of each page discusses the appropriate techniques required to complete your work. Explanations of 20 techniques including cutting, sawing, drilling, filing, polishing, soldering, wire twisting, mitering, stone setting and more. BK-409 (Hardcover 128 pages) 5. Practical Jewelry Making by Loosli/Merz/Schaffner A comprehensive book providing practical, instructional knowledge for proficiency in the jewelry trade. Extensive coverage of basic operations including filing, sawing, soldering and drilling. Complex forming, assembling, setting and finishing operations are also covered. BK-405 (Hardcover 164 pages) 10. Jeweler s Resource by Bruce G. Knuth A practical tool for the bench jeweler, student and retail jeweler. Easy-to-follow text and illustrations. Contains an extensive list of gems and gem properties; diagrams of gem-cutting styles; legal standards for diamond, gold and silver marketing; formulas and chemical preparations; and measurement conversion and comparison tables. BK-410 (Spiralbound 112 pages) 246

211 11. The Jeweler s Bench Reference by Harold O Connor A handy pocket-size reference guide that explains all types of jewelry making techniques. Vital information on fabricating, soldering, stone-setting, plating and casting. BK-411 (Spiral bound 68 pages) 12. Practical Jewelry Repair by James Hickling An excellent reference book about the methods and techniques of the professional jewelry repairer and restorer. Demonstrates a wide range of repair work using modest tools; the various processes and materials required; and stock holding of precious metals, solders and gemstones. Covers and illustrates basic techniques of soldering, casting, wire-drawing, polishing, sawing and filing. BK-412 (Hardcover 193 pages) 16. Jewelry: Fundamentals of Metalsmithing by Tim McCreight Clear and insightful instruction on jewelry making methods for the beginner or intermediate metalsmith. Features various techniques including fabricating, surface treatments, joining, finishing, stone setting, chain making, mechanisms and casting. Color photos of finished pieces are used to demonstrate each technique. BK-416 (Hardcover 143 pages) 17. Ring Repair by Alan Revere Documents the repair, alteration and restoration of rings in gold, silver and platinum. This book is full of trade secrets and tips and is indispensible to anyone who works with rings. A combination of text and photography presents every step of each project in a clear, concise manner. Includes 140 color photos and 90 sketches. BK-417 (Soft cover 128 pages) BOOKS 13. The Art of Engraving by James B. Meek A complete authoritative introduction to the art of gun engraving. Contains step-by-step instructions, technical information, designs and layouts to complete each project. Over 1,400 photos, drawings and designs. BK-413 (Hardcover 196 pages) 18. Silversmithing by Rupert Fine gold & William Seitz An excellent instructional manual that enables you to translate your jewelry designs into metal by raising, sinking, forging, stretching, fabricating, or casting. Contains more than 700 photos and drawings. BK-418 (Hardcover 460 pages) 14. Silversmithing and Art Metal For Schools, Tradesmen, Craftsmen (Revised Edition) by Murray Bovin; Revised by Peter M. Bovin An excellent project-oriented book for silversmiths. Contains the latest metal techniques including forming, constructing and decorating. Easy-to-follow instructions with over 300 illustrations. BK-414 (Soft cover 176 pages) 19. Centrifugal or Lost Wax Jewelry Casting (Revised Edition) by Murray Bovin; Revised by Peter M. Bovin This how-to book, detailing the elements of centrifugal casting (lost wax method), is a must for beginners and professionals. Thorough explanations on waxes, model making, investing, burnout and casting. This revised edition covers the latest techniques and equipment. Useful information on white metal casting and gold refining. Includes photos of work in progress. BK-419 (Spiral bound 143 pages) 15. Practical Casting: A Studio Reference by Tim McCreight A handy reference for jewelers, metalsmiths and sculptors. Covers many different techniques including model-making, spruing, investing, as well as vacuum, centrifugal and sand casting. BK-415 (Spiral bound 152 pages) 20. Jewelry Wax Modeling by Adolfo Mattiello Learn how to effectively use carving wax to express your ideas and create harmonious designs. Jewelry modeling techniques are presented with progressive step-by-step instructions and drawings of each model. Contains practical information on tools and stone setting, as well as creating your own templates. Provides answers to frequently asked questions. BK-420 (Hardcover 161 pages) 247

212 BOOKS 21. Basic Wax Modeling by Hiroshi Tsuyuki This book illustrates how practical wax modeling is for designing jewelry. Presents 11 basic projects designed to teach the use of tools and types of waxes in the design and creation of wax models. Step-by-step photos, descriptions, sketches and notes demonstrate the processes of each project. Offers a number of sketches suggesting design possibilities. BK-421 (Hardcover 164 pages) 26. Practical Wax Modeling Advanced Techniques for Wax Modelers by Hiroshi Tsuyuki and Yoko Ohba The companion text to Basic Wax Modeling with detailed instructions and photos of each technique. Covers soft and hard wax modeling techniques, combinations of waxes, mitsuro and its uses, a variety of textures and methods of finishing castings. Helpful for experienced wax workers and as an addition to Basic Wax Modeling. BK-426 (Hardcover 154 pages) 22. How to Create Settings in Metal Wire and Wax by Adolfo Mattiello Contains over 250 diagrams for creating settings in metal, wire and wax. Well-illustrated, detailed directions guide you through the procedures of various settings including regular wire settings, slim-line wire settings, wax settings, special wax settings and joining settings to form a cluster. BK-422 (Softcover 33 pages) 23. Classical Loop-in-Loop Chains & Their Derivatives by Jean Reist Stark & Josephine Reist Smith Clearly presented procedures for making a variety of chains based on classic loop-in-loop techniques. Details 34 projects with black & white photos and drawings to guide you through each step. Tools and equipment for each project are specified and appropriate clasps for each chain type are suggested. This is the definitive book on the subject. BK-423 (Hardcover 190 pages) 24. Gemstones of the World by Walter Schumann A comprehensive reference guide for gemstones containing color photos of more than 1,400 specimens. Includes technical data on gemstone properties, formation and structure of gems and cutting. Recommended for beginners and experts. BK-424 (Hardcover 272 pages) 27. Techniques of Jewelry Illustration and Color Rendering by Adolfo Mattiello Beautifully illustrated guide to jewelry rendering. Some of the best jewelry designers in the field explain and demonstrate the illustration process. BK-427 (Hardcover 152 pages) 28. Diamond Setting: The Professional Approach by Robert R. Wooding A complete course in stone-setting, basic enough for an apprentice, yet in-depth enough to benefit the experienced setter. Explores various setting techniques and the preparation, use and care of tools. Detailed explanations of pinpoint-and prongsetting (round and fancy-cut diamonds), bezel setting, channel setting and bead setting. BK-428 (Hardcover 178 pages) 29. Gem Identification Made Easy by Antoinette L. Matlins & A. C. Bonanno Easy-to-read book that explains how to use pocket, portable and laboratory instruments to identify diamonds and colored gems. Learn how to recognize real gems from imitations. Provides the latest information on treatments to improve a gem s appearance. BK-429 (Hardcover 270 pages) Gemstone Buying Guide by Renée Newman Fascinating, easy-to-read guide for choosing and buying colored gems. Practical pointers for judging gems by their color, transparency, flaws and brilliance. Includes topics on gem treatments, cleaning and care, as well as price comparisons, quality evaluations and fake stones. A valuable resource for consumers and professionals. Over 150 color photos. BK-425 (Softcover 148 pages) 30. The Basics of Bead Stringing by Genevieve Bourget A complete illustrated approch for beginners and advance designers. Specific procedures, to begin designing and producing their own jewelry. BK-400 (Soft cover 62 pages)